StreamPix 7 User Guide

StreamPix 7 User Guide
StreamPix 7
User Guide
COPYRIGHTS AND DISCLAIMERS
Published Date: May 18, 2016
This publication contains information proprietary and confidential to NorPix Inc. Any reproduction, disclosure
or unauthorized use of this publication is expressly prohibited except as NorPix Inc. may otherwise authorize
in writing.
NorPix Inc. reserves the right to make changes without notice in product or component design as warranted by
evolution in user needs or progress in engineering or manufacturing technology. Changes which affect the
operation of the unit will be documented in the next revision of the manual.
We have made every effort to ensure the accuracy of the information presented in our documentation.
However, NorPix assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information published. Product
documentation is subject to change without notice. Changes, if any, will be incorporated in new editions of
these documents. NorPix may make improvements or changes in the products or programs described within the
documents at any time without notice. Mention of products or services not manufactured or sold by NorPix is
for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation for such
products or services.
StreamPix is either a registered trademark or trademark of NorPix Inc. in Canada, the United States of
America, and in other countries.
Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Any other trademarks are the property of their respective companies.
Copyright © 2016 NorPix Inc.
1751 Richardson St., Suite 6117
Montreal (QC) H3K 1G6 Canada
Tel: (514) 846-0009
Fax: (514) 846-0117
Web: www.norpix.com
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1. 1
About this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1. 2
About StreamPix 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1. 3
1. 5
Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Record, Snap, and Playback Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Additional Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.4.4
1.4.5
Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Docking Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
What’s New in StreamPix 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
StreamPix Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
What’s New in StreamPix 6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
What’s New in StreamPix 6.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
1.8.1
1. 9
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
What’s New in Streampix 6.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.7.1
1. 8
Application Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
StreamPix 7 Help tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Selected buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.6.1
1.6.2
1. 7
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-19
StreamPix 7 Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.5.1
1.5.2
1. 6
Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StreamPix 7 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authorization codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing StreamPix 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio and DAQ File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StreamPix 7 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1. 4
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
StreamPix 7 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Feedback on the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v6.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
What’s New In StreamPix 6.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1.9.1
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v6.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Chapter 2: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
2. 1
Set up Workspace(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2. 2
Load Camera(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2. 3
Select Destination File(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2. 4
Start/Stop Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
2. 5
Play Back a Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Chapter 3: HOWTOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3. 1
HOWTO Manage Multiple Workspaces/Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.1.1
3. 2
Loading and Unloading Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
HOWTO Set Recording Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.2.1
3.2.2
To Record in a Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
To Playback a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3. 3
HOWTO Export a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
3. 4
HOWTO Use Auto Naming Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3. 5
HOWTO Configure Output File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3. 6
HOWTO Trigger a Software Event from
an external input line (I/O Manager)3-85
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
I/O Manager docked dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera (Hardware) Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85
3-87
3-88
3-88
3. 7
HOWTO Store / Retrieve GPS data as metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3. 8
HOWTO Modify the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3.8.1
3.8.2
3. 9
Modifying the Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Saving your Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
HOWTO Restore Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Chapter 4: Managing Workspaces and Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4. 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.1.1
4.1.2
4. 2
Master Workspace and Select All Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.2.1
4. 3
Stand Alone Workspace Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Controlling Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4. 4
Workspace Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Workspaces and Multi-displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Workspace Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customized Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Naming Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-100
4-100
4-105
4-106
Managing Grabbers and Cameras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
Camera/Frame Grabber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-107
4-107
4-108
4-108
Chapter 5: Using Audio and DAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5. 1
Audio and DAQ Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
5.1.1
5. 2
Managing Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
5.2.1
5. 3
File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Audio tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Managing DAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
Time calibrating video and DAQ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
The DAQ (Data Acquisition) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
DAQ Graphs area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Chapter 6: Managing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
6. 1
Display Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6. 2
Modifying the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refresh Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Display Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-122
6-122
6-125
6-125
Controlling Multiple Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Chapter 7: Controlling Light and Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-129
7. 1
Bayer Conversion and Color Correction Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-130
7. 2
Applying Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-132
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7. 3
Processing Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bayer Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalculate Lookup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export LUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-133
7-134
7-135
7-136
Non-linear Remapping via ASC CDL Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137
7.3.1
Changing the default range values for
the ASC CDL remapping parameter 7-138
Chapter 8: Managing Sequences and Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-139
8. 1
Sequences - Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-140
8. 2
Sequences - Individual Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-141
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
The Sequence Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-142
Manual Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-143
Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-144
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
Other Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-145
Navigating Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-146
Navigating the Sequence from
marked event (docked dialog) 8-147
Home > Selection group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-147
Chapter 9: Managing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-149
9. 1
Auto Naming Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-150
9. 2
AVI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-153
9. 3
MPEG4/TS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-154
9.3.1
9.3.2
9. 4
Color Processing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-155
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9. 5
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-154
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-154
Bit Depth Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Matrix correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous LUT Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-155
9-155
9-158
9-159
DAQ settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161
9.5.1
9.5.2
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161
DAQ Graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161
9. 6
Displayed Data settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-163
9. 7
Interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-164
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.7.5
9.7.6
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QuickZoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Docked Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Application menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Ribbon interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-164
9-165
9-165
9-166
9-166
9-166
9. 8
Metadata settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-169
9. 9
MOV settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-169
9. 10
Playback settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171
9.10.1
9.10.2
9. 11
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-172
Playback Rate settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-173
9.11.1
9.11.2
Sequence playback rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-173
AVI playback rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174
9. 12
Pre/Post Trigger settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174
9. 13
Recording settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176
9.13.1
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176
9.13.2
9.13.3
9.13.4
9. 14
Recording Rate settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-179
9.14.1
9. 15
When a recording ends... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-177
Buffer usage monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-178
Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-178
While Recording.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-179
Recording Manager Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-179
9.15.1
9.15.2
9.15.3
9.15.4
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After the Last Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop Condition(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Manager - Script Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-180
9-181
9-181
9-182
9. 16
Remote Control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
9. 17
GPU Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185
9.17.1
9. 18
Sequence Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-187
9.18.1
9.18.2
9.18.3
9.18.4
9.18.5
9. 19
Special Registry Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-186
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compression for new and exported Sequences . . . . . . . . .
H.264 loop recording capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-187
9-188
9-189
9-189
9-193
Session settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-195
9.19.1
9.19.2
9.19.3
When Windows starts... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-195
When StreamPix starts... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-195
Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196
9. 20
Synchronization settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196
9. 21
Timeshifting settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-197
9. 22
Workspace(s) settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
9.22.1
9.22.2
9. 23
Default Working Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
Default read-ahead buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
More... settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-199
9.23.1
9.23.2
9.23.3
9.23.4
9.23.5
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-199
9-199
9-199
9-201
9-201
Chapter 10: Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-207
10. 1
Tools Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-208
10.1.1
10.1.2
Load/Save Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-208
Metadata Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-208
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10. 2
10-209
10-210
10-210
10-210
Command Line Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-211
10.2.1
10. 3
Disk Benchmarking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debug Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AudioExport.exe utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-211
SendRM Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-213
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
Recording Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grabber Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grabber Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Full Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-214
10-215
10-215
10-215
10. 4
Time Stamp Corrector Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-217
10. 5
Time Source Admin utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-218
10. 6
Editing StreamPix Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-219
Appendix A: Plugin Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-221
Loading & Unloading Plugin Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-222
Free Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-223
AEC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-223
Auto Gain Exposure Iris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-224
Basler Camera Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIRGER Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bitmap Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crosshair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comment overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compression Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exposure Time Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Automatic Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Focus Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRT Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDT Mx Camera Control Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Alpha Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Resize And Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Rolling Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JVC Image Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kinect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-224
A-225
A-226
A-227
A-229
A-230
A-231
A-232
A-232
A-233
A-234
A-235
A-235
A-236
A-237
A-238
A-238
A-239
A-239
A-241
Lens Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Live Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LTC Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lynx IPX Camera Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metadata Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metadata Spy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mikrotron Control Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optronis Camera Control Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Photon Focus Camera Control Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-To-Point Caliper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PTG Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raptor Photonics Control Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence Disk Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T.S. Sync Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Stamp Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UDP Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-241
A-242
A-242
A-242
A-243
A-243
A-244
A-245
A-245
A-246
A-247
A-250
A-251
A-252
A-253
A-253
A-254
A-254
A-256
Premium Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-260
Arduino Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-260
Audio Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-261
DAQ Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Grabber Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS / DMI Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Time Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRT Playout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.264 Decompressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LiDAR Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Scan Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NI Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NI-DAQmx Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NI Pulse Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SimulPix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Scopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Streamer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-261
A-265
A-265
A-272
A-273
A-274
A-274
A-275
A-277
A-280
A-281
A-284
A-284
A-285
A-286
A-286
A-290
A-292
Appendix B: Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-297
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-299
1
Introduction
This chapter provides an overview of StreamPix 7, system requirements, and how
to use this documentation. This chapter contains the following sections:
•
1.1. About this Manual
•
1.2. About StreamPix 7
•
1.3. StreamPix 7 Interface
•
1.4. StreamPix 7 Basic Concepts
•
1.5. What’s New in StreamPix 7
•
1.6. What’s New in Streampix 6.5
•
1.7. What’s New in StreamPix 6.4
•
1.8. What’s New in StreamPix 6.3
•
1.9. What’s New In StreamPix 6.2.
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.1
About this Manual
This manual includes the following sections:
Chapter
Description
Chapter 1: Introduction
Provides a list of StreamPix 7 features and requirements,
documentation conventions, and an overview of the interface.
Chapter 2: Getting Started
Explains how to get going using StreamPix 7.
Chapter 3: HOWTOs
Detailed procedures for the most common tasks.
Chapter 4: Managing Workspaces and Cameras
Describes how to set up and manage multiple workspaces and
cameras and how to work with sound and/or DAQ files.
Chapter 5: Using Audio and DAQ
Describes how to manage Audio and DAQ files.
Chapter 6: Managing the Display
Describes how to use display windows and thumbnails.
Chapter 7: Controlling Light and Color
Adjusting Bayer and color balance at different levels.
Chapter 8: Managing Sequences and Markers
Working with image sequences.
Chapter 9: Managing Settings
Establishing StreamPix 7 preferences.
Chapter 10: Tools
For scheduling recording, saving and loading configurations, working
with scripts, and monitoring your system.
Appendix A: Plugin Modules
Descriptions of all add-on modules.
Appendix B: Keyboard Shortcuts
A list of keyboard shortcuts.
Index
An index of topics and terms.
Table 1-1: StreamPix 7 User Guide organization
How to Use This Manual
If you are new to StreamPix 7, it is recommended that you read this entire manual. If you
are already familiar with StreamPix 7, and just want information on a particular subject,
consult the Table of Contents,the PDF Bookmarks, or the Index.
This manual is distributed as an Adobe Acrobat® PDF and contains numerous hyperlinks
that look like this.
TIP:
12
You can use the Adobe Acrobat® previous/next view buttons (Alt+Left arrow
and Alt+Right arrow) to navigate backwards and forward through viewed
topics.
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
You can also use the PDF text search option by selecting Edit > Find in the Adobe
Acrobat® menu bar and entering the search term.
NOTE:
1.1.1
This manual has offset left and right pages to allow for printing and binding, if
you choose.
Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses the following conventions.
• First mention of individual program elements are in bold, like this: Select the
Home tab.
• Where appropriate, the toolbutton icon appears in the left margin, like this:
Select the Step Forward button.
• Menu and sub-menu choices are separated by an angle bracket, like this:
Workspace > Recording Manager.
• Choices are separated by a vertical line, like this:
Workspace > Recording Manager > Use the default... | Use a custom... .
Frequently, there may be more than one way to accomplish an individual task, such as by
using a keyboard shortcut or a similar toolbutton on another tab. To avoid possible
confusion, this manual explains the most straightforward approach. See Appendix B:
Keyboard Shortcuts.
TIP:
A tip contains useful information to make using StreamPix 7 easier.
NOTE:
A note contains information pertinent to the current task.
A caution contains an instruction that you must follow in order to
prevent loss of data, damage to equipment, or network failure.
Caution
The content of a caution should be read and followed carefully.
Terminology: Grabbers and Cameras
Some cameras may connect directly to the computer, for example through an Ethernet
port, while others may be connected through a “grabber” or acquisition board. For the
purpose of simplicity, this manual uses the term camera to describe any video source, no
matter how it is connected.
NorPix Inc.
13
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Terminology: Sequences and other video formats
You can save captured video in a variety of formats. For the purpose of simplicity, this
manual uses the term Sequence to refer to any recorded video stream.
1.1.2
StreamPix 7 Documentation
All StreamPix 7 documentation is available in PDF format from the Help tab. StreamPix 7
includes the following documents:
• StreamPix 7 User Guide, this manual
• Camera Installation Guide, a guide to configuring your hardware and cameras
• NorPix Sequence File Format, a technical description of the structure of
Sequence files (*.seq).
NOTE:
1.1.3
See also any documentation provided by your grabber and/or camera
manufacturer.
Feedback on the Documentation
Our Technical Publications group welcomes your feedback. Please help us improve future
releases of this document by sending us your comments and suggestions by email to
[email protected]norpix.com.
Commenting in documentation
You can add your own comments and notes, and even attach documents, to this PDF
manual in Acrobat ReaderTM by selecting the View > Comment > Annotations toolbar.
14
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
1.2
About StreamPix 7
StreamPix 7 is a specialized application designed to provide real-time digital video
recording to PC memory or hard disk. Providing the hardware is adequate, video may be
streamed from a camera at full frame rate without dropping any frames.
Although StreamPix 7 is a sophisticated program designed for high-speed image
acquisition, the user-interface is designed to be as easy to use as possible, consisting of
VCR-style controls, menus and dialog boxes.
1.2.1
Main features
• Real-time digital video recording to PC memory or hard disk in Windows Vista,
7, 8, & 10.
• Acquisition from a huge variety of IEEE 1394, Color RGB, NTSC, RS170, USB,
CameraLink, GigE, USB3 Vision, and CoaxPress high resolution and high frame
rate cameras.
• Uncompressed and compressed images capture directly to RAM or hard disk
drive(s).
• Compressed image capture using Windows based codecs or StreamPix
compression utilities.
• Capture/Export to common file formats like BMP, JPEG, TIFF, PNG, AVI, MOV
and more.
• Easy browsing of captured sequences with VCR-style controls: Record, Play/
Pause, Rewind, and Fast-Forward buttons
Visit the NorPix Website for a list of all ongoing supported cameras and frame grabbers:
www.NorPix.com.
1.2.2
StreamPix 7 Versions
There are two versions of StreamPix 7: Single Camera and Multi-camera.
• The Single Camera version is suited to applications that require a single camera.
Multiple workspaces are not supported.
• The Multi-camera version can handle multiple Workspaces and cameras.
NorPix Inc.
NOTE:
Depending on which version of StreamPix 7, “Single Camera” and/or “MultiCamera”, and which Module licenses you purchased, some features or
commands described in this manual may not be present.
NOTE:
Audio and/or DAQ recording require additional authorization codes to unlock
15
StreamPix 7 User Guide
the Audio and/or the DAQ Modules.
NOTE:
1.2.3
If you recently updated StreamPix to use Audio and/or DAQ modules, and
you do not see the Audio and/or DAQ tabs on the ribbon, you may need to
update the configuration file as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Interface > Customize Ribbons.
2. Select Restore Defaults and OK.
3. Restart StreamPix.
Authorization codes
The authorization code determines which application, feature, module, as well as which
grabber/camera(s) are authorized. You must obtain the appropriate authorization codes by
contacting NorPix sales or support. You will be sent an authorization file (.npx) that
includes the specific authorization codes. Either double-click the .npx file to register it or
do it through the Help > License Information (SysInfo) utility.
See also the How to License guide.pdf document for details on authorizing the software.
1.2.4
Installing StreamPix 7
This manual assumes that StreamPix 7 and your hardware configuration are already
installed and operational. If this is not the case, carefully follow to the installation notes
provided by NorPix for your particular video capture hardware.
Caution
When StreamPix 7 is installed, several components need to be
registered with the system. If a particular required “DLL” file is
missing, the correspondent StreamPix driver(s) will not be registered.
When attempting to load the hardware driver from within StreamPix, an
error message: “The DLL of the desired hardware is not correctly
registered,” will be displayed.
Typically, re-installing StreamPix 7 after the hardware driver is installed
fixes this issue.
When purchased on a CD-ROM, StreamPix 7 installation is started automatically by
inserting the disk into the drive. Otherwise, to install StreamPix 7 from the CD-ROM or
from a Web file, select streampix7-setup.exe and follow the on-screen instructions.
1.2.5
Minimum System Requirements
The minimum system requirements to run StreamPix successfully depends on how you
will use the program. Therefore, the following guidelines are recommendations only.
16
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
StreamPix has the following minimum system requirements:
• Minimum: Intel Core - 2nd generation CPU. Core i3 for single camera, core i7
for multiple camera configuration.
Recommended: Intel core i5 4th generation or higher. AMD based CPU is
supported, but performance is weaker.
• 4GB of RAM or higher.
• A supported IEEE, USB3, or GigE digital or analog camera and compatible
frame grabber board.
• Windows Vista, 7, 8, or 10 in 32- or 64-bit versions.*
• Monitor supporting resolution 1024x768 or more.
• A graphic adapter with good 2D performances (PCI Express 16x or better
recommended).
• For recording, from 7200 rpm hard disk(s) optimally with RAID-0 configuration,
depending on the writing speed required,
*Sequences in MOV format are supported in the 32-bit version only.
For sequences stored on hard disk, StreamPix 7 will always assume sufficient bandwidth
availability. If you are unsure of the capabilities of your system, contact NorPix technical
support.
TIP:
The Tools > Disk Benchmarking utility, installed with StreamPix 7, lets you
verify HDD recording capabilities. By default, it is installed in the
...\Norpix\Tools folder.
For high speed cameras or multiple camera setups, check with NorPix for complete
computer configurations.
1.2.6
Supported File Formats
StreamPix 7 supports the following image file formats:
Image Format
Norpix Sequence
File (.seq)
Advantage
Disadvantage
The best format to stream to disk without The .seq image format is supported only by
losing any frames at high frame rates.
StreamPix.
Uncompressed, so no image quality loss.
Also supports several compression
algorithms. NorPix Sequence File images
can be exported to any supported format.
Table 1-2: Supported file formats
NorPix Inc.
17
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Image Format
Windows Bitmap
(.bmp)
Advantage
Disadvantage
Uncompressed, so no image quality loss. Raw images result in large file sizes.
Format is supported by a vast majority of Supports 8 bit mono and 24 bit color images
image processing applications.
only, resulting in a loss of information for
images using higher bit depth.
Tagged Image File Uses a lossless compression algorithm
(.tif)
resulting in relatively smaller file size no
loss of information. Supports mono and
color images at any bit depth.
Compression algorithm is CPU intensive
resulting in longer export times than with the
Bitmap format.
Multipaged
Same as the non-multipaged tiff. Allows a Same as the non-multipaged tiff. Support for
Tagged Image File full sequence of images to be stored in a multipaged .tiff is scarce outside specialized
(.tif)
single file.
applications.
Joint Photographic Good image compression. One of the
Experts Group
most widespread formats on the Internet,
(.jpg)
meaning that almost anybody can view a
.jpg image.
Supports 8 bit mono and 24 bit color images
only, resulting in a loss of information for
images using higher bit depth. The
compression will result in image precision
loss.
Lossless JPG
2000 (.jp2)
Moderate compression increases over
standard JPG. Scalable resolution levels
for display.
Complex and system intensive encoders/
decoders. May produce ringing artefacts near
edges.
SMPTE Moving
Picture Exchange
(.dpx)
A world-wide standard for storing images Large file size due to uncompressed data.
for later processing, suitable for almost
any raster imaging application. Extensive
metadata capabilities.
Digital Negative
(.dng)
Open source lossless format, viewable by Some metadata may be lost when viewed
most imaging software.
from another platform/software.
Flexible Image
Transport System
(.fits)
Uncompressed, so no image quality loss. Color images are divided into 3 individual
Supports both mono and color images at datafiles: red, green and blue. The color plan
any bit depth. A .fits file is composed of 2 is appended to the file name.
segments: a header, which contains
image format information, and a table
holding the image data. More about fits
file format.
Multipaged
Flexible Image
Transport
System(.fits)
Same as the non-multipaged .fits. A full
Same remarks as for non-multipaged fits.
sequence of images is stored as a single
file. The file contains multiple headers
and data tables, one per exported image.
Portable Network
Graphics (.png)
Similar to .gif format. Excellent
compression without any loss of quality.
Compression algorithm is CPU intensive,
resulting in longer export times than with
other formats. Supports 8 bit mono and 24 bit
color images only, resulting in a loss of
information for images using higher bit depth.
Table 1-2: Supported file formats
18
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Image Format
Advantage
Disadvantage
Movie Clip (.avi)
Wide range of codecs available according The supported image format varies from
to specific needs.
codec to codec. Some trial and error needed
to find the right codec for a specific use. The
same codec needs to be installed on all
systems used for playback. (Except for the
uncompressed AVI which comes bundled
with Windows).
Quicktime Movie
(.mov)
Requires Quicktime Player to be installed Some codecs might not be supported under
on the computer. Various codecs
Windows, or might not work or offer reduced
available. Only works on StreamPix 32functionality without a 3rd party license.
bit.
Requires an external 3rd-party viewer for
playback.
NOTE:StreamPix 32-bit will run on
Windows 64-bit.
MPEG 4 (.mp4)
H.264 or MPEG4 compression, resulting
in small file size.
Requires an external 3rd party viewer for
playback. High CPU load unless some
hardware acceleration is available.
MPEG2 (.ts)
H.264 compression, resulting in small file Requires an external 3rd party viewer for
size.
playback. High CPU load unless some
hardware acceleration is available.
Table 1-2: Supported file formats
1.2.7
Audio and DAQ File Types
StreamPix 7 supports the following audio and DAQ file formats:
File Type
Description
Audio files (.aud)
A raw audio file supported by StreamPix 7 and including time stamp information
allowing random sync between audio, video and DAQ data.
NorPix DAQ file (.daq)
Data acquisition file for all the DAQ related data. Includes DAQ samples as well as
some time stamp information.
DAQ Graph Settings
(.display)
The DAQ Graphs settings associated to a specific DAQ file.
Table 1-3: StreamPix Audio and DAQ file types
NorPix Inc.
19
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.3
StreamPix 7 Interface
StreamPix 7 uses the Microsoft® standard ribbon layout, where each Menu tab displays a
ribbon with the most commonly associated toolbuttons for that tab. The main features of
the StreamPix 7 interface are illustrated in Figure 1-1 and described in Table 1-4 below. A
popup tooltip explains each feature as you hover the cursor over it.
The contents of the application menu and the ribbons can be fully customized from Home
> StreamPix Settings > Interface > Customize Application Menu... | Customize Ribbons... .
See “Controlling Multiple Cameras” on page 126.
Application button Quick Access Toolbar
Style selector
Menu tabs
Toolbutton ribbon
Workspace tabs
Display area
Status icons
Display Info
Sequence Slider
Status bar
Docking panel
Figure 1-1: Main Interface, Home tab selected
Feature
Description
Application Menu button
Lists commands related to Sequence files: creation, opening, saving, closing and
exporting. The menu content is different if multiple Workspaces are selected. See
Figure 1-2.
Table 1-4: Interface main features
20
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Feature
Quick Access Toolbar
Description
A toolbar where you can assign your most used toolbuttons to be accessible
independent of the tab selected. See “Add buttons to the Quick Access Toolbar”
on page 90.
TIP: The Quick Access Toolbar right-click menu contains an option to relocate the
toolbar bellow the Toolbutton ribbon.
Style selector
The color scheme used for the GUI. The following styles are supported:
• Luna Blue
• Obsidian Black
• Silver
• Aqua.
Menu tabs
Selecting a Menu tab displays the ribbon of toolbuttons for that tab. The buttons
on each tab are fully customizable, and you can even add your own tabs. See
“Interface settings” on page 164.
TIP: You can double-click on any tab to minimize the ribbon display. When
minimized, the ribbon only appears once a tab is selected and disappears
once a toolbutton on the ribbon is selected. Double-click again on a tab to
restore the toolbutton ribbon.
Toolbutton ribbon
Contains the toolbuttons associated with the selected tab.
Workspace tabs
The Workspace is a basic concept in StreamPix 7 and can include a camera, a
sequence, or an audio or a DAQ file. Every camera or Sequence must be
accessed through a distinct Workspace. You can drag and drop a sequence file
onto a Workspace tab to open it in that workspace. Commands are applied to the
currently active Workspace, as indicated by the Workspace Status icon and by the
highlighted Workspace tab. See “Workspaces” on page 28. Each Workspace also
has its own section in the Docking panel. See Chapter 4: Managing Workspaces
and Cameras.
Display info
Information about the display in this Workspace, mostly information about the
current sequence, the frame rate of the Live feed, the grabber buffer usage. For
the buffer usage, three values are shown: the current buffer usage, the peak buffer
usage for the current session, and the total number of buffers available.
The information to display and when to display it (live, playback or both) can be set
from Home > StreamPix Settings > Displayed Data.
Table 1-4: Interface main features
NorPix Inc.
21
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Feature
Quick Access Toolbar
Description
A toolbar where you can assign your most used toolbuttons to be accessible
independent of the tab selected. See “Add buttons to the Quick Access Toolbar”
on page 90.
TIP: The Quick Access Toolbar right-click menu contains an option to relocate the
toolbar bellow the Toolbutton ribbon.
Style selector
The color scheme used for the GUI. The following styles are supported:
• Luna Blue
• Obsidian Black
• Silver
• Aqua.
Menu tabs
Selecting a Menu tab displays the ribbon of toolbuttons for that tab. The buttons
on each tab are fully customizable, and you can even add your own tabs. See
“Interface settings” on page 164.
TIP: You can double-click on any tab to minimize the ribbon display. When
minimized, the ribbon only appears once a tab is selected and disappears
once a toolbutton on the ribbon is selected. Double-click again on a tab to
restore the toolbutton ribbon.
Toolbutton ribbon
Contains the toolbuttons associated with the selected tab.
Workspace tabs
The Workspace is a basic concept in StreamPix 7 and can include a camera, a
sequence, or an audio or a DAQ file. Every camera or Sequence must be
accessed through a distinct Workspace. You can drag and drop a sequence file
onto a Workspace tab to open it in that workspace. Commands are applied to the
currently active Workspace, as indicated by the Workspace Status icon and by the
highlighted Workspace tab. See “Workspaces” on page 28. Each Workspace also
has its own section in the Docking panel. See Chapter 4: Managing Workspaces
and Cameras.
Display info
Information about the display in this Workspace, mostly information about the
current sequence, the frame rate of the Live feed, the grabber buffer usage. For
the buffer usage, three values are shown: the current buffer usage, the peak buffer
usage for the current session, and the total number of buffers available.
The information to display and when to display it (live, playback or both) can be set
from Home > StreamPix Settings > Displayed Data.
Table 1-4: Interface main features
22
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Feature
Display area
Description
The display area is the section of the Workspace where the camera feed or
sequence displays. You can use Display > Toggle Display to turn off the display
and alleviate some CPU load.
You can also zoom the current display in or out by using Display > zoom controls.
The current zooming values appear in the image status bar. Zooming increases
CPU load compared to normal image (1:1) rendering. The color of the display area
can be adjusted by using Display > Set Background Color.
Status icons
Icons showing whether the Workspace is active, if display is from a camera or
disk, etc. See “Workspace Status Icons” on page 29.
TIP: Any Workspace can be designated as the active one by clicking within its
frame.
Sequence slider
The sequence slider cursor indicates which image is currently shown in the
playback display. The cursor can be dragged to jump to any frame of the
sequence or used to scrub the timeline when a Sequence is paused. A red triangle
appears under the slider to show where the next captured image will be stored in
the sequence, which is normally at its end. See Record, Snap, and Playback
Controls.
NOTE:
The oldest frame in a Sequence is highlighted on the Sequence Slider.
(Useful for looped playback & pre-post recording).
NOTE: The sequence slider is only used when working with sequence files (.seq)
and AVI files (.avi). It is not used with Quicktime movie (.mov) or image
files. StreamPix 7 can record to .mov, but it does not load or playback
Quicktime movie (.mov) or image files.
TIP: The sequence slider can be placed at the top or bottom of the window from
StreamPix Settings > Interface.
Table 1-4: Interface main features
NorPix Inc.
23
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Feature
Status area
Description
Along the bottom of the StreamPix 7 window, the Status area displays information
about the image in the currently active Workspace. The parameters are, in order:
• Resolution, in pixels, shown as Width x Height
• Image size in bytes
• Image format (mono, color, bayer, etc)
• Bit depth per channel / Total bit depth
• Image offset in the display area (not the same as the offset on the camera CCD)
• Image zoom in X and Y. Used to zoom the image in and out.
• Pixel coordinates of the mouse cursor on the image.
• RGB color value of the pixel at mouse cursor position.
Docking panel
An area where frequently used dialog boxes are displayed. See “Docking Panel”
on page 33.
TIP: You can increase the Workspace display area by toggling off the Docking
Panel display through Home > Show Docking Panel.
Table 1-4: Interface main features
1.3.1
Application Menu
Figure 1-2: Application Menu contents
24
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Option
Description
New Sequence on Disk This creates a new sequence on disk. By default, the sequences on disk are not
compressed and the frames are saved directly as they are received from the
camera. This, may require special configurations for high frame rates or
simultaneous use of multiple cameras (RAID, etc).
New Sequence in RAM This creates a new sequence in RAM. Useful for short sequences with fast frame
rates, as it allows for an higher transfer rate than a sequence on disk.
New AVI...
Creates an empty AVI that will be used to capture images. Once the AVI is closed,
the generated AVI file can be played back using MediaPlayer or any compatible
AVI player. You can also playback the recorded AVI directly in StreamPix (See
Open AVI).
New Quicktime movie... Creates an empty MOV that will be used to capture images. Once the MOV is
closed, the generated MOV file can be played using Quicktime player. This is only
available on StreamPix 7 32-bit.
New MP4 movie...
Creates an empty MP4 that will be used to capture images. Once the MP4 is
closed, the generated MP4 file can be played back using MediaPlayer or any
compatible MP4 player. No audio supported.
New MPEG2 TS
movie...
Creates an empty *.ts that will be used to capture images. Once the *.ts is closed,
the generated *.ts file can be played back using any compatible player. You can
also playback the recorded AVI directly in StreamPix. No audio supported.
New Image Sequence
Creates an empty Sequence file that will be used to capture images.
Open Sequence
Opens a previously saved Sequence file. Any currently active Sequence is closed
in consequence. In the “Open” file dialog, there is also an option to load the
sequence in RAM for faster playback/browsing.
NOTE: If there is not enough RAM available, the sequence will only be partially
loaded. Changes made to a sequence loaded in RAM aren't mirrored on
the source sequence on disk.
Reopen Last Sequence Reloads the last sequence used by the current workspace.
Open Sequence(s) in
temporary workspaces
Allows you to open multiple sequence files at once. Each sequence will be loaded
in a temporary workspace.
Open AVI
Opens an existing AVI file in playback mode. Recording can't be done in an AVI in
playback mode. AVI files that were not created by StreamPix might not play.
Clicking Play after an AVI has been recorded will save & close the AVI, then will
reopen it for playback.
Save & Close
Closes the active project, sequence, movie or image sequence. RAM sequences
are discarded when closed. As such, saving a RAM sequence is done by
exporting it to a file on disk prior to closing it. There is also an option in StreamPix
Settings > Sequence to prompt to save a RAM sequence upon closing it.
Table 1-5: Application Menu options
NorPix Inc.
25
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Option
Export ...
Description
While the .seq file format is very convenient within the StreamPix application, it is
not widely supported by 3rd party software, and often needs to be converted to a
more common format. Once the sequence is loaded, it can be exported to AVI
movies, separate .tif images or any other standard file format.
Sequence files and AVI files are the only exportable formats. The File formats
available for export are as follows:
• Sequence file format (.seq)
• AVI Movie Clip (.avi)
• Quicktime Movie (.mov)
• BMP format (.bmp)
• JPEG format (.jpg)
• TIFF format (.tif)
• PNG format (.png)
• Flexible Image Transport System (.fit)
• Lossless JPEG2000 (.jp2)
• Digital Negative format (.dng)
• Windows Media Photo (.wdp)
Current Image to..: Exports the image aligned with the sequence cursor.
Current Selection to..: Exports all images in the current selection. All images will be
named based on the filename typed in the Save As... dialog box.
Full Sequence to..: Exports all images of the sequence. All images will be named
based on the filename typed in the Save As... dialog box.
Multi-Display area ..: Same as the default action but applied to all Workspaces.
(Not available in the Single-Camera version)
Sequence History
Allows you to reload previous recording sessions. Sessions are sorted by dates
and hours. Select the desired hour and the Workspaces/Sequences that were
loaded at that time will be shown. From there, you can either reload all those
sequences or a specific one using the corresponding button. If the Sequence can't
be found because it was moved or deleted, an error message will be shown. You
should delete older or obsolete entries from the history from time to time (to
reduce loading times).
Settings
Show the StreamPix Settings dialog.
Exit
Close StreamPix.
Table 1-5: Application Menu options
1.3.2
StreamPix 7 Help tab
The StreamPix 7 Help tab contains the following:
• StreamPix 7 User Manual, this manual.
26
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
• Camera Installation Manual with detailed instruction on how to setup every
camera supported by StreamPix.
• Sequence File Format Manual provides information on the NorPix Sequence File
format, useful if you want to extract image/data from a sequence file to process in
a third party application such as Matcad.
• License Information displays all the authorization codes that are registered on the
system for the current user.
• About StreamPix accesses the Technical Support contact information and shows
the credits for StreamPix. The Enable DLL Registration button sets the file
association for DLL files to regsvr32.exe as the default application used to
''open” them. It is sometimes used in tech support procedures but should not be
needed otherwise.
• Check for Updates connects to the Norpix FTP to download a small version file.
The newest available version number will be compared to the version number of
the installed software, calling a prompt indicating if a new version of StreamPix
is available for download.
• Send Feedback to NorPix to report a bug, make suggestions, or request specific
features.
1.3.3
Selected buttons
When a toolbutton toggles an action, such as turning the display on or off, its color is
highlighted when it is selected, as shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3: Toolbutton toggled On and Off
NorPix Inc.
27
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.4
StreamPix 7 Basic Concepts
Before you begin using StreamPix 7, you should become familiar with some StreamPix 7
basic concepts.
1.4.1
Workspaces
Workspaces allow you to control multiple cameras. Every camera must be in a distinct
Workspace, and a Workspace can contain only a single camera.
To view a captured sequence, it must also be loaded into a Workspace. A Sequence may
be loaded into a separate Workspace or into the Workspace connected to the camera that
generated the Sequence. See “Sequences” on page 32.
Only one Workspace can be active at a time. The Active workspace is the one containing
the Active Status icon. Click in any Workspace to make it the active one. See “Set up
Workspace(s)” on page 64.
NOTE:
In the StreamPix 7 Single Camera version, only one Workspace is possible.
Multiple Workspaces
Multiple Workspaces allow you to load multiple cameras and Sequences in a single
instance of StreamPix 7. Every camera must belong to a distinct Workspace; however, the
same camera may be assigned to different Workspaces, each with its own settings. Camera
settings are saved and loaded in the Workspace to which the camera is connected. This
way, when a Workspace is opened, the camera settings will be reloaded according to the
settings.
Having multiple workspace configuration can be useful, even when running a single
camera. For instance, If a camera is used to grab images both in a room with normal light
and in a dark room, the exposure time can be adjusted from one condition to another.
To avoid having to adjust the exposure every time the camera is moved from one room to
the other, the Workspaces can be used to save “presets”. This can be done by first naming
the Workspace “Normal”, loading the camera and setting the camera to normal lighting.
Then create a new Workspace named “Dark”, load the same camera and set the camera for
the dark room.
NOTE:
28
A camera may only be open in one Workspace at a time. In the above
example, you would first close the “Normal” Workspace and then open the
“Dark” Workspace.
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
As another example, you could create two Workspaces, named “Workspace A” and
“Workspace B”. Each Workspace has its own tab. Workspace A would control camera A
and the resulting sequence file A, while Workspace B would control camera B and
sequence file B. Select the appropriate tab to make that Workspace active.
To access Workspace management, select Workspace > Workspace Manager.
Master, Linked, and Stand Alone Workspaces
By default, all commands are applied to the active Workspace, but the Home > Select all
Workspaces and Workspace > Master Workspace commands let you control multiple
Workspaces simultaneously.
• Master Workspace: synchronizes all playback and browsing with the Master
Workspace time. Double click on a Workspace tab to set/unset it as the Master.
There can be only one Master Workspace.
• Select all Workspaces: Designates a linked Workspace and applies any command
marked by the Link icon to all selected Workspaces. The Select all Workspaces
command automatically makes the active Workspace the Master.
• Workspace > Stand Alone Workspaces option lets you designate Workspaces to
ignore when using the Master and Select all Workspaces commands.
See “Master Workspace and Select All Workspaces” on page 98.
Workspace Status Icons
The Workspace Status icons provide information about the current Workspace status. Use
Display > Overlays to toggle the display of the Workspace Status icons.
The following table shows the possible Workspace Status icons
Icon
Description
Position
Live view. The camera is streaming flawlessly.
Tab and Overlay
Master workspace (used for synchronized browsing/
playback). Shown in Workspace
Tab
Linked Workspace through Home > Select All
Workspaces. Toolbuttons for affected commands also
contain the Link icon.
Tab and toolbar icon
Table 1-6: Status Icons
NorPix Inc.
29
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Icon
Description
Position
When doing a normal playback following the time
Overlay
stamps, this icon pops up when there is a lag of 100
ms or more between the timestamp of the frame being
currently shown and the frame that should have been
shown at this time. It indicates that the playback frame
rate is slower than the recording frame rate. This could
be caused by weak reading capabilities of the system.
The camera is dropping frames.
Overlay
The camera streaming is stopped.
Overlay
Recording.
Overlay
Sequence view.
Tab
Playback.
Overlay
This workspace has the focus. The Interface
commands are applied to it.
Overlay
Timeshift mode.
Overlay
The Camera > Watchdog is enabled and its timeout
value was reached.
Overlay
Pre/Post Recording mode.
Overlay
Waiting for I/O trigger. I/O event is an event that can
trigger something, like start or stop recording, or prepost, or something else.
Overlay
Table 1-6: Status Icons
1.4.2
Record, Snap, and Playback Controls
The Record, Snap, and Playback controls are found on the Home tab.
Figure 1-4: Record and Playback controls for Stand Alone and Linked Workspaces
30
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Record
The Record button allows you to start/stop recording according to the parameters set in the
Home > StreamPix Settings > Recording > Setting fields.
Snap
The Snap button does the same as the Record button, except that it records a single frame.
Multiple snaps can be done in the same Sequence file. Useful for capturing direct to an
image file, such as .bmp.
Playback Buttons
The Playback buttons use common video control buttons to control playback options. The
Play/Pause button plays back a Sequence according to its timestamps set in the StreamPix
Settings > Playback page. See “Playback settings” on page 171.
The Step Back and Step Forward buttons move the display one frame at a time.
NOTE:
If the Show Manual playback slider is enabled in Settings | Playback Rate, the
appearance of the Step back/Step Forward buttons changes, and selecting the
buttons will increase or decrease the playback speed. See Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5: Change in Step Forward / Step Back controls
NorPix Inc.
31
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.4.3
Additional Playback Options
Time Jump
The Sequence > Time Jump buttons jump the display according to the interval set in
Settings > Playback > General > Length of time jumps in MS (milliseconds. The default is
1000 ms. See “Playback settings” on page 171.
Figure 1-6: Time Jump buttons
Manual Playback Control
Figure 1-7: Manual Playback controls with dropdown menu
When enabled from the StreamPix Settings > Playback page, the Manual Playback control
appears as a secondary slider to the right of the Sequence Slider. The Manual Playback
control dropdown menu allows you to select a fixed frame rate to review the current
sequence/AVI at without regard to the timestamps of each image. Dragging the Manual
Playback control slider to the right will gradually increase forward playback speed,
moving it to the left will increase backward playback speed. See “Playback Rate settings”
on page 173. See also the Note above.
1.4.4
Sequences
Before starting to record, you should specify the destination folder where and the captured
images format. StreamPix 7 offers several possible destinations: Sequence files (on disk or
in RAM), image files (bmp, tiff, jpeg, etc.) and movie files (AVI, Quicktime, MP4, or TS).
Sequence Files, files with the ".seq" extension, (a NorPix proprietary format) are the
StreamPix 7 native format. Images are stored in their raw format, exactly as they were
received from the camera, incurring no quality loss. A Sequence file can also include
compressed frames, such as H.264, JPEG or HEVC format. StreamPix 7 can export
image(s) from an existing sequence to any other supported format (image or movie files).
See 1.2.6. Supported File Formats.
32
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
1.4.5
Docking Panel
The Docking Panel displays a box for each Workspace and its currently associated dialog
boxes, including the current camera and sequence, the list of external modules, and any
dialog boxes for currently active modules.
In a multi-display, you can toggle between showing the dialog for either the current
Workspace or All Workspaces through Home > StreamPix Settings > Interface > Docked
Dialogs.
TIP:
1. Select Workspace > Workspace Color to color code Workspaces tabs and their
associated dialogs.
2. You can increase the Workspace display area by toggling off the Docking
Panel display through Home > Show Docking Panel.
Camera Docked Dialog
Figure 1-8: Camera docked dialog
When the camera is Live, the acquisition speed, in frames per second, is constantly
updated. Clicking on Info will display information about the size and format of images
captured by the camera.
The ROI allows you to define a region of interest for cameras that support this feature.
Coordinate assignment is done by entering the desired offset (in X and in Y), width and
height and clicking on Apply.
NorPix Inc.
33
StreamPix 7 User Guide
The Adjustment button, if supported by the camera, expands the dialog to show the
available adjustments. (Same as Camera > Live Adjustments). If Broadcast is checked,
changes here will be applied to all associated Workspaces with compatible cameras.
Changes to the Adjustments can also be broadcast to other linked Workspaces running
another camera of the same model.
The Settings button, if available, expands the dialog to show the available settings. If
Broadcast is checked, changes here will be applied to all linked Workspaces with
compatible cameras.
Sequence docked dialog
Figure 1-9: Sequence docked dialog
This docked dialog shows information related to the Sequence. Select Show Sequence
Information to display detailed information such as the number of frames in Sequence, the
average capture frame rate, and image format. Click on Edit Description to write a short
text message to be stored in the Sequence header.
The number of frames the Sequence will hold can be adjusted in this dialog to make sure
that, according to the chosen option in StreamPix Settings > Recording, recording will
restart from the beginning of the Sequence or stop when recording position reaches this
value. Default is ''0'' for standard, unlimited, recording.
Any browsing with the Sequence Slider is reflected in the thumbnails section. Select Show
Event Markers to show each logged event. Events are created by Set Event Marker I/O
actions that can be configured from the I/O Manager Docked Dialog. See “HOWTO
Trigger a Software Event from an external input line (I/O Manager)” on page 85.
Select any event to go to the associated frame in the Sequence. Click on Edit... to edit the
selected marker description. You can also delete one or all events using the respective
buttons.
Event Marker information is saved in a separate .xml file named after the Sequence name.
For example, markers for c:\folder\test.seq will be in c:\folder\test.xml.
34
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Pre/Post Trigger docked dialog
This allows you to set custom pre/post behavior for an individual Workspace. The
behavior is identical to the StreamPix Settings > Pre/Post Trigger page. See “Pre/Post
Trigger settings” on page 174.
I/O Manager docked dialog
Figure 1-10: I/O Manager docked dialog
The I/O docked dialog shows information related to Input/Output actions. To create a new
action, double-click on Add new event.... To edit or delete an existing action, double-click
on the line describing that action. In both cases, the Input Action dialog will be shown. See
“HOWTO Trigger a Software Event from an external input line (I/O Manager)” on page
85.
NorPix Inc.
35
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.5
What’s New in StreamPix 7
The following enhancements are included in StreamPix 7
Feature
Description
Multi-language
User Interface
An alternate Language file can be selected for localization through the Settings > General
> Language tab. See “General” on page 164.
Video and DAQ
recording
Recording video and DAQ can be suspended and resumed into the same DEQ+DAQ
files. See “DAQ settings” on page 161.
Time Source dialog A new time source dialog lets you adjust time offset for video, audio and DAQ. See
“External Time Source options” on page 102.
Audio license
An Audio license is now required for all type of audio recording (to AVI, MP4, AUD). See
“Managing Audio” on page 112
GPU Manager
The GPU Manager setting page helps you to determine what acceleration capability is
available from the GPU. See “GPU Management” on page 185
MP4 video and
audio recording
MP4 video and audio recording and playback are now possible with the appropriate
license. See “Using Audio and DAQ” on page 109.
HEVC
Added HEVC compressed video recording and playback. See “MPEG4/TS settings” on
page 154 and “Sequence Settings” on page 187.
Audio track
Recorded audio sound track can be played back to a different audio output device than
the recording source. See “Managing Audio” on page 112.
Audio track
Added audio track selection to allow multichannel recorded audio (more than 2
channels) can to be played back on a 2-channel audio output device. See “Managing
Audio” on page 112.
New settings
• "Press F12 to quit FullScreen Mode" caption can be disabled.
• H.264 compression scheme renamed to H264 Loop (for loop recording) and H264 for
regular recording. See
“Compression for new and exported Sequences” on page 189.
• While recording to H.264 Loop mode, you are advised to set a fixed image size. See
“Compression for new and exported Sequences” on page 189.
• TurboJPEG or Intel JPEG decompression library can be selected (default:
TurboJPEG). See
“Compression for new and exported Sequences” on page 189.
• MP4/TS settings page lets you adjust MP4 encoding parmeters. See
“MPEG4/TS settings” on page 154.
Table 1-7 StreamPix 7 enhancements
36
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
1.5.1
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v7.0
The following bugs and minor issues have been resolved in StreamPix 7
Fix / Change or
Feature
Description
Fix
Recording directly in TIFF is now possible.
Fix
Fixed memory leak when recording with CUDA JPEG compression mode.
Fix
Fixed sorting a sequence does not move the selection markers.
Fix
In Pre-Post, when a sequence file was renamed after the pre-post event date and time, the
associated xml was also renamed.
Fix
Opening a sequence from Windows Explorer now works when StreamPix is already open.
Table 1-8: StreamPix 7 Bug fixes and minor changes
1.5.2
Modules
The following Modules have been added or modified in StreamPix 7
Fix / Change or
New
Description
New
JVC Image Splitter Module (port from StreamPix revision 3).
Change
Lens Control module: added support for Pleora eBUS driver interface and Matrix Vision.
Change
Second View Module: This module now requires a license.
Change
Exposure Time Reader: added support for all the cameras that include an adjustment called
Exposure.
Change
Video Out module: added all dependencies to avoid the need to install DirectX runtime.
Change
• WebStreamer module: nVidia, AMD or Intel based GPU can now be used to perform real
time H264 compression.
• WebStreamer module: better audio device detection to stream compressed audio.
Change
GPS module: Added burn to image capability for Photon Focus double rate image format.
Change
The Time Overlay module is deprecated and replaced by the Display | Time Overlay button.
Table 1-9: StreamPix 7 Module additions and changes
NorPix Inc.
37
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Codecs
New or Updated
Description
New
DirectX Codec: HEVC (H.265) video codec allows higher compression, running on Intel gen
4 and Higher CPU and GPU.
New
DirectX Codec: MPEG4 video codec encoder and decoder (software only).
New
Video codec: GPU accelerated JPEG compression codec, using OpenCL: allow running on
AMD, nVidia and Intel GPU. Resolution up to 4K.
New
DirectX Codec: AMD H.264 encoder using AMD GPU for H.264 accelerated image
compression.
New
DirectX Codec: nVidia CUDA-based HEVC encoder for H265 accelerated image
compression.
New
Audio codec: MP3 audio encoder / decoder.
New
Audio code: AAC audio encoder/decoder.
Updated
CUDA JPEG encoder: horizontal and vertical resolution up to 4096 pixels.
Updated
Codec Settings utility application supports new codecs.
Updated
H.264 codec now supports AMD, nVidia, Intel GPU or CPU. Resolution up to 4K is now
supported.
Table 1-10 StreamPix 7 Codecs
DAQ
Bug / Change
or New Feature
Description
New
StreamPix Studio is deprecated. Audio and DQ features are now available directly in
StreamPix single camera or multiple camera, depending on your license file.
New
It is now possible to suspend and resume recording into the same SEQ and DAQ files.
New
When exporting video with DAQ data, DAQ can be exported to either a DAQ, XLS, or CSV
file container. Range selection is supported.
Table 1-11 StreamPix 7 DAQ fixes and enhancements
38
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Time Source
Bug / Change
or New Feature
Description
New
TSync Event Capture Time Source: time capture input on the TSync can be used for frame
time stamping.
New
Emergent Time Source: Emergent-based camera can be IRIG-B synchronized.
New
A new Time Overlay button in the Display tab replaces the Time Overlay Module.
NOTE: The Time Overlay Module is obsoleted.
Table 1-12 StreamPix 7 time source fixes and enhancements
Camera / Frame Grabber Drivers
Camera/Grabber
Description
C-Cam
New driver.
AJA Kona
New driver interface, linked with SDK 12.3.7.85. Support 4 channels 3G-SDI (4K)
and AES/EBU digital audio and path-through mode.
Olympus
Added support for DP27 camera
Ximea
Linked with XiB libraries, added focus and zoom control when available from
cameras, added support for compressed image format.
National Instrument
• Updated to NIDAQmx revision 15.1.1.
• Added support for USB-6525.
ONVIF
Added ONVIF 1.0 authentication method.
Basler
Updated to Pylon 5.0.
Emergent
• Updated driver to 2.4.2.20.103.
• Multiple cameras can be synchronized using external IRIG-B time source.
IDS
Updated to SDK 4.71.
Matrix Vision GenTL
• Updated to mvGenTL_Acquire 2.14.1.
• Fixed memory allocation issues.
• Fixed ROI selection.
• Added "Acquisition Timeout" adjustment.
Silicon Software
Added support for IO and link speed selection for all MicroEnable 4 and 5 frame
grabbers.
Table 1-13 StreamPix 7 Driver fixes and enhancements
NorPix Inc.
39
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Camera/Grabber
Description
BitFlow
• Updated to SDK 6.0.
• Added support for ROI selection within CXP cameras.
• Fixed initialization when using multiple boards.
DataPath
Updated to SDK 7.8.0 for VisionRGB frame grabber.
Pixelink
• Added camera selector.
• Updated to SDK 9.3.0.8.
• Updated binning and decimation control.
• Fixed trigger mode stability for USB3 devices.
Pleora Ebus
Added support for PvPixelYCbCr422_8_CbYCrY image format.
IDS
Updated to SDK 4.72.
AVT Vimba
Updatedd to SDK 1.4.1.
Virtual Grabber
Added support for audio source.
PTGrey
Update to SDK 2.9.3.11.
Table 1-13 StreamPix 7 Driver fixes and enhancements
TroublePix
Bug / Change or
New Feature
Description
New
Burn timestamp to image on Photon Focus DR format and other special formats.
New
Support H.264 compression, using either CPU or GPU for acceleration.
New
Tv Out Module.
New
Added a software switch to force QuickSync H.264 to run on software event if there is
compatible hardware.
New
Keyboard shortcuts to support ShuttleExpress device and to allow ramp up playback.
New
Web streamer module.
Table 1-14 TroublePix fixes and enhancements
40
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
HERMES
Bug / Change or
New Feature
Description
New
Architecture update so that video capture devices can also support audio capture (Kona
AJA, WEB Camera, Video surveillance devices).
Change
MP4 container: added H.264 hardware acceleration. Added playback capability for video
and audio.
New
JPEG software compression: added a setting to enable/disable multi-threading.
New
MPEG4 compression is now available (CPU based).
New
MPEG4 compressed video can now be stored into SEQ container.
Change
Update H.264 Intel Quick Sync update to version 6.
Bug
Fixed memory leak for some GDI Object related to image overlay classes.
Change
Audio to AVI: added support for any codecs with or without real time compression.
New
Audio: more audio source and format supported. Add some audio format conversion
utilities.
New
Audio: 24 bit captured audio can be played back to 16 bit compatible devices.
Bug
Audio: Fix Audio quality when exporting SEQ+AUD to AVI.
Change
Updated DemoGrab sample code to add support for audio.
Change
Image Pixel Processing (IPP): update to version 7.1
Change
Sentinel - update to the new LDK.
Change
CUDA JPEG compression: Updated to CUDA version 7.5.
Change
RS232 / com port interface: Updated code to support Windows 10.
Table 1-15 Hermes fixes and enhancements
NorPix Inc.
41
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.6
What’s New in Streampix 6.5
Bug / Change or
New Feature
Description
New
Default display mode set to fit image to window for all display (live and playback).
New
Print current display frame (live or playback).
Change
Remove 0,0 pre-post value check. If values are 0,0, simply record in regular continuous
mode.
Fix
Performance optimization for CUDA based JPEG compression. Fixed issues when using
very large image (4 MPx and more).
Fix
Workspace settings button wrong caption.
Fix
Export LUT button wrong caption.
Fix
Launch splash image does not scale with display.
Fix
StreamPix shows error message and/or hangs when a sequence is closed while recording.
Fix
MP4 codec selection cannot use QuickSync for H.264.
Table 1-16 StreamPix 7 new features, fixes and enhancements
1.6.1
Modules
Bug / Change or
New Feature
Description
New
MJPEG decompressor.
New
BlackMagic playout module, with support for limited image format.
Change
Lens Control module: added Zoom support for devices supported by Pleora eBUS 4.x.
Change
Custom Text Overlay module: added export capabilities for H.264 compressed source
image format.
Change
Web Streamer module: added Enable start/stop streaming command in the ribbon as well as
default resolution choices.
Table 1-17 StreamPix 7 modules
42
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
1.6.2
StreamPix Remote
Bug / Change or
New Feature
Description
New
Added Birger control panel.
New
Added a single Workspace display mode according to Workspace selection.
New
Added the context menu select workspace for display in custom layout.
New
Added Web Streamer status information.
Table 1-18 StreamPix Remote fixes and enhancements
NorPix Inc.
43
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.7
What’s New in StreamPix 6.4
The following enhancements are included in StreamPix 6.4
Feature
Description
Looping
The (increment) token now allows looping after a specific value has been
reached.See “Auto Naming Settings” on page 150 and
“Limits” on page 178.
NpxDebug
NpxDebug can run silently in the background while StreamPix is running. See
“Session settings” on page 195.
Markers
Sequence marker are now saved on-the-fly during recordings. Obsolete
(overwritten) markers from the marker file are now deleted. Numerous other
enhancements to Sequence Markers.
See “Sequence Settings” on page 187.
Sequence reload
Sequence from history can now be reloaded into a temporary Workspace
rather than always to the current Workspace.
See “Play Back a Sequence” on page 74.
I/O Device
A virtual IO device is now available. See “I/O
Workspace Settings
• Preallocate RAM sequence with X frames is now available per Workspace
settings.
• Added Sequence limit settings to individual Workspace settings.
• AVI settings can now be set individually per Workspace.
• Added multi-Workspace synchronization while browsing AVI files.
• Added persistence for the current displayed Workspace when there are
multiple Workspaces but display mode is set to single.
See “Workspace Settings”
Grabber and Camera
settings
page
on
page
201.
104.
• You now have the option to broadcast changes made in the grabber
adjustment and Settings docked dialog boxes to specific cameras. Added
persistency.
• The adjustment range is automatically refreshed each time a different
adjustment is selected.
See “Load
I/O Manager
on
Settings”
Camera(s)”
on
page
66.
• I/O Manager can now toggle “Live On”, “Live Off” according to a line input.
• I/O Manager can now toggle “Live On", "Live Off" events for the IO (output)
manager.
See “I/O
Settings”
on
page
201.
Table 1-19 StreamPix 6.4 enhancements
44
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Feature
Metadata
Description
• Metadata can now save input line status.
• The Sequence byte alignment is now saved to the Sequence header.
• The StreamPix version is now written by default in the description field of the
Sequence header.
See “Metadata settings” on page 169 and
“Metadata Manager” on page 208.
Compression settings
• Real time H.264 compression is now available for recording and loop
recording.
• More JPEG lossy compression settings available to support accelerated
hardware compression with GPU. See
“Compression for new and exported Sequences” on page 189.
Workspace
Upon launch, a new setting allows you to disable LIVE capture when loading a
grabber. See “Workspace(s) settings.” on page 198.
Playback Rate
When manual playback mode is enabled through StreamPix Settings >
Playback Rate, the step-back/step-forward buttons slow down or accelerate
the playback. See “Manual Playback” on page 143.
Minimize
Added an option to minimize StreamPix to the system tray via StreamPix
Settings > Session. See “Session settings” on page 195.
StreamPix Studio
• Tools to allow calibrating video versus DAQ time stamp to allow the data to
be presented in sync.
• StreamPix Studio can now apply a different time offset on each stream to
compensate for acquisition lag (video, audio & DAQ).
• Fixed Virtual DAQ: Channel name settings were lost when exiting the setting
dialog.
See “Using
Audio
and
DAQ”
on
page
109.
New module: Auto Gain/
Exposure/Iris
Software control of gain and exposure and iris for most cameras. See “Auto
Gain Exposure Iris” on page 224.
New module: Video Scope
Show images as Waveform, Vector Scope, histogram, RGB parade & YUV
parade.See “Video Scopes” on page 290.
New module: Command Line Assign command line instructions to be run in reaction to various events
occurring in StreamPix. See “Command Line” on page 229.
Revised module: Web
Streamer
Redesigned interface, more parameters, better performance, fixed overflow,
support hardware acceleration with GPU, audio streaming (RTSP only),
forward frame time stamp, check streaming port availability. See “Web
Streamer” on page 292.
Table 1-19 StreamPix 6.4 enhancements
NorPix Inc.
45
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.7.1
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v6.4
The following bugs and minor issues have been resolved in StreamPix 6.4
Fix / Change or Feature
Description
Change: Markers
Improved StreamPix performance on markers and when handling
a large number of markers.
Change: Script management
The list of events is now alphabetically sorted by name.
Change: IO Manager
Devices now have a unique name so that when using multiple
identical devices they can be properly addressed.
Change: Launch
When StreamPix is launched, it automatically re-selects the last
selected Workspace.
Change: Video Out Module
• Added mouse zoom/pan/scroll feature
• Maintain aspect ratio on output monitor when source image
resolution is larger than monitor resolution.
• Support for Bayer setting per Workspace.
Change: Image Merge Module
• A license is needed to use the module.
• On load, set zoom mode according StreamPix display mode: fit
image to window or regular.
Change: Compression estimator module
Added number of compressed frames per second statistic.
Change: Lens Control module
Added support for the Dalsa Genie TS cameras.
Change: Time Stamp analyzer module
Fixed some erroneous calculations for LTC time code.
Fix: GPS Module
• Incorrect position report when used with a Spectracom T-Sync
device
• Crash with SIRF devices,
• Improved COM port communication
• Burn to image on special image formats.
Change: Time overlay module
New option to display time in UTC.
Change: Arduino Pulse Generator
Properly auto detect the right device in COM port list, new
firmware allows much better frequency accuracy (0.1%).
Fix
Sequence history now works correctly with long file paths.
Fix
Asynchronous export to AVI now works correctly.
Fix
Crashes when applying color processing at the grab level on the
mono msb swap 16 bit image format.
Fix
Pre-Post: If a sequence file is renamed after the pre-post event
date and time, the associated xml file is now also renamed.
Table 1-20: StreamPix 6.4 Bug fixes and minor changes
46
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Fix / Change or Feature
Description
Fix
H.264 bit rate setting for compression with CUDA devices.
Fix
H.264 RAM recording: crashes when playing back with 2 or more
Workspaces.
Table 1-20: StreamPix 6.4 Bug fixes and minor changes
StreamPix Remote
Bug / Change or New Feature
Description
New Feature
A Save Configuration button in the Remote Computer ribbon prompts for a
global file name.
Change
When Camera State displays "Live (No Frame)", Acquisition frame rate now
refreshes to 0 rather than keeping the old frame rate, load Grabber button
now keeps a history of previous usage of loaded grabber to allow a fast
reselection.
Fix
Possible case where auto restart StreamPix after a Load config file failed.
Table 1-21 StreamPix Remote fixes and enhancements
BATCHPROC / CLEXPORT / UTILITIES
Bug / Change or New Feature
Description
Sequence Header Editor
H.264 and H.264NL image formats are now supported.
Sequence Header Editor
Added command line parameter to open directly from Explorer.
BatchProc
Right-click on a listed job to launch Notepad to edit the job
command fileBatchProc:
New Feature
A sequence file name can be used to launch the SequenceViewer
utility.
BatchProc
Fixed MOV codec Quality parameter selection.
BatchProc
Fixed EXIF data and time formatting.
MatLab Macro
Modified macro to support Streampix 6 sequence file header and
8192 bock size.
Table 1-22 StreamPix 6.4 BATCHPROC fixes and enhancements
NorPix Inc.
47
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Norpix Codec 1.9.0 (2015)
Bug / Change or New Feature
Description
Fixed
Bayer color pattern name in codec settings: Read GBGR instead
of GBRG.
Fixed
Bit rate parameter setting in QuickSync H.264 codec.
Table 1-23 StreamPix 6.4 Codec fixes and enhancements
Camera / Frame Grabber Drivers
Camera/Grabber
Description
NET GigE
First release. Linked with SynView 1.02.003
Pleora eBUS:
First release. Linked with eBUS SDK 4.0.6.3228
Sumix 15M5x:
First release. Linked with SDK revision 0.1.83 (driver revision
1.0.112)
Silicon Software MicroEnable IV
Linked with SDK 5.2.3
National Instrument NI1429
:Linked with NI-IMAQ rev 14.5 (2015.02)
Great River Technology Matrix A818/
Matrix Hotlink
Linked with SDK 4.13
All Euresys cards
Linked with Multicam driver 6.9.4.2368
Epix
Linked with XCLIB 3.8 from March 2015
Point Grey
Linked with revision 2.7.3.17 of the FlyCapture2 driver.
Point Grey Ladybug
Linked with API 1.14.3.7
Andor CCD
Linked with SDK 2.99.30001.0
Andor sCMOS (Neo/Zyla)
Linked with SDK 3.10.30001.0
AVT Prosilica GigE
Linked with SDK version 1.28
All Dalsa devices
Linked with Sapera 7.50
ONVIF
Added a keep alive message (needed by some specific IP
devices).
Dalsa Xcelera
IO names now includes camera index
Ximea
• Added bit depth selection for 16 bit modes
• Reloading cameras using serial number rather than detection
order list.
Table 1-24 StreamPix 6.4 Driver fixes and enhancements
48
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Camera/Grabber
Description
Cooke PCO
Fixed a bug in Horizontal Binning for pco.edge 4.2 camera.
Silicon Software MicroEnable 5
• Fixed some image formats
• Fixed opening a JAI camera
• Fixed operating with Mikrotron cameras
• Fixed Exposure and Frame Rate not listed in the Adjustments
page for a Mikrotron camera.
Brandywine time source
• Fixed time source GMT/Local time settings
• Renamed PciSyncSetup tool to BrandywineInfoTool.
Dalsa Genie
• Improved reading camera bit depth
• Added support for 10 bit mode
• Added support for lens control
• IO names now includes camera index
Emva GenICam
• Fixed some issues on setting the ROI
• Added several settings and adjustments.
Baumer BGAPI2
• Fixed missing commands in Advanced Settings page
• Added support for automatic camera disconnect/reconnect.
A&B Software ActiveUSB
Fixed reading default pixel format when loading camera.
GEViCAM
Fixed YCbCr709_422_8_CbYCrY image format.
Matrox Morphis
Fixed a buffer alignment issue.
IP Web camera driver
• Added new setting to either use local computer time or decode
possible time stamp coming within the RTSP stream drivers
feature
• Fixed stability when used with multiple sources.
IDS uEye
Fixed time stamping when using camera time versus computer
time.
Black Magic DeckLink
Linked with Blackmagic DeckLink SDK 10.3.1.
Bitflow
• Linked with SDK 5.904
• Added support for Alta 4.
AVT Vimba
• Linked with SDK 1.3.0
• Fixed registration issue.
Table 1-24 StreamPix 6.4 Driver fixes and enhancements
NorPix Inc.
49
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Camera/Grabber
Description
Basler Pylon 4.x
• Linked with SDK 4.2.1.4845
• Added support for the commands in Advanced Settings page
• Added "Maximum Number of Buffers" adjustment
• Added third input line for IO
• Improved "Display Stream Statistics" setting
• Improved Advanced Settings page.
Ximea
• Linked with SDK 4.4.0
• New pop-up selection window for multiple cameras
• Multiple cameras are now reloaded based on serial number
• Added Output Bit Depth setting for 16 bit image formats.
Great River Technology Matrix A818
:Added support for new video modes functions
WDM drivers
Added support for 2 more MEDIASUBTYPE to support EntnerElectronics cameras.
Table 1-24 StreamPix 6.4 Driver fixes and enhancements
50
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
1.8
What’s New in StreamPix 6.3
The following enhancements are included in StreamPix 6.2
Feature
Description
Audio buffer usage monitor
When recording with StreamPix Studio, audio buffer usage is
monitored.
See “Audio buffer usage monitor” on page 113.
Birger module update
A new option lets you enable or disable auto updates on the lens
status. See “BIRGER Control” on page 225.
Command line audio export utility
Audio2Mpa.exe is a command line utility to export .AUD file to
either .MP3 or .AAC compressed audio file. See “AudioExport.exe
utility” on page 211.
Compression Estimator module
The Compression Estimator module can be used to tweak image
compression parameters in StreamPix Settings > Sequence. It uses
current compression settings to report an average compressed
size and other compression statistics.
See “Compression Estimator” on page 231.
GRT Header Data module
Displays in real time the header data captured via Great River
Technology Matrix frame grabber. See “GRT Header Data” on
page 235.
GRT Playout module
Provides the ability to drive the play-out capability for supported
Great River Technology frame grabbers. See “GRT Playout” on
page 273.
H.264 compression loop recording
Loop recording while H.264 compressing images is now possible.
See “H.264 loop recording capability” on page 193.
Quick Export command added in Home
ribbon
Similar to an export, the Quick Export behavior can be configured
from Settings > More... > Quick Export. See “Quick Export” on page
201.
Raptor Photonics Control Tool module
This module works with both OWL 640 and OWL 320 Near IR and
IR cameras from Raptor Photonics. See “Raptor Photonics Control
Tool” on page 251.
Revised compressed sequence
information
To speed up the reading and playback process, index information
for compressed sequence files is now saved as a separate .idx file.
See “Compression for new and exported Sequences” on page
189.
Revised When a Recording Ends options
See “When a recording ends...” on page 177.
Second view module
Similar to Video Out module, but for a single Workspace. See
“Second View” on page 286 and “Video Out” on page 256.
Table 1-25 StreamPix 6.3 enhancements
NorPix Inc.
51
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Feature
Description
Time Stamp Monitor module update
If an LTC-based time source is in use, the module displays an LTC
check box. See “Time Stamp Monitor” on page 254.
UDP Trigger module, new features
The following new features were added to the UDP Trigger
module:
• Text Overlay
• Create New Image Sequence and Start recording
• Create New AVI and Start recording
• Create New MP4 and Start recording
• Create New TS and Start recording.
See “UDP
Trigger”
on
page
254.
Table 1-25 StreamPix 6.3 enhancements
1.8.1
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v6.3
The following bugs and minor issues have been resolved in StreamPix 6.3
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
Sequence Slider enhancement
The oldest frame in a Sequence is highlighted on the Sequence
Slider. (Useful for looped playback & pre-post recording).
New Project command
New Project command added to recording scripts.
Workspace and display names
Workspace and display names can now be toggled on/off in
Settings > Data Display.
Moved Marker listbox
Removed the Marker listbox from the ribbon. The listbox now
appears beside the Sequence Slider if enabled from Settings >
Sequence > Markers.
Time delta shown in tooltip off by one
frame
Fix: Time delta shown in the tooltip when dragging the sequence
slider's thumb was off by one frame.
Creating a new Sequence, avi, etc. file
switches the current display.
Fix: Creating a new Sequence, avi, etc. file no longer switches the
current display.
Image Merge frame rate is fixed
The frame rate for merged Sequences is set at 30 fps.
Meta-data support in DMI module
Meta-data support has been added to the DMI module.
Image Merge new sliders
New sliders have been added to merged image displays.
Settings > Recording
Support added for recording to tiff files.
Settings > Workspace
Browse automatically opens to last folder used.
Table 1-26: StreamPix 6.3 Bug fixes and minor changes
52
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
Settings > Displayed Data
Driver interface name added as an option to display.
Markers ribbon
New Goto first & last markers button.
Markers ribbon
Markers list moved to Sequence ribbon.
CineForm codec
CineForm codec renamed to GoPro-CineForm codec.
Multiple identical GPU improperly listed
Fix: Multiple identical GPU are properly listed for compression.
Time Difference value wrong in Sequence Fix: Correct value for the TimeDifference in the sequence slider
Slider
popup.
Ram Recording with JPEG compression
buffer is too small.
Fix: Resized Ram Recording with JPEG compression buffer.
Small memory leak when recording using Fix: Memory leak when recording using QuickSync H.264 fixed.
QuickSync H.264
R and B color channel inverted in
YUV422 image format H.264
compression.
Fix: YUV422 image format H.264 compressed R and B color
channels corrected.
Need to set Audio buffer size
Set Audio buffer size in Settings > More...
Table 1-26: StreamPix 6.3 Bug fixes and minor changes
StreamPix Remote
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
StreamPix clients list
Alphabetically sort the list of StreamPix clients listed in the New
Connection dialog.
Sequence Slider for multiple Sequences
Fix: Usage of slider for browsing multiple sequences features
improved client frame synchronization.
Table 1-27 StreamPix Remote fixes and enhancements
TroublePix
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
UDP trigger messaging and remote
control
Added support for UDP trigger messaging and remote control.
Table 1-28 TroublePix fixes and enhancements
NorPix Inc.
53
StreamPix 7 User Guide
BATCHPROC
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
New separator character
Added ""-"" as possible separator char for exporting.
Exporting audio files
Added task to allow exporting .AUD to MP3 or AAC audio file.
Exporting Sequence with audio
Added task to allow export SEQ+AUD to .mp4 or .ts (mpeg2)
video file format.
Synchronizing Sequence with audio
Added support for AUD/WAV for Timestamp analyzer.
Export frames to JPG with time stamp to Fixed: export frames to JPG with time stamp to EXIF header
EXIF header failed
works.
Table 1-29 BATCHPROC fixes and enhancements
CODEC
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
Cuda JPEG encoder crashes under
heavy load
Fixed: Possible crash for Norpix Cuda JPEG encoder codec under
heavy load.
Table 1-30 Codec fixes and enhancements
DRIVERS
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
AVT Vimba
New AVT Vimba driver.
Basler pylon 4
• Updated to v4.2.0.4240, added support for the Bayer12p image
formats, added support for the camera timestamp, added
support for camera reconnection.
• Fixed crash when disconnecting the camera, fixed settings order
that was not the same for two identical cameras.
GEViCAM
Fixed some image formats.
Grablink
Fixed switched red and blue channels on several models.
Basler CL module
Fixed some ROI issues.
Xcelera/Hermes
Added support for BGR 10 packed, add support for RGB 16 16 16
16.
Photometrics
microEnable 5
Updated to SDK 3.0.3.8.
Added support for AQ8-CXP6D board.
Table 1-31 Driver fixes and enhancements
54
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
Jenoptik
Update to SDK 3.8.4.0.
Emergent
Added Auto Gain and Auto Gain Set.
microEnable IV
Fixed "FormatFile" tab is not present when using a cameralink full
configuration.
GenAPIInterface
Added support for error management.
PT Grey 2.x
Update to SDK 2.7.3.11.
IP Web camera driver
Added option to capture image stream without decompressing to
allow easy recording to disk.
Table 1-31 Driver fixes and enhancements
HERMES
Bug / Change or Feature
Description
StreamPix clients list
Alphabetically sort the list of StreamPix clients listed in the New
Connection dialog.
Audio export
Added AAC and MP3 capability for exporting .AUD files.
Memory leak
Fixed slight memory leak when recording to Sequence with JPEG
compression.
Sequence Slider for multiple Sequences
Fix: Usage of slider for browsing multiple sequences features
improved client frame synchronization.
Table 1-32 Hermes fixes and enhancements
NorPix Inc.
55
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.9
What’s New In StreamPix 6.2
The following enhancements are included in StreamPix 6.2
Feature
Description
Real time H.264
Decompressor Module
New options for H.264 decoding reduce CPU demand
when recording multiple streams. See “H.264
Decompressor” on page 274.
Hardware Settings and
Broadcast option available
from Control Panel.
Hardware Settings and Broadcast option available from
Control Panel. See “Camera Docked Dialog” on page 33.
Timestamp Corrector Utility The Timestamp Corrector is a command line utility that
allows you to fix a possible corrupted or incorrect time
stamp on a sequence file. See “Time Stamp Corrector
Utility” on page 217.
Web Streamer Module
The Web Streamer Module can stream real time video from
any StreamPix supported grabber/camera to a LAN or
WAN (Internet) by either wired or WIFI connection. See
“Web Streamer” on page 292.
SendRM Command
A new grabber settings command has been added to the
SendRM Command utility. See “SendRM Support” on page
213.
Export multiple displays
A new export mode exports the visible multi-display areas
instead of a single image. This can be used to export what
is seen while in multi-display mode. See “HOWTO Export a
Sequence” on page 82.
I/O Manager
A new option allows you to set a debounce delay in ms,
where supported. See “HOWTO Trigger a Software Event
from an external input line (I/O Manager)” on page 85.
Double-click to open
Workspace Manager
You can now open the Workspace Manager by doubleclicking in an empty space of the Workspace bar. See
“Workspace Manager” on page 96.
Paste to Clipboard
A new button in the Sequence tab pastes the current
sequence image to Window clipboard, so you can quickly
paste an image into a third party application. See “The
Sequence Tab” on page 142.
Table 1-33 StreamPix 6.2 enhancements
56
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Feature
Description
Select Sequence Slider
button
A new button in the Sequence tab performs the same
function as the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-Down arrow, which
puts the focus on the Sequence Slider, allowing you to
browse a Sequence using the arrow keys without first
selecting the Sequence Slider. See
“The Sequence Tab” on page 142.
Enhanced Marker
Navigation
The display area now shows a marker icon overlay when a
marked image is shown. See
“Navigating Markers” on page 146.
Double-click to open DAQ
Graph Settings dialog
Double-clicking in a DAQ Graph area will open the
corresponding Graph Settings dialog (live or file). See
“DAQ Graphs area” on page 116.
DAQ Export to .xls
A new DAQ tab button exports the content of a DAQ
data file to an .xls file. See “Export area” on page 118.
Docked Dialog
enhancements
Two new settings have been added to the Docked Dialog:
• Automatically show/hide the docking panel shows the
docking panel when the cursor moves to the right-most
part of the StreamPix window (when maximixed) and
hides it when the mouse move elsewhere.
• When clicking on a Docked Dialog, automatically select
the matching Workspace. Can be toggled on/off.
See “Docked Dialog” on page 166.
Bayer conversion on Snap
A new setting allows you to do a Bayer conversion on
snapped images only, and leave the other images in raw
(B&W) format. See “Images” on page 199.
GPS Positioning module
New Kalman filter to estimate GPS position, bearing and
speed. See “GPS / DMI Positioning” on page 265.
Image merge module
Added color processing when exporting. See “Image
Resize And Crop” on page 237.
*.mp4 and *.ts support
Support has been added for *.mp4 and *.ts capture and
export. See “Application Menu” on page 24 and “MPEG4/
TS settings” on page 154.
Table 1-33 StreamPix 6.2 enhancements
NorPix Inc.
57
StreamPix 7 User Guide
1.9.1
Bug Fixes and Minor Changes in v6.2
The following bugs and minor issues have been resolved in StreamPix 6.2
Bug or Change
Description of fix
No default folder for Saving/Loading
grabber settings files.
StreamPix now suggests a default folder for Saving/Loading
grabber settings files.
Adjustment page
Fixed refresh issue.
Audio/DAQ streams not always reloaded
properly when re-opening a Project file.
Audio and DAQ files now open properly when Project file is reopened.
Buffer information
Buffer usage information is now refreshed more thoroughly
Buffer usage not refreshed when no new
frames received.
Buffer usage now refreshed even when no new frames are
coming in.
Bug when auto-exporting to multi-TIFF.
Auto-exporting to multi-TIFF format now works correctly.
Can only do a full export on a Project file. Now you can do Export selection on a project file.
Changed behavior in linked Workspace
markers.
When all Workspaces are selected, adding a marker on many
Workspace at once links them together. i.e. if one marker is
renamed, all other linked markers will be renamed accordingly.
Delayed Export not working when
recording stopped by an I/O action.
Delayed Export now working when recording stopped by an I/O
action.
Export
• New Sequence Setting to allow when exporting to down sample
images ( 1 image very n images).
• Fixed bug Export DR1 image format with support for the time
stamp burned to image.
• Fixed Export to multi TIFF.
• DNG image export: too dark for 12 bit image.
Grabber Settings
New option to apply current selected settings to all Workspaces
via docking panel.
H.264 Compressor
Fixed QuickSync H.264 compression for YUV422 format
Hide the Close (X) button in Workspace
tabs.
Added an option in STP4Admin to hide the [X] button in
Workspace tabs.
Interface
• “Show live fps decimals” option.
• New option to hide the [X] button in the workspace tabs.
• Added tooltips for long items in the listboxes in the adjustments
and settings docked dialog.
• Fixed bug StreamPix freezes when window resized upwards.
Table 1-34: StreamPix 6.2 Bug fixes and minor changes
58
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Bug or Change
Description of fix
Large image not displayed properly when In single-display, StreamPix now by default fits image to display if
in single display.
the image is larger than the display area.
License
GUI is now more License aware (some functionalities that
requires an extra license are greyed out).
Maximized StreamPix window incorrectly Maximized StreamPix window now appropriately placed wherever
positioned when Taskbar at the top or left. the Taskbar is located.
Multi-display
In multi-display mode, double click a quadrant to switch to single
display and vice versa.
Record overlays appear before delayed
recording actually starts.
When using a delayed recording, the record overlays now only
appears when the recording actually starts.
Recording
New settings for delaying start/stop recording.
Two new options added in Settings > Recording
• Wait for late frames before stopping the recording, if enabled,
when a recording is stopped, StreamPix will wait for frames that
are still in the buffer list to be processed before actually stopping
the recording.
• Force same number of frames in all Workspaces, if enabled, when
a multi-Workspace recording ends, StreamPix checks which
Workspace has captured the most frames and tells the other
Workspaces to keep recording until they have the same number
of frames.
Recording AVI
Fixed Bug when recording a new AVI: the AVI file name given in
”Save As” window is ignored after the recording stops.
ROI
Fixed bug: ROI button on docking panel disabled for frame
grabbers.
Sequence
Fixed bug: Appending a sequence of 1 frame is not possible.
Sequence in RAM
“New Sequence On Disk” option is now disabled when “Autocreated file type (on record)” is “Sequence in RAM”.
Streampix single
Fixed no Working Folder button in Workspace ribbon.
Time source
Fixed license issue that disables the time source after a while.
Working folder
• Fixed bug “If working folder is in Program Files, the recording file
is not created”.
• Fixed bug “If working folder is in Program Files, the recording file
is not created”.
Table 1-34: StreamPix 6.2 Bug fixes and minor changes
NorPix Inc.
59
StreamPix 7 User Guide
CAMERA / FRAME GRABBER DRIVER
Camera/Grabber
Description
ActiveUSB3
New driver interface.
GenTL Consumer
New driver interfaces with all standard GenTL Producer
CTI files.
NET GigE cameras
New driver.
Raptor Photonics
New driver using Epix frame grabber.
PixeLINK
Updated driver to SDK 9.1.21.4.
Baumer Driver
Update to revision 2.2.
GEViCAM
Fixed bug in Image Format when listing the Bayer formats.
Vieworks
• Fixed TestImageSelector from Advanced Settings page.
• Fixed bug in Advanced Settings page for an enumeration
parameter.
Cooke PCO
• Added support for the “soft ROI” feature
• Added "Fps Based Timing” setting.
• Added support for all the image formats
• Added support for the pco.edge 4.2 camera.
KappaHiRes3XR
Implemented Gamma.
Active Silicon
Fixed bug when using an enumeration parameter in
Advanced Settings page.
BitFlow
• Fixed bug when using an enumeration parameter in
Advanced Settings page.
• Updated to SDK 5.90.
Emergent
Fixed bug when using an enumeration parameter in
Advanced Settings page.
PT Grey 2.x
• Update to SDK 2.6.3.4
• Fixed bug in FillCustomVideoMode setting
• Updated to SDK 2.7.3.8.
WEB IP camera driver
Added Uncompressed grab mode.
NET iCube
Updated to the driver v2.0.4.4.
lumenera USB3
Added SURPRISE REMOVAL event notification.
Table 1-35 Camera/Frame Grabber Driver fixes and enhancements
60
NorPix Inc.
Introduction
Camera/Grabber
Description
Basler pylon 4.0
• Fixed bug that the image is not properly aligned when the
image width is not multiple of 4.
• Fixed crash when disconnecting the camera.
AVT
Added support for new AVT Vimba SDK driver.
Silicon Software
microEnable 5
New driver for using with CoaXPress cameras.
ONVIF
• Now support manually connected camera.
• Improved auto discovery process.
Grablink
Fixed bug not loading properly when another Eureys board
from another family is installed.
Active Silicon
Added support for FIFO overflow and sync loss events.
Picolo U4 with H.264
Fixed corrupted H.264 header and driver update.
Table 1-35 Camera/Frame Grabber Driver fixes and enhancements
STREAMPIX REMOTE
• Added PC & workspaces sorting by names.
• Added Turn On, Turn Off, Restart, Run STP, Close StreamPix, Force Quit in
Remote View pop up.
• Added Watchdog. See “Miscellaneous” on page 108.
• Added show Workspace name overlay even when no images are coming in.
UTILITIES APPLICATION and BATCH PROCESSOR
Utility
Description
SendRM
Added “Export full Sequence to...” with an operand of file
name.
Statistics
New capture statistic collector application that retrieves
details from driver shared memory (driver specific only, not
all camera and FG supported).
Batch Processor
• Added metadata support.
• Added Export metadata with partial image range
selection.
• Fixed special character bug.
Table 1-36 Utilities and Batch Processor enhancements
NorPix Inc.
61
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Utility
Sequence Viewer
Description
Fixed bug when opening a file having the name length
greater than 22 characters.
Table 1-36 Utilities and Batch Processor enhancements
Codecs
Feature
Description
DirectX Codec
New DirectX Codec with NVIDIA® GPU H.264 accelerated
compression.
DirectX Codec
New DirectX Codec using CUDA for JPEG image
compression.
Table 1-37 Codec enhancements
62
NorPix Inc.
2
Getting Started
This chapter contains procedures to initially setup StreamPix 7 to quickly get up
and running. This chapter contains the following sections:
•
2.1 Set up Workspace(s)
•
2.2 Load Camera(s)
•
2.3 Select Destination File(s)
•
2.4 Start/Stop Recording
•
2.5 Play Back a Sequence
StreamPix 7 User Guide
2.1
Set up Workspace(s)
See also:
• “Workspaces” on page 28
• “HOWTO Manage Multiple Workspaces/Cameras” on page 78
• “Managing Workspaces and Cameras” on page 95.
Every grabber/camera must be in a distinct Workspace, and each Workspace can contain
only a single grabber/camera.
To display a Sequence, it must be loaded into a Workspace as well. The Sequence
associated with a camera may be loaded into the same Workspace, into a different
Workspace, or into a temporary Workspace.
NOTE:
In the StreamPix 7 Single Camera version, only one Workspace is possible.
To Set up Workspaces:
1.
Select Workspace > Workspace Manager.
The Workspace Manager dialog box opens.
Figure 2-1: Workspace Manager
64
2.
Select New Workspace and name the new Workspace.
3.
The Grabber Selection dialog box opens, from where you can select the grabber/
camera to associate with this Workspace. To create a Workspace without a video
NorPix Inc.
Getting Started
source, select Cancel when prompted to load one. See “Load Camera(s)” on
page 66.
Figure 2-2: Grabber Selection dialog box
4.
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary. As you create a Workspace, it is automatically
selected for display.
5.
Optionally, uncheck any Workspaces that you do not want to display currently.
6.
Select Done when finished.
The new Workspaces are created. The selected Workspaces are loaded into the
display area and a Workspace Settings dialog box for each Workspace is added to the
Docking Panel.
7.
Select Workspace > Workspace Color.
The Workspace color picker opens.
TIP:
8.
NorPix Inc.
The assigned Workspace color will be applied to both the Workspace tab and the
Workspace dialog box in the Docking Panel, making identification easier.
Assign a unique color to each Workspace.
65
StreamPix 7 User Guide
2.2
Load Camera(s)
To get a live feed, you must load a camera driver into a Workspace. When you create a
new Workspace, it automatically asks you to choose a camera. To load a camera into an
existing Workspace, select the Camera > Load button. In either case, StreamPix 7 prompts
you to select the camera.
NOTE:
The camera/grabber drivers available are dependent on your authorization
codes from NorPix. For additional drivers, contact [email protected]
StreamPix will check for the appropriate codes authorizing the use of the selected grabber
and will attempt to load it. Once successful, the Workspace tab of the current Workspace
will show a new display (a small camera icon) and the Live feed from the camera.
StreamPix supports a wide variety of grabbers and cameras. As many cameras have
properties and settings that are unique to them, the parameters available are dependent on
your camera manufacturer. However, you can adjust the settings of the loaded camera by
accessing them using the Hardware Properties or Live Adjustments buttons from the Home
or Camera tabs.
NOTE:
Caution
NOTE:
Loading a camera can fail if it is not connected or if it is currently used by
another application. The camera can be unloaded by clicking on Unload in the
Camera tab.
Some frame grabbers may attempt to load a default configuration file
incompatible with the camera, which could produce an error and might
even crash StreamPix. To prevent a grabber from starting in Live mode,
uncheck the Start Live box in the Load Grabber dialog box. You can then
access the hardware properties and select the appropriate configuration
before launching the LIVE camera streaming.
If the keyboard scroll lock key is enabled, it will prevent StreamPix 7 from
starting a live stream.
Once loaded, the camera will automatically start capturing images, unless the camera is in
a triggered mode or Scroll Lock is enabled. To toggle the Live feed on or off, for example
to free some CPU resources for other processes, select Home > LIVE.
66
NorPix Inc.
Getting Started
To Load a Camera
1.
Select the Workspace tab.
2.
Select Camera > Load.
The Grabber Selection dialog opens
Figure 2-3: Grabber Selection dialog box
3.
Select your camera from the list.
4.
Three options are available, but for now you can accept the defaults.
a. Start in Live, meaning that the camera will start streaming right away.
b. Reset grabber settings, to restore the default settings.
c. Import grabber settings from a file, to import camera settings from a previously
saved file.
5.
Select OK.
The camera loads into the selected Workspace and begins streaming.
6.
Adjust the camera settings as needed. Refer to the documentation for your camera if
necessary. Camera settings are dependent on your camera manufacturer; however,
they can be divided into two groups:
a. Hardware Properties: Require that streaming is suspended while Hardware
Properties are adjusted. For example, changing image format from 8-bit to 16-bit.
b. Live Adjustments: Can be done while the camera continues to operate. For
example, changing exposure time.
To Adjust the display:
1.
NorPix Inc.
Select Display > Auto-Fill to tile the open Workspaces in the viewing area.
67
StreamPix 7 User Guide
TIP:
2.
Alternatively, you can use one of the other Multi-Display Layout buttons to set the
display.
If necessary, select Set Background Color and choose a background color to make
viewing easier.
TIP:
The default background color is white; however, you can change this to make
viewing easier. Red is often suggested when working in low light or outside at
night.
To Set an ROI:
A Region of Interest (ROI) allows you to define a region of interest for grabbers that
support this feature. Coordinate assignment is done by entering the desired offset (in X
and in Y), width and height and clicking on Apply. If Broadcast is checked, the change
will be applied to all currently selected Workspaces.
1.
In the Docking Panel, select the camera dialog, and expand it if necessary.
2.
Select the ROI button
The ROI area opens.
3.
Enter the Offset X and Y values and the Width and Height.
4.
Optionally, select the Center ROI box to center the area.
5.
Optionally, select Broadcast to apply the ROI to all currently selected Workspaces.
6.
Select the Apply button to see the results in the display area.
To Click and Drag an ROI
NOTE:
Before you can use the following instructions to set an ROI, the Home > Set
Camera ROI box must be selected.
• Drag toward bottom-right to define an ROI.
• Drag toward top-left to restore full image display.
• Dragging toward the bottom-left or the top-right will abort the current ROI
selection.
68
NorPix Inc.
Getting Started
2.3
Select Destination File(s)
See also:
• “Sequences” on page 32
• “Managing Sequences and Markers” on page 139.
Before starting to record, you should specify the destination where and how the captured
images will be stored. StreamPix 7 offers several possible destinations: sequence files (on
disk or in RAM), image files (bmp, tiff, jpeg, etc) and movie files (AVI & Quicktime).
Sequence Files are files with the “.seq” extension, a NorPix proprietary format., are the
StreamPix 7 native format. StreamPix uses a high-speed write mode to transfer images to
disk, in real-time, at the maximum speed allowed by the HDD.
Sequence files have several advantages:
• The number of images is limited only by available disk space.
• Images are stored in their raw format, exactly as they were received from the
camera, incurring no quality loss.
• Sequences can be played back in StreamPix 7.
• StreamPix 7 can export image(s) from an existing sequence to any other
supported format (image files or AVI). See “Supported File Formats” on page 17.
• Each image is time stamped with the precise time at which it was captured. This
allows accurate playback for sequences captured at variable speeds.
• Sequence files can be post-processed with various image processing functions
(ex: applying a Bayer conversion) and exported to any other format.
• Extra metadata can be also saved with the Sequence file, such as GPS
positioning, without interfering with image data.
To create a sequence file to disk:
1.
Select Application Button > New Sequence on Disk.
2.
Choose a name for the sequence and the location to save it.
To create a sequence file in RAM:
1.
Select Application Button > New Sequence in RAM.
RAM sequences are limited in size to the amount of system memory currently
available. When the sequences run out of memory, the recording automatically stops.
To create an AVI file
NorPix Inc.
1.
Select Application Button > New AVI.
2.
Select the desired codec from the Save As file dialog.
69
StreamPix 7 User Guide
To create a Quicktime file:
NOTE:
Available in StreamPix 32-bit versions only.
1.
Select Application Button > New Quicktime movie.
2.
Select the desired codec from the Save As file dialog.
To capture directly to image files:
1.
Select Application Button > New Image Sequence.
2.
Select the desired format.
To close the destination file:
1.
70
Select Application Button > Save & Close command when the destination file is no
longer needed.
NorPix Inc.
Getting Started
2.4
Start/Stop Recording
See also:
• “Record, Snap, and Playback Controls” on page 30
• “HOWTO Set Recording Options” on page 81.
Once the your grabber is loaded and the destination file is set up, you can start recording.
You can either record manually or schedule a specific recording time.
NOTE:
By default, only the currently selected Workspace records. However, if Home
selected, then all Workspaces (except those
excluded) will start recording.
> Select all Workspaces is
Clicking once on Record will start saving frames coming from the grabber to the
destination file (sequence, AVI, images, etc), while clicking a second time on it will stop
recording. If the destination is a Sequence file, the recording will start at the Recording
Position, usually located at the end of the sequence unless modified with the Sequence >
Set Recording Position command.
Snap
The Snap button functions the same as Record, except that the recording will
automatically stop after 1 frame has been captured.
To Record a Sequence Manually
1.
Select a Workspace to make it the active one.
2.
Select Home > Record to start recording.
3.
Select the Record button again to stop recording.
To Change the Starting Point
While a Sequence file is recording, frames are saved starting at the Recording position.
The default recording position is after the last image of the Sequence.
To change the recording position:
NorPix Inc.
1.
With the playback paused, for a Sequence file or Sequence file in RAM only, move
the sequence slider to the desired position.
2.
Select Sequence > Set Recording Position.
The new starting position is shown by a red triangle under the Sequence Slider.
71
StreamPix 7 User Guide
To Record Single Images:
• To record single-frame snapshots of the live feed manually select Home > Snap.
Scheduling a Recording:
Use the Tools > Recording Scheduler to setup recording sessions which can start and stop
without user intervention. One-time, daily, weekly or monthly recordings are available.
NOTE:
The Recording Scheduler uses the Windows Task Manager. Windows may
prompt you for authorization before continuing to set up a recording schedule.
Once the recording mode is chosen, you can also either define a recording duration or tell
StreamPix to keep recording until a stop condition is reached.
TIP:
Most recording scripts offer various stop conditions. See StreamPix Settings >
Recording Rate > Use a recording script.
The Recording Scheduler allows one recording task to be defined. If you need more than
one, you can use the Advanced Scheduling option to access the Windows Task Scheduler
directly.
To Schedule a Recording:
TIP:
72
Answer Yes to any Windows security prompts.
NorPix Inc.
Getting Started
1.
Select Tools > Recording Scheduler.
The Recording Scheduler dialog opens.
Figure 2-4: Grabber Selection dialog box
2.
Select the time interval and select Next.
3.
Select the Recording Duration or Stop condition and select Next.
The scheduled task is displayed in the Last Action area of the Recording Scheduler
dialog box.
The Recording schedule repeats until the task is completed or deleted, either by
creating a new task or by selecting Delete current recording task.
Time interval choices are:
• One-Time: Configure a recording session that will occur a single time at the given
date and time.
• Daily: Configure a recording session that will occur daily. The first recording will
be done on the given date and repeat every day (or every X days) at the chosen
time.
• Weekly: Configure a recording session that will occur weekly. One or more days
of the week can be selected. The recording will then happen every X weeks after
the selected date.
• Monthly: Configure a recording session that will occur monthly. Select one of
more months on which recordings have to be made. Finally, select the repeat
mode from the two available options:
- On a specific day of the month (ex: 4th).
- On a relative day of the month (ex: second Tuesday).
NorPix Inc.
73
StreamPix 7 User Guide
2.5
Play Back a Sequence
See also:
• “Sequences” on page 32
• “Managing Sequences and Markers” on page 139.
To open a Sequence
A Sequence must be opened before it can be viewed. To open a previously captured
Sequence, either:
• Select the Application Button > Open Sequence menu.
The Sequence is added to the Display area right-click menu, from where it can be
assigned to a Workspace.
• Select Application Button > Open Sequence(s) in temporary workspaces menu.
The Sequence is displayed in a new Temporary Workspace.
• Drag-and-drop a Sequence file from Windows Explorer to a Workspace tab.
To assign a display
There are two ways to assign a display to a multi-display area:
• Click on an area to select it, then right-click on a display button in a Workspace
tab.
Or,
• Right-click in a multi-display area and select the display from the popup list.
NOTE:
Multiple displays can be used to show any loaded StreamPix document, such
as a Sequence file, or the output of a grabber, or DAQ file.
See “Multiple Workspaces” on page 28 and “Managing Workspaces and Cameras” on
page 95.
NOTE:
74
From the right-click popup list, you can also enable/disable the Enable autoswitch between live and playback option for the selected area. If enabled, the
display will automatically switch between live and playback displays. For
example, between grabber display (live) and sequence file display (playback).
To see both live AND playback displays at the same time, disable this option
to avoid auto-switching.
NorPix Inc.
Getting Started
Once a sequence has been opened, you can go back and forth between live and playback
displays by clicking the respective display buttons on the tabs.
Viewing a Sequence
The sequence can be reviewed at a fixed frame rate by using the manual playback
controls. The following playback commands are available from the Home tab:
Icon
Name
Description
First Frame
Moves to the first frame of the sequence.
Step Back
Moves to the frame immediately before the current frame.
Play/Pause
Starts/stops the playback of the sequence, following the time stamp of every image.
For instance, if there is a 5 second interval between two frames time stamps, the
playback mechanism will actually wait 5 seconds before showing the next frame.
This can be inconvenient for triggered captures or appended sequences, as two
consecutive frames may be separated by a long time interval. In such a case, use the
Step One Frame Forward to bypass the “time step”, or use the manual playback
controls to playback at a fixed speed regardless of time stamps.
TIP:
You can also use StreamPix Settings > Playback > Maximum Playback
Interval to get around this problem.
TIP:
Reading frames from the sequence file consumes as much bandwidth as
recording them. As such, avoiding doing playback while recording is
strongly advised if there are any doubts about the system's performance.
Step
Forward
Moves to the frame immediately following the current frame.
Last Frame
Moves to the last frame of the sequence.
Table 2-1: Status Icons
You can browse the sequence timeline by moving the Sequence Slider. See “Manual
Playback Control” on page 32.
NorPix Inc.
75
StreamPix 7 User Guide
76
NorPix Inc.
3
HOWTOs
This chapter contains specific procedures (HOWTOs) for performing the following
more common StreamPix 7 tasks. For more information on any topic, consult the
“Table of Contents” on page 3, the Index, or follow the links in each topic.
NOTE:
For the initial setup, see Chapter 2. Getting Started.
•
3.1 HOWTO Manage Multiple Workspaces/Cameras
•
3.2 HOWTO Set Recording Options
•
3.3 HOWTO Export a Sequence
•
3.4 HOWTO Use Auto Naming Schemes
•
3.5 HOWTO Configure Output File Formats
•
3.6 HOWTO Trigger a Software Event from an external input line (I/O
Manager)
•
3.7 HOWTO Store / Retrieve GPS data as metadata
•
3.8 HOWTO Modify the GUI
•
3.9 HOWTO Restore Defaults.
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3.1
HOWTO Manage Multiple Workspaces/Cameras
See also:
• “To Set up Workspaces:” on page 64
• “Workspace Manager” on page 96.
To select which Workspaces to display
1.
Select Workspace > Workspace Manager. The Workspace Manager dialog displays.
2.
Select the Workspaces to display.
3.
Select Done.
A tab is created for each selected Workspace, and a dialog for that Workspace is
added to the Docked Dialogs panel.
TIP:
When you create a new Workspace, you are prompted to assign a camera or
grabber to it. To bypass this step, select Cancel.
To Select all Workspaces
The Select All Workspaces command lets you control multiple Workspaces
simultaneously. Commands, such as switching between Live and Playback and those
associated with playback and recording, including the working folder, the customtoken
and everything in Workspace > Workspace Settings, or assigning a custom recording script
will be broadcast to all selected Workspaces, except for Workspaces designated as Stand
Alone.
1.
Select Home > Select All Workspaces to control multiple Workspaces simultaneously.
Individual Hardware properties and Live adjustments are not broadcast.
NOTE:
When Select All Workspaces is enabled, toolbuttons with actions that apply to
all Workspaces change their icons to show the Select All Workspaces (Link)
icon as part of their icons. The Workspace tab of selected Workspaces also
contains the Link icon.
To designate a Workspace as Stand-Alone
78
1.
Select Workspace > Stand Alone Workspaces. The Stand Alone Workspaces dialog
lists all open Workspaces.
2.
From the Stand Alone Workspaces dialog, select the Workspaces to designate as
standalone.
3.
Close the dialog when done.
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
To designate a Master Workspace
NOTE:
Designating a Master Workspace forces all Workspaces to synchronize (by
either time stamp or frame index) playback and browsing with the Master
Workspace. When you select Select All Workspaces, the active Workspace
automatically becomes the Master.
1.
Enable StreamPix Settings > Playback > Enable synchronization across workspaces.
See “Playback settings” on page 171.
2.
Select Workspace > Master. The currently active Workspace becomes the Master.
TIP:
Double click on a Workspace tab to quickly set/unset it as the Master.
To assign a Workspace color
TIP:
3.1.1
An assigned Workspace color is applied to both the Workspace tab and the
Workspace dialog box in the Docking Panel, making identification easier.
1.
Select Workspace > Workspace Color.
The Workspace color picker opens.
2.
Assign a unique color to each Workspace.
Loading and Unloading Cameras
Normally you are prompted to load a grabber or camera when the Workspace is created.
Use the procedure below to change the assigned camera, assign a camera to a duplicate
Workspace, to restore the default camera settings, or to assign a saved camera
configuration.
To Load a camera
1.
Select the Workspace in the display area.
2.
If the Workspace already has a camera loaded, select Camera > Unload Camera.
3.
Select Load Camera and select from the Grabber Selection pick list.
To Make Live Adjustments
Live adjustments include things such as exposure, brightness, contrast, etc. They can be
done while the camera is streaming. The video stream may be disrupted momentarily
while the changes are applied.
NorPix Inc.
79
StreamPix 7 User Guide
NOTE:
1.
Live Adjustments can also be made from the Docked Dialog box.
Select Camera > Live Adjustments. The Grabber Properties dialog opens.
NOTE:
The actual parameters available are dependent on your hardware. See your
hardware documentation for details.
2.
From the Grabber Properties dialog, make the necessary adjustments.
3.
Select Apply.
TIP:
Use the Default button to restore the camera default settings.
To Change Hardware Properties
NOTE:
Changes to Hardware Properties can also be made from the Docked Dialog
box.
Adjusting hardware properties require that the Live feed be stopped. They include things
such as image size, ROI, bit depth, etc.
1.
Select Camera > Hardware Properties. The Grabber Properties dialog opens and the
Live feed is suspended.
NOTE:
2.
Make the necessary adjustments.
NOTE:
3.
80
Parameters available from the Live Adjustments are also available from here.
The actual parameters available are dependent on your hardware. See your
hardware documentation for details.
Select Apply.
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
3.2
HOWTO Set Recording Options
To Simplify the Start Recording Procedure
1.
Go to Home > StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming, and set up you auto-naming scheme.
When enabled, you won’t be prompted to chose a name for the destination file when
doing a New Sequence On Disk, New AVI On Disk (etc). See “Auto Naming
Settings” on page 150.
2.
Go to Home > StreamPix Settings > Recording to set your Recording settings. Select
an auto-created file (such as a “sequence file on disk”) and enable the auto creation
of the file when the record button is pressed. See “Recording settings” on page 176.
3.
Set your recording Rate. See “Recording Rate settings” on page 179.
4.
To Record, select Home > Record.
To Record on Multiple Cameras Simultaneously
1.
Select Home > Select All Workspaces. The active Workspace becomes the Master, and
all Workspaces are linked to it.
2.
Select Home > Record. All linked Workspaces record synched to the time stamp of the
Master Workspace. See “Master, Linked, and Stand Alone Workspaces” on page 29
and “Master Workspace and Select All Workspaces” on page 98.
To Use a Recording Script
1.
Select StreamPix Settings > Recording Rate > Use a recording script and select Edit
Script. The Recording Manager Editor opens, from where you can develop a script.
See “Recording Manager Editor” on page 179.
See also “Scheduling a Recording:” on page 72.
3.2.1
3.2.2
To Record in a Loop
1.
Go to StreamPix Settings > Recording > Limits.
2.
Set the Sequence limit to the number of frames to be captured in each loop.
3.
Enable Loop recording when limit is reached. Otherwise, the recording will simply
stop when the given number of frames is reached.
4.
Start recording.
To Playback a Sequence
See “Play Back a Sequence” on page 74.
NorPix Inc.
81
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3.3
HOWTO Export a Sequence
See also “Home > Selection group” on page 147.
To Export a Sequence
1.
Open the Sequence.
2.
Optionally, to export a part of a Sequence:
a. Position the Time Slider at the first image of the part of the Sequence to be
exported.
a. Select Home > Set First.
b. Position the Time Slider at the last image in the part of the Sequence to be
exported.
c. Select Set Last.
3.
Select Application Menu > Export Selection To...
4.
Select the export format.
5.
Confirm the export format and file location.
6.
If exporting to anything other than a .seq file, set any other parameters required.
7.
Select Save.
The Sequence is exported to the specified location and format.
NOTE:
82
To export the contents of the visible multi-display areas instead of a single
image, follow the procedure above, except in 3., select Export Multi-Display
area and follow the prompts.
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
3.4
HOWTO Use Auto Naming Schemes
Auto Naming schemes are defined in the StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming page. See
“Auto Naming Settings” on page 150.
TIP:
NorPix Inc.
Enable StreamPix Settings > Recording > Auto-create file to automate file creation
using the Auto naming scheme. See “Recording settings” on page 176.
83
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3.5
HOWTO Configure Output File Formats
Output file formats are defined through StreamPix Settings.
• For Sequence files compression settings and more, see “Sequence Settings” on
page 187.
• For AVI file settings (codec, audio, etc.), see “AVI settings” on page 153.
• For .MOV (Quicktime files) see “MOV settings” on page 169.
• For image files (bmp, jpg, tif, etc), see .“More... settings” on page 199.
84
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
3.6
3.6.1
HOWTO Trigger a Software Event from
an external input line (I/O Manager)
1.
Select StreamPix Settings > More... > I/O.
2.
Enable Input Control.
3.
Select OK. The I/O Manager dialog opens in the Docked dialogs area.
4.
Set the IO Manager parameters as described below.
I/O Manager docked dialog
Figure 3-1: I/O Manager docked dialog
This docked dialog shows information related to Input/Output actions. To create a new
action, double-click on the [Add new event...] line. To edit or delete an existing action,
double-click on the line describing that action. In both cases, the Input Action dialog is
displayed.
Figure 3-2: Input Actions dialog
The Input Action dialog displays the settings of a new or existing action. There are several
parameters to set:
• Source: The general device name. All I/O devices detected by StreamPix are
shown in this list. A source can either be related to the grabber (i.e: frame grabber
with input lines) or an external IO device. A virtual I/O device is also available.
NorPix Inc.
85
StreamPix 7 User Guide
• Device: Where more than a single Source device exists, the device number.
Typically, the device number is 0 (the first one).
• Line/Key: All available lines for the selected source are shown. Select the input
line to monitor.
• Polling delay: This is the interval at which the input line will get polled. If the
value is too low, non-stop polling will be implemented, needlessly consuming
system resources. However, a very high value might miss an event. For instance,
if the input signal goes from level-low to level-high and back to level-low
between two polling actions, StreamPix 7 would not notice that an edge occurred.
NOTE:
For analog I/O devices that require it, you can set the debounce delay in
milliseconds.
NOTE:
Some devices use an interrupt, in which case the polling time is ignored. The
device interrupts the software when a line level change is detected. Interrupt
mode allows a faster response time since no polling is needed.
• Event: This is the event to monitor. The standard Level low, Level high, Rising
edge & Falling edge are available. Typically, the software monitors the voltage
on the input line. Input lines have 2 levels, low or high, i.e.: 0 or 1, physically
usually 0V versus 5V. A rising edge is a transition from 0 to 1, or 0V to 5V. When
a rising edge is required, the software waits for a transition from 0 to 5V, hence it
must read at least once a value of 0V then a value of 5V. A Level low detection
means that when reading the input line level, if the level is low the condition will
be immediately asserted as true. It will not wait until a level change.
• Action: This is the action to take once the event occurs. The available actions are:
- Start Recording to start recording
- Stop Recording to stop recording
- Toggle Recording starts recording if it is not currently recording and stops if it
is.
- Line Testing is a dummy action and does nothing unless it is used in combination with the Log Action described below to test the input lines.
- Trigger Pre/Post Event triggers an event when in Pre/Post Trigger mode.
- Set event marker sets a marker on the current frame.
- Take Reference Time. See “Edit Reference Time” on page 143.
- Clear Reference Time.
- Snap Frame captures a single frame.
86
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
- Start/Stop the frame grabber pulse generator. See “Frame Grabber Pulse
Generator” on page 265.
- Enable/Disable Live toggles the Live camera display.
NOTE:
More actions will be added based on further developments and customer
requests.
• Target: Can either be Self to apply the action to the current Workspace only or All
Workspaces to broadcast the action to all Workspaces. All Workspaces allows
you to synchronize multiple Workspaces without having to configure their I/O
Manager panels separately.
• Event Name: Event name gives you the option to name a particular event rather
than use the default name made as the name of the device followed by the related
input line. For example, if the line is connected to a sensor that monitors a door,
the event name could be “Front door open”. The event name is used when the Set
Event Marker action is selected. It is not used otherwise.
• Log Action: If this is checked, each time the event is detected, StreamPix sends a
debug output to the system. The output can be displayed using Tools > Debug
Log. Use it with the “Line Testing” action to check that the lines are working
properly.
Select the Delete button to remove an existing action from the list. Select Cancel to abort
action editing. Select OK to accept changes made to an existing action or create a new
action.
3.6.2
Camera (Hardware) Trigger
To setup a camera trigger is different than to setup a software trigger action. A camera
trigger is typically called a hardware trigger to differentiate it from a software trigger.
A camera trigger is typically an input on the camera back panel. This input typically
triggers a frame capture. For example, when a part goes in front of the camera, a sensor
can trigger a frame capture, resulting in grabbing an image into the software. No part: no
image.
Camera trigger is usually set at the camera hardware properties where one can define the
trigger in/out line (a camera may have multiple input lines), trigger level (rising edge,
falling edge, etc...) and trigger delay.
For example, if running with multiple cameras, but you want all of then to capture right at
the same time, you could send the same trigger signal to all the camera trigger inputs.
NorPix Inc.
87
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3.6.3
Audio Trigger
An audio trigger can be used to trigger a software event in StreamPix 7. For information
on how to set an audio trigger, see “Audio Trigger” on page 261.
3.6.4
Output Actions
For information on defining output actions, see “Enable Output Control” on page 204.
88
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
3.7
HOWTO Store / Retrieve GPS data as metadata
This section describes how to store and retrieve GPS data as image metadata while
recording or playing back.
To Save GPS data as image metadata
1.
Load the GPS/DMI module in a camera Workspace.
2.
Setup the GPS communication settings, such as USB/RS232 port and speed. When
the GPS delivers information, the decoded NMEA sentences will display in the GPS/
DMI docking panel area. Depending the NMEA sentence, not all information may be
available (e.g. Lat, Long, Alt, Speed, Time, Bearing, etc.)
NOTE:
3.
During recording, the GPS data can be displayed in an image overlay or
burned into image data, depending on the selected display mode option.
If in the GPS Device tab, you enable Save GPS data to file, a csv file is created during
the video recording. The file is located into the same folder as the sequence file, using
the save base name but with a .csv extension. The CSV file contains current GPS
information for each captured frame, but is not, however, retrieved during playback.
To save GPS data as extra metadata to be retrieved and displayed during playback
1.
Enable Metadata: Tools ribbon | Metadata manager
2.
Select Constant Size Calculator. A dialog will pop up. Select Extended GPS, and OK.
3.
Select Register Norpix Metadata Types to save the metadata information, and then
select Save and Close.
4.
Open StreamPix Settings | Metadata. Select yes for Save metadata along with sequence
file.
During recording, GPS data will be stored as extra metadata, in a file with the same
name as the sequence file, with a .seq.metadata extension.
To view the recorded metadata during recording or playback
1.
Load Metadata Overlay Module and adjust some of the options. For example:
a. Overlay metadata On displayed frames
b. Check Extended GPS metadata
c. In the Text tab, select font and position for the metadata.
For more information about the usage of metadata, see “Metadata settings” on page 169.
NorPix Inc.
89
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3.8
HOWTO Modify the GUI
You can modify the StreamPix 7 GUI to suit your work style.
StreamPix 7 lets you modify the GUI to suit the way that is most convenient to how you
work. You can also save different configurations for re-use later. For information on
customizing the default GUI, see “Interface settings” on page 164.
3.8.1
Modifying the Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access Toolbar can provide one-click access to any command no matter which
ribbon is displayed. You can create a shortcut to any command available in either the
Application Button menu or the ribbon toolbars.
Add buttons to the Quick Access Toolbar
1.
Right-click on any toolbutton on any ribbon to display the right-click menu.
2.
Select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
Remove buttons from the Quick Access Toolbar
1.
Right-click on any toolbutton on the Quick Access Toolbar to display the right-click
menu.
2.
Select Remove From Quick Access Toolbar.
Hide/Show buttons on the Quick Access Toolbar
1.
Select the Customize Quick Access Toolbar button on the Quick Access Toolbar (last
button on the right) to display the menu.
2.
Select toolbuttons to have them show, or deselect buttons to hide them.
Customize Quick Access Toolbar
1.
Right-click on any toolbutton on the Quick Access Toolbar to display the right-click
menu.
2.
Select Customize Quick Access Toolbar. The Options dialog opens, from where you
can browse all StreamPix commands.
3.
Browse to the command to add, highlight it, and select Add >>.
4.
Repeat Step 3 for each command to add.
5.
Select an added item and use the Up and Down arrows to order the toolbuttons.
6.
When done, select OK.
TIP:
90
The Reset button restores the StreamPix 7 defaults.
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon
1.
Right-click on any toolbutton on the Quick Access Toolbar to display the right-click
menu.
2.
Select Show Quick Access Toolbar below the ribbon. The Options dialog opens, from
where you can browse all StreamPix commands.
Customize Keyboard Shortcuts
1.
Right-click on any toolbutton on the Quick Access Toolbar to display the right-click
menu.
2.
Select Customize Quick Access Toolbar. The Options dialog opens.
3.
Select Keyboard Shortcuts > Customize. The Customize Keyboard dialog opens.
4.
Browse the Categories and Commands until you reach the command to which to
assign a shortcut. A brief description of each command is displayed when it is
selected. If the command has a keyboard shortcut already assigned, it is listed in the
Current Keys field.
5.
Enter a unique value for the new keyboard shortcut. See “Keyboard Shortcuts” on
page 297.
6.
Select Assign to make the keyboard shortcut assignation.
7.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 for each assignation.
8.
Select Close when done.
To Remove a Keyboard Shortcut:
1.
Right-click on any toolbutton on the Quick Access Toolbar to display the right-click
menu.
2.
Select Customize Quick Access Toolbar. The Options dialog opens.
3.
Select Keyboard Shortcuts > Customize. The Customize Keyboard dialog opens.
4.
Browse the Categories and Commands until you reach the target command. The
assigned keyboard shortcut is listed in the Current Keys field.
5.
Select Remove to remove the keyboard shortcut assignation.
NOTE:
The Reset All toolbuton restores the keyboard shortcuts to the StreamPix 7
defaults. See “Keyboard Shortcuts” on page 297.
Minimize the Ribbon
NorPix Inc.
1.
Right-click on any toolbutton on any ribbon to display the right-click menu.
2.
Select Minimize the Ribbon.
3.
Alternatively, double-click in any ribbon.
91
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3.8.2
Saving your Configuration
Saving a configuration preserves all of the Workspaces, grabber and camera settings for
later re-use.
TIP:
It is a good idea to save the configuration before making dramatic changes to
settings. That way, you can always go back to the saved version if some of your
changes have unpredictable results.
To save customized configurations for later re-use:
1.
Select Tools > Save. A Save As dialog opens to the StreamPix/Configurations folder.
2.
Optionally, browse to a different folder.
3.
Enter a meaningful name for this configuration and select Save.
To re-use a saved configuration
1.
Select Tools > Load.
2.
Select the configuration file to use, and select Open.
3.
A Message confirms that the selected configuration will be loaded the next time that
StreamPix 7 starts. Select Yes to restart StreamPix 7.
4.
Answer Yes to any security prompts. StreamPix 7 starts with the selected
configuration.
TIP:
92
There is no need to uninstall the software in order to reset the software settings.
Uninstalling would also wipe the registration and licensing information. See
“HOWTO Restore Defaults” on page 93.
NorPix Inc.
HOWTOs
3.9
HOWTO Restore Defaults
If, as you work with StreamPix 7, you find that you may have changed some critical
setting, StreamPix 7 offers several ways to recover settings:
• StreamPix Settings > Session > Reset all workspaces... will erase all the
Workspaces while leaving the StreamPix settings intact.
• StreamPix Settings > Session > Reset all StreamPix settings to their default
values... restores StreamPix 7 settings to their default values.
TIP:
NorPix Inc.
If you have developed a configuration that suits your needs, then it is a good
practice to use the Tools > Save Configuration option to protect your settings. To
Save and Reload a Configuration, see “Load/Save Configurations” on
page 208.
93
StreamPix 7 User Guide
94
NorPix Inc.
4
Managing Workspaces and Cameras
This chapter explains how to set up and manage Workspaces and cameras in
StreamPix 7. This chapter contains the following sections:
•
4.1 Overview
•
4.2 Master Workspace and Select All Workspaces
•
4.3 Controlling Workspaces
•
4.4 Managing Grabbers and Cameras
StreamPix 7 User Guide
4.1
Overview
Multiple Workspaces allow you to load multiple cameras and Sequences in a single
instance of StreamPix and to create and save preset settings for future use. Although every
grabber/camera must belong to a distinct Workspace, and a Workspace can contain only a
single grabber/camera, the same grabber/camera may be assigned to different
Workspaces, each with its own settings.
Workspace settings, including the grabber/camera settings, are preserved in the
Workspace from one session to the next. This way, when a Workspace is opened, the
preset grabber/camera settings will be reloaded. See “StreamPix 7 Basic Concepts” on
page 28.
NOTE:
4.1.1
In the StreamPix 7 Single Camera version, only one Workspace is possible.
Workspace Manager
To open the Workspace Manager, do one of the following:
• From the Menu bar, select the Workspace tab, and then select the Workspace
Manager button
Or,
• Double-click in an empty space of the Workspace bar.
The Workspace Manager controls which Workspaces are loaded and unloaded by using the
checkboxes. The Workspace Manager lets you create new Workspaces and, after selecting
a Workspace from the list, you can:
• Reset it to factory settings
• Make a duplicate of it
• Rename or delete it.
96
NOTE:
No two Workspaces can have the same name.
NOTE:
When you create a new Workspace, you are prompted to assign a camera or
grabber to it. To bypass this step, select Cancel.
NorPix Inc.
Managing Workspaces and Cameras
4.1.2
Workspaces and Multi-displays
Although multiple Workspaces may be open at any time, only one Workspace can be
active at a time. The active Workspace is the one containing the Active Status icon. Click
in any Workspace to make it the active one. See “Set up Workspace(s)” on page 64.
When a workspace is opened, a tab for it is displayed in the Display Area and the
associated Docked Dialogs, including any open modules, are displayed in the Docking
panel.
Caution: Don’t
confuse the Workspace with the contents of the Display Area. You
can toggle the display on and off using Display >On/Off, and the display of
the Docking Panel by selecting Home > Show Docking Panel, but the
Workspaces will still remain open. See Chapter 6 Managing the Display.
Parameters set in Home > StreamPix Settings are always global and apply to every
Workspace. Many of these settings can be overridden for the current Workspace (or group
of Workspaces) from the Workspace tab. For example, you can change the working folder,
the (customtoken) and everything in Workspace > Workspace Settings, or assign a custom
recording script. If Home > Select All Workspaces is enabled, the command is broadcast to
every Workspace.
To open or close a Workspace
1.
Select Workspace > Workspace Manager.
2.
Select the Workspace(s) to open, or deselect the Workspaces to close.
3.
Select Done.
TIP:
Click the X button on the right of a Workspace tab to close the Workspace.
See also “To Set up Workspaces:” on page 64 and “Managing Grabbers and Cameras”
on page 107.
NorPix Inc.
97
StreamPix 7 User Guide
4.2
Master Workspace and Select All Workspaces
StreamPix 7 provides two ways to collectively control multiple Workspaces:
• Designating a Master Workspace forces all Workspaces to synchronize playback
and browsing with the Master Workspace, as long as StreamPix Settings >
Playback > Enable sychronization across workspaces has been enabled.
Synchronisation is done either on the frame index or on the time stamp,
depending on the Playback settings. See “Playback settings” on page 171. If no
Master is defined, playback is done independently for each Workspace.
• The Home > Select All Workspaces (CTRL+A) option is used to control multiple
Workspaces simultaneously. Commands, such as switching between Live and
Playback and those associated with playback and recording, including the
working folder, the customtoken and everything in Workspace > Workspace
Settings, or assigning a custom recording script will be broadcast to all selected
Workspaces. Individual Hardware properties & Live adjustments will not be
broadcast.
NOTE:
When Select All Workspaces is enabled, toolbuttons with actions that will be
applied to all Workpaces will change their icons to show the Link (Select All
Workspaces) icon as part of their icons.
To set a Master Workspace:
1.
Select Workspace > Master Workspace. The currently active Workspace becomes the
Master, and the Master icon is added to its tab.
2.
Double click on a Workspace tab to quickly set/unset it as the Master.
To Select All Workspaces:
1.
Select Home > Select All Workspaces. All available Workspaces are linked, and the
active Workspace becomes the Master.
2.
Optionally, to exclude certain Workspaces from either type of group control, select
Workspace > Stand Alone Workspace. (See below.)
- Select the Workspaces to ignore in Multi-Controlled actions.
4.2.1
Stand Alone Workspace Control
The Workspace > Stand Alone Workspaces dialog lets you specify a list of Workspaces to
ignore when using both Master and Select all Workspaces options. Regardless of Master
Workspace and Select All Workspaces options, if a Workspace is included in the Stand
Alone list, it will act as a stand-alone Workspace. It will neither respond to broadcast
commands nor broadcast its commands.
98
NorPix Inc.
Managing Workspaces and Cameras
For example: If
you have Workspace1, Workspace2 and Workspace3, and Workspace 2 is
set to Stand Alone, and Select All Workspaces is selected.
• If Workspace 1 is the current Workspace and you press Record, Workspace 1 and
3 will record.
• If Workspace 2 is the current Workspace and you press Record, only Workspace
2 will record.
NorPix Inc.
99
StreamPix 7 User Guide
4.3
Controlling Workspaces
NOTE:
4.3.1
References to multiple Workspaces apply only to the StreamPix 7 Multicamera version. In this section, toolbuttons that do not apply to StreamPix 7
Single Camera version are marked by an asterisk * and are unavailable in the
GUI.
Workspace Control
Previous Workspace *
Sets the previous Workspace in the Workspace list as current/active.
Next Workspace *
Sets the next Workspace in the Workspace list as current/active.
Close Current Workspace *
Closes the current Workspace. This can also be achieved by clicking on the [X] button in
the Workspace tab.
4.3.2
Customized Workspace
Working Folder *
Opens a file explorer dialog from where you can change the default folder used for saving
files created by the current Workspace. If Home > Select All Workspaces has been selected,
the change will affect all connected Workspaces. (See “Workspace(s) settings.” on
page 198).
Recording Manager *
When using a Recording Manager lets you specify a custom recording script for this
Workspace. The default Recording Manager is defined in StreamPix Settings > Recording
Rate > Edit Script. See “Recording Manager Editor” on page 179.
Workspace Color *
Sets the Workspace tab and Docked Dialog color associated with the currently selected
Workspace to facilitate working with multiple workspaces. The tab font color will either
be white or black depending on the chosen color.
100
NorPix Inc.
Managing Workspaces and Cameras
Select Time Source
StreamPix image time stamping is typically performed when the image is received from
the camera driver API. Because of that, it does not correspond to the exact time at which
the camera sensor is exposed. The delay is typically equal to the sensor read out time plus
the transfer time needed for all pixels to be received inside the computer memory plus the
time the Windows Thread Scheduler needs to notify StreamPix that a new frame is ready.
This total time is dependent on the capture media and some other parameters such as the
pixel clock. At worst, when the media bandwidth is at its maximum, the time stamp can be
off by up to 1/fps. The same time base is shared among each workspace. This allow all
workspaces to work from the same time reference and makes sure all the time information
is consistent.
By default, each captured image is time stamped using the current System Time. However,
Streampix supports various other possible time sources, provided you have purchased the
External Time Source option. You can then change from the default time source to some
other supported time source.
You can also specify a time offset to be applied to the time stamp of each frame. If you
capture DAQ data, the DAQ device will also use the Workspace selected time source.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
If Home > Select All Workspaces has been selected, changes here will affect all
connected Workspaces.
101
StreamPix 7 User Guide
External Time Source options
Select the Time Source button to open the Time Source dialog.
Figure 4-1: Time Source dialog
NOTE:
Besides System Time, all other options require the Accurate Time Stamp
option.
The available time sources are:
Uses the computer local clock. The software can resynchronize its time
reference to the computer clock on a regular basis to avoid time drifting. See
“Periodically resynchronize the timebase” on page 199.
System Time:
Linear Time Code (LTC): Used to identify frames individually by a unique frame number.
The value is HH:MM:SS:FF, with FF being a frame number, from 0 to 24, 25 or 30
according current LTC mode with or without drop frame mode. LTC time code is stored in
place of the 4 first 8 bit pixels of the image (top left corner), as well as in extra metadata.
The following 4 time sources are LTC related:
• AEC-LTC Clock: Uses system time for image time stamping, and appends for each
frame. Requires an extra LTC reader PCIe card and append LTC.
102
NorPix Inc.
Managing Workspaces and Cameras
• Audio Input LTC Clock: LTC being an audio signal, it can be fed to the computer
audio input (left line-in or left mic-in). The module decodes the audio signal and
uses it to tag each frame with current LTC information.
• Horita TCBTX bluetooth: Uses a Horita bluetooth-capable LTC receiver for
wireless LTC decoding. Because of the Bluetooth latency, the LTC can be off by
a few frames.
• Ambient/MIDI: LTC decoding from a MIDI-capable device.
Uses the GPS NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association) string
messages containing time information as a time source. The precision of the reference
time depends on the GPS devices, the type of NMEA string available and the
communication baud rate.
GPS Time Source:
• For best precision, the module expects the ZDA NMEA string. If no ZDA is
available, it defaults to RMC, and eventually GGA. RMC and GGA string time
information are less accurate than ZDA.
• Baud rate should also be set to the maximum possible rate to allow fast
communication speed and better accuracy in between the real GPS time and the
frame time stamping.
Information related to the GPS device (COM port, speed…) must be set via the Settings
page.
This time source can be used in conjunction with the GPS/DMI Positioning module. In
which case, both the time source and the module will share the received NMEA string. In
the GPS/DMI module, make sure to select the NMEA Shared GPS device in the device
list. See “GPS / DMI Positioning” on page 265.
A 10 Hz ZDA output typically includes 2-digit precision (10 milliseconds), but because it
is sent through RS232 com port, the communication speed is not very fast, and it is
asynchronously received at the computer level. Hence, once StreamPix interprets the
string we have measured a possible accuracy jitter of 10 to 50 milliseconds. This means
that by the time the GPS device outputs the NMEA string with the proper ZDA time
information, the time is already past. The computer continues to pull characters from the
serial com port at fairly slow speed. For instance, a 9600 bds takes a few more
milliseconds to transmit each character. All this adds some variability in the accuracy of
the decoded time.
Once the whole time is decoded, the time source compares the last received time with the
current running time received from the previous messages. Two things can happen:
• The current running time is ahead of the received time: this time is ignored to
avoid going backward.
• The current running time is late versus the received time: the running time is set
to run at a faster pace to keep up with the received time.
NorPix Inc.
103
StreamPix 7 User Guide
All this leads to some small variability in the accuracy of the received time, especially
because Windows is not a real-time OS and lacks predictable time slices allocated for
running processes.
Server Time Source: Provided for backward compatibility, this time source should no
longer be used. This time base uses the computer clock and can resync itself with the
computer clock at a programmable rate.
Uses an external PCIe device from Spectracom. The
board can be either genlocked to a GPS signal or IRIG B timebase. Accuracy is within the
microsecond. Upon receiving a new frame, StreamPix reads the time inside the device
registers.
Spectracom TSAT/TPRO/TSYNC:
Uses an external PCIe device from Spectracom. The time
capture input of the board captures with precision when the frame was captured. External
exposure signal must be provided to the board time capture input.
Spectracom TSAT/TPRO Event:
Meinberg Device: Uses Meinberg time receiver devices: GPS based, or IRIG B base. The
device plugs into the computer as a PCIe card or a USB device. Accuracy is within the
microsecond. Upon receiving a new frame, StreamPix reads the time inside the device
registers.
Meinberg Device Event: Uses Meinberg time receiver devices: GPS based, or IRIG B base.
The devices plug into the computer as PCIe cards. The time capture input of the board
captures with precision when the frame was captured. External exposure signal must be
provided to the board time capture input.
Symetricom Devices: Uses a Symetricom time capture device. The device plugs into the
computer as a PCIe card. Accuracy is within the microsecond. Upon receiving a new
frame, StreamPix reads the time inside the device registers.
Brandywine devices: Uses a Brandywine time capture device. The device plugs into the
computer as a PCIe card. Accuracy is within the microsecond. Upon receiving a new
frame, StreamPix reads the time inside the device registers.
For the latest list of supported time devices, see: http://www.norpix.com/support/
compatibletimesource.php
Use the dropdown list to assign to which stream the offset is applied. You can apply a
different time offset to each stream (video, audio, DAQ).
Workspace Settings
The Workspace Settings button opens a dialog from where you can override the default
AVI, Color Processing, Recording, and Sequence settings for the currently active
Workspace. The Advanced tab lets you determine StreamPix Quick Save behavior when
all Workspaces are selected.
By default, these settings are defined via StreamPix global settings and apply to all
Workspaces unless they are overridden via this dialog.
104
NorPix Inc.
Managing Workspaces and Cameras
To change the Workspace settings
1.
Select Workspace > Workspace Settings. A dialog opens with tabs for
Workspace_Name Settings > AVI | Color Processing | Recording | Sequence | Advanced.
2.
Select the Override StreamPix Settings box.
3.
Set the parameters that you want to change. See “AVI settings” on page 153, “Color
Processing settings” on page 155, “Recording settings” on page 176, and “Sequence
Settings” on page 187.
4.
Select OK. The new parameters are applied to the current Workspace(s).
Advanced Workspace settings
The Workspace Settings > Advanced tab lets you set the behavior per Workspace when the
Home > Quick Export button is selected. The options are:
• Always QuickSave: The default, the Sequence will always be saved according to
the Settings > More... > Quick Export parameters. See “Quick Export” on
page 201.
• QuickSave if focussed: The Workspace must have the keyboard or mouse focus
for the Quick Export to be performed.
• Never QuickSave: The Quick Export command will be ignored for this
Workspace.
4.3.3
Auto-Naming Tokens
Increment
Allows you to see and edit the current value of the (increment) token used in some autonaming schemes. If all Workspaces are selected, the change is applied to every
Workspace.
Custom Token
Allows you to set a value for the (customtoken) for the current Workspace. If blank, the
Workspace will use the default token set in StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming. If all
Workspaces are selected, the change is applied to every workspace. See “Auto Naming
Settings” on page 150.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
To be used, the (customtoken) must be included in the auto-naming scheme
defined in StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming.
105
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Edit Default Token
Edit the default (customtoken), as set in StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming. Every
Workspace that uses (customtoken) in its filenaming schemes will use this value.
4.3.4
Recording Rate
If in StreamPix Settings > Recording Rate you enabled Save one frame every x frames, this
slider is used to set how many frames are skipped between each saved frame. For example,
if the camera frame rate is 30 fps, using a value of 1 in 15 will save 2 frames every second.
See “Recording Rate settings” on page 179.
106
NorPix Inc.
Managing Workspaces and Cameras
4.4
4.4.1
Managing Grabbers and Cameras
Camera/Frame Grabber
Load
Selecting the Load Grabber button lists all supported grabbers/cameras, allowing you to
select the one to be used. You can also use this option to reload the camera with its default
settings or load custom camera settings from an .xml file (created from Export Settings).
Duplicate Camera Stream
This will show a dialog with all Workspaces loaded. Select a Workspace to get a copy of
every frame captured by that Workspace camera. This can be useful if you want to save a
stream to two different formats at the same time. (Not available in the Single-Camera
version.)
Unload
Unloads the current camera (or duplicate), if any.
Reload
Reloads the current camera. Use this after changing the buffer count for a camera. (Buffers
are allocated when a camera loads.)
4.4.2
Settings and Adjustments
Hardware Properties
Settings shown in Hardware Properties require the camera to stop streaming, as they can
cause modifications in the image format, requiring buffer reallocation and other profound
changes in StreamPix. For instance, modifying the ROI (region of interest) and capture bit
depth (8 bits / 16 bits) hardware settings will change the image format. As such, accessing
Hardware Properties while the camera is in Live mode will automatically suspend Live to
enable setting modifications.
Live Adjustments
Live Adjustments are grabber settings that can be changed while the camera is streaming,
as they do not affect image format. For instance on most cameras, exposure, gain and
brightness are adjustable in Live mode. Accessing Live Adjustments while the camera is
not Live will automatically start the Live process. On most cameras, every setting in Live
adjustment will be also available in Hardware Properties, although the opposite is not
always true.
NorPix Inc.
107
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Advanced Settings
Advanced settings are available on some models of GigE cameras.
Export Settings
Export the current camera settings to an .xml file.
4.4.3
Buffers
Buffer count
Changes the number of buffers allocated by the grabbers in this workspace. If 0 is used,
the grabber will use the default value set in Streampix Settings > Workspace(s). See
“Default read-ahead buffers” on page 198.
NOTE:
4.4.4
Reload the camera after changing the buffer count.
Miscellaneous
Show Image Information
This lists complete information on the format of the frames received from the grabber.
Watchdog
Here you can specify a timeout value in seconds. When the specified length of time
elapses without a new frame being sent by the camera, a yellow warning sign is shown in
the display area. Useful, for example, if you want to get a visual notification when a
camera has been disconnected.
108
NorPix Inc.
5
Using Audio and DAQ
This chapter contains information on working with Audio and DAQ files. This
chapter contains the following sections:
•
5.1 Audio and DAQ Overview
•
5.2 Managing Audio
•
5.3 Managing DAQ.
NOTE:
The Audio and DAQ modules each require a specific license.
StreamPix 7 User Guide
5.1
Audio and DAQ Overview
StreamPix 7 lets you record synchronized audio and/or DAQ data in conjunction with the
video within a single or multiple Workspace. Recording video and DAQ can be suspended
and resumed into the same DEQ+DAQ files.
StreamPix 7 typically uses a Sequence file (.seq) for the video along with an audio and/or
DAQ file. The audio file extension is .aud, and DAQ is .daq. The Audio and DAQ tabs are
added to the menu bar once you have acquired the appropriate licenses.
Each Workspace can have (or not) Audio, DAQ, and video. The buttons in the Audio &
DAQ tabs interact with the audio and DAQ files of the active Workspace.
The following lists the audio and video capabilities of StreamPix 7:
• Simultaneously recording video and audio to AVI
Simultaneously playback video and audio from AVI
• Recording video to MP4
Recording video to TS
• Simultaneously recording video to SEQ and audio to AUD
Simultaneously playback video from SEQ and audio from AUD
• Simultaneously recording video to SEQ and audio to WAV/BWAV
Simultaneously playback video from SEQ and audio from WAV/BWAV
• Simultaneously recording video to SEQ and audio to AAC
Simultaneously playback video from SEQ and audio from AAC
• Simultaneously recording video to SEQ and audio to MP3
Simultaneously playback video from SEQ and audio from MP3
NOTE:
110
If you recently updated StreamPix to use Audio and/or DAQ modules, and
you do not see the Audio and/or DAQ tabs on the ribbon, you may need to
update the configuration file as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Interface > Customize Ribbons.
2. Select Restore Defaults and OK.
3. Restart StreamPix.
NorPix Inc.
Using Audio and DAQ
5.1.1
File Types
StreamPix 7 supports the following audio and DAQ file formats:
File Type
Description
Audio files (.aud)
A raw audio file supported by StreamPix 7 and including time
stamp information allowing random sync between audio, video
and DAQ data.
NorPix DAQ file (.daq)
Data acquisition file for all the DAQ related data. Includes DAQ
samples as well as some time stamp information
DAQ Graph Settings
(.display)
The DAQ Graphs settings associated to a specific DAQ file.
Table 5-1: StreamPix Audio and DAQ file types
Here is an example of the files generated for a Sequence named “Capture” that has both
audio and DAQ.
• Sequence: Capture.seq
• Audio File: Capture.aud
• DAQ File: Capture.daq
• Graph Settings Files: Capture.daq.display.
NorPix Inc.
111
StreamPix 7 User Guide
5.2
Managing Audio
The Audio tab is added to the menu bar once you have acquired the appropriate license.
5.2.1
Audio tab
The Audio tab contains specific tools to manage audio. The settings in the Audio tab
interact with the audio files of the active Workspace. You can set separate drivers for both
the input (Audio Driver area) and the output audio (Audio Output Driver area). The contents
of the Audio Settings dialog boxes are dependent on the selected driver.
Audio Driver and Audio Output Driver
Driver
Use the drop-down list to select the audio driver to use: ASIO, DirectX or Grabber. The
DirectX driver is compatible with almost all sound cards supported by Windows.
The ASIO driver requires an audio input device that is ASIO compatible. The ASIO driver
is limited only by the number of inputs on the external audio device. Most devices that
support more than 2 audio inputs simultaneously have an ASIO driver. On the other hand,
most devices that have a DirectX input driver can handle only 2 input channels (left and
right).
Audio Settings
The Audio Settings dialog box lets you customize the audio format for the recording. In the
dialog box for the DirectX driver you can set the input (recording) and output (playback)
devices along with the input and output formats. The #Samples is the number of audio
samples per buffer. Using a larger value may help reduce audible noise and “clicks” during
playback.
By default, you should select the largest #sample available (this may be hardware
dependant).
The audio synchronization with the video is “by buffer”: each buffer includes its time
stamp information. Short buffers result in a smaller granularity for synchronization. For
example, when sampling at 44.1kHz, there are 44.1k samples per second. Hence a 4096
buffer size will result in about 44100/4096 = 10 synchronization points per second of
video. At 30 fps, that will result in audio synchronization with video at more or less 3
frames.
Recording
Target
Use the drop-down list to select the target file format for recording. The choices are:
112
NorPix Inc.
Using Audio and DAQ
• None: meaning that no audio file will be recorded.
• AUD: A NorPix proprietary format which stores raw/lossless audio.
•
BWAVE [definition needed]
•
MP3 [definition needed]
• AAC: Advanced Audio Coding provides lossy digital audio compression similar
to MP3, but with generally better sound quality at similar bit rates.
File Info
This shows some information about the current audio file, if any.
Audio Levels
Input Level
This shows the current volume level of the input device. You can use it to see if your
device is hearing anything. You can use the drop-down list to select which channel(s) of
the audio device to monitor.
Audio Output Driver
The Audio Output Driver area lets you select the output driver and hardware device.
Playback Position
The Playback Position displays the start and stop position for the current recording. You
can edit the start position for playback.
Audio buffer usage monitor
When recording, audio buffer usage is monitored and displayed in the Docking panel. If
buffers run out, an Audio Packet Drop event is generated and stored in an XML file and a
warning pops up in the Information Bar.
Figure 5-1: Audio buffer usage monitor
Volume
Output Volume
This slider allows you to adjust the audio volume for playback.
NorPix Inc.
113
StreamPix 7 User Guide
5.3
Managing DAQ
DAQ stands for Data Acquisition, which is a way of sampling information from the real
world to generate data that can be manipulated by a computer. The DAQ tab is added to
the menu bar once you have acquired the appropriate license.
Within StreamPix 7, DAQ is related to devices that perform analog to digital conversion
for electric signals, like voltage, heat, temperature, pressure, etc.
For example, DAQ will allow you to monitor and collect the temperature of a device while
also video recording it.
DAQ data are typically sampled at high frequency, like 1000 Hz, hence much faster than a
video frame. So, there are multiple DAQ data sets to display per captured frame. Also, a
typical DAQ application will sample multiple signals (lines) in parallel. DAQ can be
sampled over 8 bit (256 values), or more typically 16 bit.
Audio is basically a DAQ data, typically sampled at 44.1 kHz, 16 bit. Stereo would be 2
lines of data acquired in parallel.
DAQ is typically captured via DAQ frame grabbers, either PCIe boards or via a USB
interface. When exporting video with DAQ data, DAQ can be exported to DAQ/XLS/
CSV file container. Range selection is supported.
The DAQ global settings are set through the Settings > DAQ page.
When exporting, DAQ can be overlaid onto the image by using: File | Export | Display
Area.
5.3.1
Time calibrating video and DAQ data
For aligning the DAQ data to the video, a time calibration must be done. Video frames are
typically time stamped after exposing, readout and refer to the host, typically when the
frame is received by the computer driver.
DAQ data are grouped into packets. Packets are also time stamped when received from the
DAQ device streaming channel, following the digitization, buffering and streaming to
host. Digitization frequency, number of channels, streaming speed and packet size are all
factors that influence the time it takes for the host to receive the DAQ data.
Since the same time source reference is used for video, audio and DAQ, the latency
between these different data channels may cause the data stream time stamps to be out of
sync. At low fps, it may be unnoticed, however at high fps you might notice an alignment
gap.
As a work around, you need to “time calibrate” one stream to the other by selecting
Workspace | Time Source and adjusting the time offset for either the video or the DAQ
channel.
114
NorPix Inc.
Using Audio and DAQ
Since the DAQ channel is usually the fastest sampling rate, it is recommended to offset the
slowest (video) time stamp. For example, running a camera at 50 fps, frame time is 1/
50=20 millisecond. The video time could be up to 20 ms late from the DAQ time stamp.
NOTE:
It is important to recalibrate each time the DAQ parameters such as sampling
frequency and video capture rate changes, because latency varies.
DAQ data are received as packets, i.e. a dataset. Each dataset is time stamped upon being
received. Each DAQ sample time stamp is then calculated from its dataset time stamps,
based on sampling frequency and sample position in the dataset.
When exporting video and DAQ, the granularity is based on a whole dataset. As an
example, running a camera a 1000 fps, while the pooling delay is set at 10 millisecond,
means a dataset will contain DAQ data for 10 frames. Exporting from frame 5 to 10, will
still result in exporting the whole 10ms dataset. Post data processing will be needed to get
rid of the unneeded DAQ.
When possible, we recommend setting the pooling delay close the camera sampling
duration to allow better matching granularity.
5.3.2
The DAQ (Data Acquisition) tab
The DAQ (Data Acquisition) tab provides the following tools for working with DAQ.
DAQ Driver area
Driver
Use the drop-down list to select the DAQ driver to use. The DAQ module option is only
used by 3rd party modules using DAQ. The NorPix Virtual DAQ driver can be used to
simulate a DAQ device to generate simulated readings.
Device
Use the drop-down list to select the DAQ device to use. Selecting a different driver will
change this list according.
Lines Configuration
NOTE:
The Lines Configuration dialog is hardware specific.
The Lines Configuration dialog allows you to set up the DAQ device. The list shows one
line for each input channel. Selecting a row in the Acquire column instructs StreamPix to
NorPix Inc.
115
StreamPix 7 User Guide
record data read from this channel. Line is the line ID. Name is an editable string used to
label each channel. By default, if a channel has not been given a label, it will be labeled
after its line ID value.
Often, the signal from a device will have a value between -1 and 1. StreamPix can apply a
linear conversion to each channel to convert the original reading to an accurate value. The
linear conversion use the Ax + b formula, with A/B being values in the “A/B” columns
and “x” being the value read from the device. The unit column is used to specify the
measurement unit (cm, km, kg, etc), this label is only cosmetic.
The dialog may also allow you to change the Analog Range.
The polling interval is the length of a single data set. A long interval will create larger data
sets which reduce overhead while streaming data to disk. A shorter interval will allows
greater granularity when browsing the data sets and a smother flow in the display graphs.
The sample rate of the DAQ device is specified in #reads per second.
NOTE:
Some devices have additional settings accessible by selecting More Settings.
Activate DAQ
This button toggles the DAQ acquisition on/off. If DAQ acquisition is enabled at the time
a recording is started, a DAQ file will be created, and StreamPix will save the data
received from the device to a .daq file.
NOTE:
5.3.3
Double-clicking in a DAQ Graph area will open the corresponding Graph
Settings dialog (Live or File).
DAQ Graphs area
Graph Settings (Live)
This dialog allows you to customize the display graph for each acquired channel. If Hide
Disabled Lines is selected, the list will not show the channels which were not selected for
acquisition in the Line Configuration dialog.
Each line of the list shows: the Line ID, the linear conversion it uses, the draw state and
the drawing context. To change the display property of a line, click on it and use the
controls below the list. To change the properties of several lines at the same time, select
multiple lines using Ctrl-click (atomic selection) or Shift-click (range selection).
116
NorPix Inc.
Using Audio and DAQ
Draw line
If checked, StreamPix will draw the data line for this channel in the target display area.
Line Color
The color used to draw the line in the graphs.
Time Range (ms)
The length of the display graph in milliseconds (X axis). The time range is always shared
by all lines.
If the time range is shorter than the total length of the recording (it usually is), the graph
only show the values around the current position.
Target Display Area
By default, each channel has its own graph display. However, it can be hard to manage/
view a lot of displays when several channels are active at the same time. This option
allows the user to regroup channels in a single graph display. To do so, use the drop-down
list to select in which display area you want to plot the channel data.
Selecting multiple curves
CTRL-click in a graph to select another curve.
Left-side scale (Right-side scale)
Use this section to customize the scale of the Y axis. Selecting “Automatic” will let
StreamPix dynamically adjust the scale to show the whole data lines. Selecting “Constant
values” will allow the user to specify the minimal (bottom) and maximal (top) values for
the Y axis.
There can be a scale on the left side of the graph and a different one on the right side. This
is useful when you want to plot several data lines that don't share the same data range or
don't use the same measurement units.
Chart Merge Settings
This section allows you to assign the data line to either the left-side or right-side scale of
the graph. If the line uses a different display area than its own, the scale refers to the scales
defined in the target display area. Selecting Scale-free will make the data line use the full
range of the graph without any regard for the values of its Y-axis scales.
NorPix Inc.
117
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Plot the current image underneath the graph
Selecting this option will draw the sequence image at the current position underneath the
graph. If you select this option, make sure to choose line colors that have a good contrast
with the video images.
Restore default settings for the selected line(s)
Click on this to restore the default graph settings for the selected line(s).
Graph Settings (File)
This uses the same dialog as the Graph Settings (Live). When recording from a DAQ
channel, the current Graph Settings (Live) are saved along with the DAQ data file (in a
.display file). When reloading a previous DAQ file, its graph settings are reloaded along
with it. The Graph Settings (File) allows you to modify the existing graph settings. Any
changes made are saved to the display file. Editing this won't change the graph settings of
future DAQ recordings.
Playback Position area
Current Data Set
The index of the current data set. Using the edit box, you can change the current index and
StreamPix will update the graphs accordingly. Left-clicking anywhere in a graph itself
will change the current data set to the one located under the current mouse position.
Total Data Sets
The total number of data sets in the .daq file.
Time Range area
A pull-down menu allows you to directly select the wanted range. Or, you can type in the
desired range. Values in the drop-down list are customizable from Settings > DAQ These
will decrease or increase the time range of the currently selected graph by a fixed time
length (see “DAQ settings” on page 161).
Export area
Export To .XLS
This allows you to export the content of a DAQ data file in Microsoft Excel® .xls format.
118
NorPix Inc.
Using Audio and DAQ
Export To .CSV
This allows you to export the content of a DAQ data file to a CSV (Comma Separated
Values) text file. CSV files are simple text files that can be opened in Microsoft Excel®,
Open Office Calc®, and many other 3rd party applications.
Export with Image
DAQ can be exported overlaid on the image by using: File | Export | Display Area.
NorPix Inc.
119
StreamPix 7 User Guide
120
NorPix Inc.
6
Managing the Display
This chapter explains the display management tools available in StreamPix 7. This
chapter contains the following sections:
•
6.1 Display Tools
•
6.2 Controlling Multiple Cameras
StreamPix 7 User Guide
6.1
Display Tools
You can use the display settings to customize the look and feel of StreamPix 7 to suit your
needs. The default display settings are set through the StreamPix 7 Settings > Interface and
Displayed Data pages. See “Interface settings” on page 164 and “Displayed Data settings”
on page 163. The Display tab lets you customize settings for the active Workspace and, if
Home > Select All Workspaces is selected, for any associated Workspaces. Other tools for
controlling the display are located on the Home and Workspace tabs.
6.1.1
Modifying the GUI
You can modify the GUI to suit the way you work. You can even save alternate GUI
configurations for re-use later. See “HOWTO Modify the GUI” on page 90.
6.1.2
Display Tab
The Display tab contains the following groups of tools:
Display Group
Switch Display
In either single or multiple display mode, the Switch Display button brings to the front the
next display area. A Workspace can have a several display areas:
• Live
• Sequence / AVI
• An audio file
• DAQ
• Other (typically added by an external module like LineScan viewer, SimulPix,
Live Levels, Sequence Levels...
Toggle Display
Toggles the display of images on/off. On slower computers, it is recommended to disable
the image display to alleviate some CPU load while recording.
Full Screen
Toggles the Full-screen mode on, causing the display area to cover even the Windows
taskbar. Use the F12 key to toggle back to regular mode.
122
NorPix Inc.
Managing the Display
Overlays
Enables or disables the Workspace Status overlay icons (sequence, live, record, etc.). See
“Workspace Status Icons” on page 29.
Set Background Color
This allows you to change the color of the display area in which images are displayed. The
display area is white by default, so if the captured images have white borders, changing
the background color will help to clearly see the borders. For low light conditions, a dark
red color is often preferred.
Time Overlay
The Time Overlay button pops up the time overlay dialog in the docking panel, replacing
the old Time Overlay Module.
Zoom Group
The Zoom group of tools let you enlarge or reduce the display of the active image.
Individual Zoom tools let you zoom on the XY axes, X axis or Y axis only, and fit image
to window or window to image. Mouse over an icon to see a description of what that tool
does. The Zoom tools work by increments of 10%. Reset Zoom to 100% will reset the
image size to 1:1 ratio. As having the zoom set higher or lower than 100% will use a bit of
CPU, it is recommended to leave the zoom at 100% while recording, to free as much CPU
as possible for the recording process.
NOTE:
Not all grabbers/cameras support all of the zoom features. If tools are
unavailable, it is due to hardware limitations.
Multi-Display Layout
The Multi-Display Layout buttons allow to configure the multi-display rows and columns.
The choices are 2x1, 1x2, 2x2, Custom, and Auto-Fill. Once the layout is done, you can
assign a display to each area by right-clicking in each and selecting from the dropdown
list.
The Custom button lets you click-and-drag to specify a specific number of rows and
columns. It also contains a Complex Layout option where you can click-and-drag to draw
your own custom layout.
The Auto-Fill button creates enough rows and columns to show the active display of every
Workspace and automatically fills the areas.
• To add a Workspace, see “Set up Workspace(s)” on page 64.
• To add a camera to a Workspace, see “Load Camera(s)” on page 66.
NorPix Inc.
123
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Hybrid Mode
The Hybrid Mode lets you toggle the Hybrid display which is a mix of single & multi
displays. In Hybrid mode, the display area is split in two. One side is the regular multidisplay area, and the other side shows the currently selected display. The number of
columns and rows in the hybrid multi-display area can be customized with the usual
controls. You can also change the position and size of the hybrid display area. The multidisplay area will be resized accordingly.
Thumbnails View
Thumbnails View lets you see the individual frames in a Sequence as thumbnail images.
Select Enable to toggle Thumbnail View while the Sequence is in playback mode. The
Plus and Minus buttons increase or decrease thumbnail image size. The table below
describes Thumbnails View toolbuttons.
Toolbutton
Description
Toggle Thumbnail View on/off. The dropdown list contains options
to number the images in the Sequence and set a sub-sampling
rate.
Scroll thumbnail display one page up.
Scroll thumbnail display one page down.
Scroll thumbnail display one line up.
Scroll thumbnail display one line down.
Increase thumbnail image size.
Decrease thumbnail image size.
Table 6-1: Thumbnails View toolbuttons
Select a thumbnail to move the playback position in the Sequence Slider to that image.
Double-click a thumbnail to change the display back.
NOTE:
124
Toggling between normal and thumbnail view may takes a bit of time,
because the software must read a significant amount of data to generate the
thumbnails before displaying them.
NorPix Inc.
Managing the Display
6.1.3
Refresh Rates
The Single Display and Multi-Display Refresh Rate let you adjust the refresh rates for the
display areas. These sliders only affect the display refresh speed, meaning that there is no
effect on the camera frame rate or the capture rate. If the StreamPix 7 window has trouble
redrawing itself, or if there is a noticeable command input lag, lowering the refresh rate
should help responsiveness by reducing the CPU usage.
6.1.4
Other Display Controls
Not all of the display controls are on the Display tab. There are also the following tools.
Home > Show Docking Panel
Show or hide the Docking panel in which the docked dialogs appear.
Home > Multi-Display
(Not available in the Single-Camera version) Toggles between single and multi-display
modes. Multi-display allows you to see multiple displays simultaneously. For example,
you could display both the live feed and a sequence playback at the same time or see all of
a Workspace sequences at the same time.
The Home > Multi-Display dropdown list contains the same display tools described in
“Multi-Display Layout” on page 123.
Workspace > Workspace Color
Sets the Workspace tab and Docked Dialog color associated with the currently selected
Workspace to facilitate working with multiple workspaces. The tab font color will either
be white or black depending on the chosen color.
NOTE:
Do not confuse this with the Display > Background Color option. See “Set
Background Color” on page 123.
Home > StreamPix Settings > Displayed Data
Used to determine the image information data to be displayed in overlays. See “Displayed
Data settings” on page 163.
NorPix Inc.
125
StreamPix 7 User Guide
6.2
Controlling Multiple Cameras
Figure 6-1: Multiple camera display
NOTE:
Available in Multi-camera version only.
To control multiple cameras at once, a separate Workspace needs to exist for each one.
Once your cameras are loaded, StreamPix 7 Multi-Display capabilities can display
multiple feeds simultaneously. Multi-Display mode is toggled from Home > Multi-Display
(which also has a drop-down menu for the most common Multi-Display options).
There are two options for viewing the Live feed and the associated Sequence file:
• Live feed and Sequence share a display area: If, from the display area right-click
menu you select Enable Auto-switch between Live and Playback, you can select
either the Live or Sequence icon from the Workspace tab to toggle between the
126
NorPix Inc.
Managing the Display
two modes. If both the Camera and Sequence have been loaded, the Display >
Switch Display toolbutton has the same effect.
• Live feed and Sequence use separate Workspaces: If, from the display area rightclick menu you deselect Enable Auto-switch between Live and Playback, you can
see both the Live feed and the Sequence at the same time in separate viewing
areas.
NOTE:
If, while using two separate Workspaces, you select the Display > Switch
Display toolbutton, both displays toggle in the same Workspace.
NOTE:
Two areas can not show the same display at the same.
To color-code the Workspace tab and the associated docked dialogs, see “Workspace >
Workspace Color” on page 125.
NorPix Inc.
127
StreamPix 7 User Guide
128
NorPix Inc.
7
Controlling Light and Color
This chapter describes how to control light and color in StreamPix 7. This chapter
contains the following sections:
•
7.1 Bayer Conversion and Color Correction Primer
•
7.2 Applying Processing
•
7.3 Non-linear Remapping via ASC CDL Formula
StreamPix 7 User Guide
7.1
Bayer Conversion and Color Correction Primer
A Bayer filter mosaic is a color filter array for arranging RGB color filters on a square grid
of photo sensors. The term derives from the name of its inventor, Dr. Bryce E. Bayer of
Eastman Kodak, and refers to a particular arrangement of color filters used in most singlechip digital image sensors used in digital cameras, camcorders, and scanners to create a
color image.
Bayer conversion is the process by which raw images from a Bayer camera are colorconverted using a Bayer interpolation algorithm. Some cameras equipped with a Bayer
filter will perform the color interpolation process before images are sent to output.
However, most cameras do not do this, leaving interpolation to applications like
StreamPix 7.
The filter pattern is 50% green, 25% red and 25% blue, and hence is also called BGGR,
GBRG, GRBG or RGGB depending on the color of the first pixel in a 2x2-pixel square.
Bayer's patent called the green photo sensors luminance-sensitive elements and the red
and blue ones chrominance-sensitive elements. He used twice as many green elements as
red or blue to mimic the human eye's greater resolving power with green light.
Figure 7-1: Bayer Color Remapping
The raw output of Bayer-filter cameras is referred to as a Bayer pattern image. Since each
pixel is filtered to record only one of three colors, two-thirds of the color data is missing
from each. To obtain a full-color image, various demosaicing algorithms are used to
interpolate a set of complete red, green, and blue values for each pixel. Different
algorithms requiring various amounts of computing power result in final images of
varying quality.
StreamPix 7 includes Bayer conversion functionality as well as strong color balancing and
grading. Color balance can be applied independently to any supported image format, i.e.
raw images, color YUV or RGB. Changes to the color balance, saturation and contrast,
plus specific adjustments to shadows and highlights can all be performed using these
various tools.
130
NorPix Inc.
Controlling Light and Color
Since a raw image contains all of the color information, StreamPix typically records
images from cameras as raw data. Because of the computational requirements, Bayer
conversion and color grading is normally performed only when needed, namely when an
image is being displayed, exported to an AVI movie or exported to an individual image
file.
This has two advantages: raw image size is 3 times smaller than color images, and CPU
resources are conserved (Bayer rendering and color grading are quite computationintensive).
NorPix Inc.
131
StreamPix 7 User Guide
7.2
Applying Processing
StreamPix 7 provides both Bayer Color Conversion and Color Correction settings that
may be applied separately, or used in conjunction. Bayer and Color Correction settings are
automatically saved and restored when reloading.
• Bayer Conversion Settings must always be done on an individual Workspace
basis, and based on the camera type. Different types of cameras may require
different Bayer patterns.
• Color Processing settings may be set through either:
- Home > StreamPix Settings > Color Processing page for settings that will apply
globally,
or,
- Workspace > Workspace Settings > Color Processing and Sequence pages for
settings that will apply to the current Workspace. You must select the
Override StreamPix Settings option for local changes to become effective.
NOTE:
If All Workspaces are selected (CTRL+A), Bayer and Color balance will
apply to all Workspaces.
If all Workspaces are not selected, Bayer and Color balance will apply to
current Workspace only.
The Color Processing and Sequence parameters available are identical in either case. See
“Color Processing settings” on page 155 and “Sequence Settings” on page 187.
NOTE:
TIP:
Multiple identical cameras may still require individual Color Processing settings
to compensate for local conditions, etc.
NOTE:
132
Although it may be possible, there is no need to set the Bayer Conversion
format at the hardware level. Best results are achieved by making sure that the
camera delivers a raw image.
Changing the camera ROI may change the Bayer pattern, depending where
the top left corner of the image is set.
NorPix Inc.
Controlling Light and Color
7.2.1
Processing Levels
Both Bayer Conversion and Color Processing can be applied at the following levels:
At Grab Level: The selected processing will be applied on images as they are received from
the camera. As this is the earliest time at which image processing can be done, the frames
will already be processed before being streamed to disk, displayed or exported. This
method requires significant processing power and typically triples the required streaming
bandwidth. All incoming frames from the video source are processed.
On Displayed Frames: the
selected processing will be applied on images before they are
drawn in the display area. The processing will only be done if the frame is actually drawn
on screen. This process takes place at the end of the process chain and thus, doesn't affect
frames before they have been recorded. Checking this will have no effect if At Grab Level
or On Exported Frames is also selected because the processing won't be done twice.
On Exported Frames: the selected processing will be applied on images before they are
exported to another format. The source images remain unchanged.
NorPix Inc.
133
StreamPix 7 User Guide
7.2.2
Bayer Pattern
Chose the Bayer pattern corresponding to your camera. Consult your camera
documentation if necessary.
NOTE:
The Cayer Bayer pattern specified in StreamPix Settings > Sequence >
Compression must match the Bayer pattern set in Bayer/Colors > Bayer
Pattern.
Accuracy
The Bayer conversion accuracy algorithm is only used when applying Bayer conversion
on exported frames. By default, StreamPix 7 always uses the Accurate mode. Fast is used
for all sample factors other than 1:1.
• Fast: bilinear forward interpolation (quickest, less accurate).
• Accurate (IPP): full bilinear algorithm using Intel IPP library. Somewhat slower,
but more accurate.
• Adaptive HDDA: Adaptive Homogeneity-Directed Demosaicing Algorithm
(images with bit depth greater than 8 bit will first be converted down to 8 bit in
order to apply this interpolation). Takes a lot of computing power, hence it is the
slowest, but also produces the best results.
Sample Factor
Only affects Bayer conversion done on displayed frames. Choosing 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8 will
reduce the CPU usage required for display at the cost of a smaller rendered image. For
example, this could safely be used when working with multiple cameras and where the
image resolution is much larger than the actual monitor resolution.
For example, using 4 HD 1920x1080 cameras and a single HD monitor in a 2x2 quadrant
display mode, the software would have to Bayer process 4 full images then shrink them
down to match the screen resolution. Using a 1:2 sampling will reduce the Bayer
Processing and final image size without impacting the display quality.
134
NorPix Inc.
Controlling Light and Color
7.2.3
Recalculate Lookup Table
Recalculates the Lookup Table based on the next frame that will be processed using the
currently defined color balance algorithm. This command should be run following
enabling a LUT file in the Color Grading Processing > 1D | 3D LUT setup areas or when
lighting conditions of the image area have changed.
NorPix Inc.
135
StreamPix 7 User Guide
7.2.4
Export LUT
Lets you save the current LUT to a file so that it can be re-used later. By default, it is saved
in the same folder as the files for this Workspace.
TIP:
136
Current Bayer and Color Processing settings are automatically saved and
reloaded from session to session.
NorPix Inc.
Controlling Light and Color
7.3
Non-linear Remapping via ASC CDL Formula
The American Society of Cinematographers Color Decision List (ASC CDL) has defined
a format for the exchange of basic primary color grading information. A 3 parameters
formula can be used to define most possible remapping and color correction.
The formula for ASC CDL color correction is:
where:
• out is the color graded pixel code value.
• i is the input pixel code value (0=black, 1=white).
• s is slope (any number 0 or greater, nominal value is 1.0).
• o is offset (any number, nominal value is 0).
• p is power (any number greater than 0, nominal value is 1.0).
The formula is applied to the three color values for each pixel using the corresponding
slope, offset, and power (gamma) for each color channel.
When ASC CDL is enabled, the Color Remapping dialog opens in the Docked dialog
panel, from where you can adjust the color balance in real time.
1.
Select All Channels to apply the same formula to all 3 channels, or select each color
in turn.
2.
Use the sliders to adjust the Gamma, Offset, and Gain.
NOTE:
The Reset button resets the default values: Gamma(1), Offset(0), Gain(1).
Figure 7-2: Color Remapping dialog
NorPix Inc.
137
StreamPix 7 User Guide
7.3.1
Changing the default range values for
the ASC CDL remapping parameter
A registry key can be set to change color ranges:
All key type are DWORD
key path: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Norpix\Streampix\Admin
Key name: GainRange: Set Gain range, default value: 8
Key name: GammaRange: Set Gamma range, default 8 (0,8)
Key name: OffsetRange: Set Offset range, default 2 (-2,2)
Key name: RealOffset = 1: Enable display real pixel intensity offset value, default: 0
138
NorPix Inc.
8
Managing Sequences and Markers
This chapter contains information the following sections on working with
sequences:
•
8.1 Sequences - Global Settings
•
8.2 Sequences - Individual Tools
StreamPix 7 User Guide
8.1
Sequences - Global Settings
A number of StreamPix Settings control how Sequences are captured and displayed. For
best results, it is a good idea to familiarize yourself with the following topics before
setting up to record Sequences:
• StreamPix Settings > Autonaming: See “Auto Naming Settings” on page 150 to
see how to set up automatic naming for captured files.
• StreamPix Settings > Sequence: See “Sequence Settings” on page 187 for
Sequence behavior and compression settings.
• StreamPix Settings > Recording: See “Recording settings” on page 176 for
information on how to use automated files, set Sequence limits, and record in a
loop.
• StreamPix Settings > Recording Rate: See “Recording Rate settings” on page 179
to set recording rate levels.
• StreamPix Settings > Playback: See “Playback settings” on page 171 to set
playback and synchronization options.
140
NorPix Inc.
Managing Sequences and Markers
8.2
Sequences - Individual Tools
As well as the global settings, StreamPix 7 also has the following tools for working with
individual Sequences.
Application Menu > Sequence History
The Sequence History allows you to reload previous recording sessions. Sequences are
sorted by date and time.
Figure 8-1: Sequence History dialog
The time stamp shown in the Sequence History dialog is the actual time that the Sequence
file was created. Select the desired time stamp on the left, and all Workspaces/Sequences
that were loaded at that time will be shown. From there, you can either reload all
Sequences or a specific one using the corresponding button. If the sequence can't be found
because it was moved or deleted, an error message is shown. An option lets you select to
close all open Workspaces before proceeding.
TIP:
NorPix Inc.
It is recommended to delete older or obsolete entries from the history from time
to time (to reduce loading times and clutter).
141
StreamPix 7 User Guide
8.2.1
The Sequence Tab
Go to
Goto Frame #
Allows you to input a frame number (index in the Sequence file) to jump to a specific
image. Also works with AVI files.
Goto Time Stamp
Allows you to input a time stamp in order to jump to the frame closest to it. The dialog
either asks for an absolute or relative time depending of the time mode selected in
StreamPix Settings > Playback. Also works with AVI files.
Goto Reference Frame
The Goto Reference Frame button moves the playback position to the Reference Frame.
The Sequence reference frame can be set by various actions, such as the Set Reference
Frame buttons, or by a Trigger pre/post event command.
Goto Reference Time
Moves the display to the Reference Time, if any.
Reference Frame
Set at Recording Position
This will set the current recording position as the reference frame. The reference frame
time stamp is used to deduce the relative time of every other image. By default, the first
frame of a Sequence is used if no reference frame is chosen.
Set at Playback Position
This will set the current playback position as the reference frame. The reference frame
time stamp is used to deduce the relative time of every other image. By default, the first
frame of a Sequence is used if no reference frame is chosen.
Reference Time
Take Reference Time
Read the current system time and set this time as the reference time of the current
Sequence. The relative time of each image of the Sequence will be computed using this
time instead. This can be useful to set a reference time occurring before a recording starts.
Using a reference time overrides the current reference frame (if any). It is also possible to
142
NorPix Inc.
Managing Sequences and Markers
do this automatically. See “Recording settings” on page 176.
NOTE:
The Take Reference Time action is a software event that can be triggered also
via the I/O Manager. See “HOWTO Trigger a Software Event from an external input line (I/O Manager)” on page 85.
Edit Reference Time
Lets you edit the reference time associated with the current Sequence. The new reference
time will be applied to the first frame of the Sequence. Set the desired time in the
HH:MM:SS:MS:MS format. A calendar picker lets you set the date.
Figure 8-2: Edit Reference Time dialog
Clear Reference Time
Remove the reference time associated with the current Sequence. The time of the
Sequence first frame will become the new reference.
8.2.2
Manual Playback
Time Jump
The Sequence > Time Jump buttons jump the display according to the interval set in
Settings > Playback > General > Length of time jumps in MS (milliseconds. The default is
1000 ms. See “Playback settings” on page 171.
Figure 8-3: Time Jump buttons
NorPix Inc.
143
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Step by Step
The Step Back and Step Forward buttons move the display one frame at a time.
Decrease or Increase Playback Speed
If the Show Manual playback slider is enabled in Settings | Playback Rate, the appearance of
the Step back/Step Forward buttons changes, and selecting the buttons will increase or
decrease the playback speed. See Figure 8-4. and “Playback settings” on page 171.
Figure 8-4: Change in Step Forward / Step Back controls
See “Playback Rate settings” on page 173
Time Jump
The Sequence > Time Jump buttons jump the display according to the interval set in
Settings > Playback > General > Length of time jumps in MS (milliseconds. The default is
1000 ms. See “Playback settings” on page 171.
Figure 8-5: Time Jump buttons
8.2.3
Manipulation
Trim Sequence
This will trim the active sequence, keeping only the current selection. This operation can
take a long time for big sequences as StreamPix exports the selection to a new Sequence
file, deletes the original Sequence, and finally renames and reopens the new Sequence file.
Append a Sequence
A file-open dialog will allow to select a Sequence of frames to append at the end of the
current Sequence. Both Sequences must share the same image format (resolution,
bitdepth, etc).
144
NorPix Inc.
Managing Sequences and Markers
Sort Images in Chronological Order
When StreamPix is recording in a loop, the resulting Sequence frame order might not be
properly arranged. For instance, the oldest frame might not be at position 1 in the
Sequence. The sort action will fix that by creating a new Sequence file in which the frames
are sorted according to their respective time stamps.
NOTE:
8.2.4
Sequence Sort can be a lengthy operation on large Sequence files.
Other Tools
Trigger Pre/Post Event
If the Pre/Post Trigger is enabled, it will trigger the related event. See “Pre/Post Trigger
settings” on page 174.
Set Recording Position
This will set the current playback frame position as the recording position, causing the
next frame recorded to overwrite this frame. By default, the recording position is one
frame past the last frame of the Sequence.
Toggle Timeshifted Playback
Activate or deactivate the timeshifted playback mode. See “Timeshifting settings” on
page 197.
Copy Image to Clipboard
Copies the current image to the Windows clipboard, from where is can be pasted into a
third-party application.
Trigger Module
Some modules can be triggered by clicking on this button instead of using their docking
panel interface. Refer to the module help to see if it supports this trigger button. This
button is used only in some custom applications.
Focus Slider
Sets the keyboard/mouse wheel focus back to the main Sequence Slider. For instance to
use the arrow keys to browse in between images.
NorPix Inc.
145
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Show Sequence Information
Shows various information on the currently loaded Sequence or AVI file.
8.2.5
Navigating Markers
The Markers tab provides the following specific tools for navigating within Sequences:
Goto
Previous Marker
The Goto Previous Marker button moves the playback position to the previous marker
relative to the current playback position.
Next Marker
The Goto Next Marker button moves the playback position to the next marker relative to
the current playback position.
Browse
Marker List
Displays a dropdown list of all Markers. Select an item to move to that Marker.
Edit Marker...
Select to add or edit a Marker, including a Marker description.
Add Marker at
Current Recording Position
This will add an event marker on the last frame captured. This command is typically used
to mark a frame while a recording is taking place. A blue arrow will be displayed on the
sequence bar to show the locations of the marked frames. The bottom of the display area
also shows a marker icon overlay when a marked image is shown.You can use the event
markers viewer in the Sequence docked dialog to manage or quickly browse the marked
frames.
Current Playback Position
This will add an event marker on the frame at the current playback position. This
command is typically used to mark a frame while reviewing a recorded Sequence. A blue
arrow will be displayed on the Sequence bar to show the locations of the marked frames.
146
NorPix Inc.
Managing Sequences and Markers
8.2.6
Navigating the Sequence from
marked event (docked dialog)
To navigate markers from the Sequence docked dialog
8.2.7
1.
Select Show Event Markers and select a marker to move the Sequence display to that
position.
2.
Optionally, select Show Event Markers > Edit to annotate a marker.
Home > Selection group
The Home > Selection group contains the following tools for preparing a Sequence for
export:
Set First: Sets
the first frame to be exported.
Set Last: Sets
the last frame to be exported.
Goto First:
Moves the display to the first frame to be exported.
Goto Last:
Moves the display to the last frame to be exported.
Clear Selection:
Clears all export markers. Other markers, if any, remain.
To Export a Sequence see “HOWTO Export a Sequence” on page 82.
NorPix Inc.
147
StreamPix 7 User Guide
148
NorPix Inc.
9
Managing Settings
This chapter explains how to manage StreamPix 7 settings. The following Settings
control StreamPix 7 default behaviors.
Auto Naming Settings
Metadata settings
Remote Control settings
AVI settings
MOV settings
GPU Management
MPEG4/TS settings
Playback settings
Sequence Settings
Color Processing settings
Playback Rate settings
Session settings
DAQ settings
Pre/Post Trigger settings
Synchronization settings
Displayed Data settings
Recording settings
Timeshifting settings
Interface settings
Recording Rate settings
Workspace(s) settings.
More... settings
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.1
Auto Naming Settings
Auto Naming allows StreamPix 7 to generate file names without requiring user input each
and every time a file is created. Automatic File Naming can be enabled for recording/
exporting movies and images files. The Reset buttons restores the default naming scheme.
Figure 9-1: Auto Naming settings
The RECORDING schemes are used when directly recording from the live stream, while the
EXPORTING are used when exporting from a Sequence file. “Movies” are .seq, .avi and
.mov. “Images” are .bmp, .jpg, .tif, etc.
As two Sequences can not be saved in the same file, make sure that every Sequence
created has a unique name. With successive recordings, using the (time) token will prevent
the “samefilename” overwriting problem. A good scheme could be:
(workingfolder)\(workspace)\(date) at (time), as this could generate a sequence filename
like this one: “C:\Camera 1\12-31-05 at 23-59- 59.999.seq”. This means that a folder
would be created for each workspace and that every sequence from this workspace would
be uniquely identified by the date/time part. It is recommended that you test each naming
scheme on a short recording before applying it to a complete recording session.
When creating a new image sequence (BMP, TIFF, etc), it is possible that the automatic
naming scheme may not contain enough dynamic tokens (i.e. tokens that can help prevent
generating the same file name twice). In which case, select the Append an image index
checkbox. When this is checked, a base name will be generated for the first image, and
StreamPix will automatically reuse the same name for every other image, appending an
index value to differentiate them (-1, -2, -3, -4, etc...).
150
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
The following is a description of all available tokens. Some are not available in every
scheme.
• workingfolder: This token will be replaced by the working folder of each
Workspace.
• workspace: This token will be replaced by name of the Workspace.
• prompt: This will prompt for a specific string to use for each file created. This
string will then replace the (prompt) token.
• customtoken: This token will be replaced by a user-defined string value.
• increment: This token will be replaced by an incremental numerical value.
• time: This token will be replaced by the current system time.
• date: This token will be replaced by the current system date.
• YYYY, MM, DD, HH, MIN, SEC, MSEC: These tokens will be replaced by the
related time parts extracted from the timestamp of the current image. Mostly used
for image files, they can also be used when creating sequences, AVI and MOV. In
which case, the current system time will be used.
• LTC: The Linear Time Code token will be replaced by the LTC time code in the
image (if any).
• index: This token will be replaced by the image index in the sequence (when
exporting from sequence to image files).
• pindex: Same as the “index” token, but the value will be padded using the
padding specified in the “Images” settings page.
• firstframetime: This token is mostly used when working with RAM sequences
saved to disk (or exported). The token will be replaced with the time of the first
frame of the sequence.
• sourcepath: The path of the source file.
• sourcename: The name of the source file (without the extension)
• AB: Alternate between “A” and “B” for each image. Mostly used with PIV-style
acquisition. In a PIV application, frames are typically captured by group of 2 in a
very short interval, then this is repeated after a short interval, for example: frame
1 and 2, wait, frame 3 and 4, wait... So when using a PIV naming scheme, frames
are exported with the A-B suffix to highlight the fact they are grouped together:
- frame1-A
- frame2-B
- frame3-A
- frame4-, etc.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
When using auto-naming, the default settings for the each format are used.
The default settings are set in the following Settings pages: AVI, Sequence and
151
StreamPix 7 User Guide
More... > Images.
To set an auto naming scheme
1.
Select a Scheme by checking the check box.
2.
Select the Edit button to open the list of available tokens.
a. Double-click on a token to append it to the current naming scheme.
Each token gets replaced by an actual value at the time a file is created.
b. Select OK to accept the new Scheme definition and return to the Auto Naming
settings dialog.
3.
Optionally, if you have included (customtoken) in the naming scheme, enter a Default
to specify a custom token.
value of the (customtoken)
4.
Optionally, select Edit (increment) token settings... to define how to increment token
values. .
Figure 9-2: Edit (increment) token settings... dialog
a. Specify when the increment is to take place, either after each new file and/or after
each recording, select the appropriate checkbox. The default is After creating a new
target file, which should cover most needs. After each recording is convenient for
certain recording scenarios.
b. Enter a Starting Value. This value is normally reset every time the workspace is
reopened (ex: every time StreamPix launches).
c. Optionally, deselect the Reset the increment...is reopened checkbox to have the
starting value be the last value used in the previous session.
d. Optionally, select the Reset the increment... (customtoken) value is changed
checkbox to have the starting value restarted when the custom token value is
changed.
e. Optionally, specify the increment Padding (in digits).
f. Select OK when done to return to the Auto Naming settings dialog.
152
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
5.
Optionally, for image files and exporting files, select the Append ... file name
checkboxes.
6.
Select OK to accept your Auto Naming schemes.
TIP:
9.2
Enable StreamPix Settings > Recording > Auto-create file to automate file creation
using the Auto naming scheme. See “Recording settings” on page 176.
AVI settings
AVI Settings page is used to set the codec options used when creating a new AVI file.
Available Video and Audio Codecs and audio sources are listed on a dropdown list. The
Settings button will show any associated Codec or Source parameters in a dialog box.
Figure 9-3: Auto Naming settings
The AVI Settings page is where all the AVI default values can be set. These settings can
always be overwritten via the Save As dialog, provided this dialog pops up (usually not
because of the autonaming scheme).
The Override Frame Rate option allows you to override the frame rate of the capture. This
means that the AVI can be made to play slower or faster that the actual capture rate.
NOTE:
The Override Frame Rate option does not alter the camera’s capture rate. The
file header is overwritten with the playback frame rate. The recording rate is
still the incoming frame rate from the camera.
The playback output format can be converted from Native to BGR if needed. (Some
external modules require the BGR format).
The AVI settings here (as well as the Auto Naming settings) are used when a new AVI is
created using the Application Button > New AVI dialog.
NorPix Inc.
153
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.3
9.3.1
MPEG4/TS settings
Video
MP4 / TS
offers the following Codecs and options for recording or exporting:
MPEG4: A
container with 2 types of compression available: H.264 or MPEG4.
an older container, designed for MPEG2 video encoding. Since MPEG2 is an
obsolete compression scheme, frames stored in a .ts container are H.264 compressed and
compatible with all media players.
MPEG2 ts:
NOTE:
Playback of MP4 and .TS video are not supported by StreamPix 7.
GPU accelerated JPEG compression codec, using OpenCL: allow running on AMD, nVidia
and Intel GPU. Resolution up to 4K.
MP4 Video Codec
• H.264: to H.264 encode (software or hardware accelerated)
• MPEG4: to MPEG4 encoder / decoder (software only).
Video codec GOP size
Same GOP as in Settings | Sequence | H.264 GOP.
Video codec Bit Rate (bps)
Same bit rate as in Settings | Sequence | H.264 bit rate.
H.264 acceleration
• None: (runs on the CPU).
• List of installed and supported GPUs that can provide acceleration: either Intel,
nVidia, or AMD.
9.3.2
Audio
When recording to MP4 or TS container and audio is also recorded, the audio track will be
AAC encoded. You can adjust the AAC quality by defining the bitrate.
154
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.4
Color Processing settings
This page allows you to manage the global parameters applied during color processing.
NOTE:
For general information about color processing and Bayer conversion, see
“Controlling Light and Color” on page 129.
StreamPix Settings > Color Processing parameters set global parameters for all
Workspaces. To set Color Processing parameters per Workspace, see “Workspace
Settings” on page 104.
As you select an option, a description of it appears in the information panel at the bottom
of the Color Processing page.
9.4.1
Bit Depth Management
Image bit depth while exporting: By default, 10, 12, 14 or 16-bit images are forced to an 8bit image. Select Maintain image bit depth to maintain the original bit depth.
9.4.2
NOTE:
Make sure the export image format can handle the image bit depth. For
example, BMP handles only 8-bit.
NOTE:
The Bayer Accuracy “Adaptive HDDA” ignores this feature since it only
supports 8 bit.
Color Processing
Look-up table type: The choice is either a 1D or 3D LUT. This defines the type of look-up
table (LUT) applied during color processing. 3D LUT requires significantly more RAM
and initialization time, but allows better rendering. Selecting a 1D or 3D LUT has no
processing overload (except when exporting 10-bit images with a 3D LUT).
Look-up table calculation: To speed up the color grading, Bayer interpolation, and white
balancing image rendering, a global look-up table taking into account all the parameters is
calculated and saved to an XML file. By default, this LUT is recalculated each time
StreamPix is restarted. To avoid the recalculation on start-up select Reload look-up table
(from file).
NorPix Inc.
155
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Color Balance
Color balance is the adjustment of the RGB channels intensity of an image to match the
color temperature of the illumination present at capture time. As it changes the overall
mixture of colors in an image, color balance is used for generalized color correction.
Color balance (also referred as white balance) can be adjusted and applied to real time
(Live) display and when exporting. Color balance can be manually adjusted or
automatically calculated on any captured color image, either RGB or YUV format. Color
balance algorithms can be applied in conjunction with the Bayer rendering.
In Automatic mode, one of six color balancing algorithms can be selected:
• Mean equalization: calculates the mean value of each channel and then adjusts
each so that the mean value of the blue and red channels are equal to the green
channel.
• Gray world: the sum of the red, green and blue channels is calculated and then
adjusted so that the sum of the blue and red channel equals the green channel.
• Standard deviation: calculates the standard deviation of each color channel and
then readjusts each to be 70 (on a 256 value scale).
• Mean & standard deviation (Slowest): Adjusts the mean value of each channel to
be 128, and sets the standard deviation of each channel to be roughly 70 (on a
256 value scale).
• White World: Will search for the whitest area in the image and assume this is real
white to recalculate the WB by normalizing each channel and set the maximum
value to “white”. To get good results, make sure there are no saturated pixels on
the image. (Use short exposure time for instance.)
• Scale by max: calculates the max value of each channel and then rescale each
channel to the maximum dynamic range.
Mean equalization, Gray World, Standard Deviation, Mean & Standard Deviation, White
World and Scale by Max algorithms use the first incoming image to calculate the balance
coefficient. This is a one time operation that is not redone for each incoming image. To
force a recalculation, use the shortcut ALT+R or select Bayer/Color > Recalculate look-up
table.
In manual mode, you can enter red, green and blue offset values to be applied to each color
channel. The correction factor will be added (or subtracted) for each pixel intensity. The
parameter value is in percent of the total dynamic range: a +10% will add a constant of 25
grey level for an 8-bit (256 levels) image.
Color Grading Processing
Image color grading can either be performed using 1D or 3D look-up table. These tables
are calculated via 3rd party software and can be loaded within StreamPix 7. All the file
formats are supported, both 1D or 3D. Check each section for further details.
156
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
1D look-up table setup
1D Look up table mode: Enable the usage of a 1D LUT for color grading. Beside the ability
to load a LUT file, a predefined transform LUT is also available to apply a negative
conversion.
1D look-up table File: Specifies the 1D look-up table file that can be loaded for processing.
Current supported formats:
• Norpix 1D Text 1D LUT file(*.txt,*.nlt)
• Flame and lustre(*.3ld)file
• ColorCorrection(*.cc)
• ColorCorrectionCollection(*ccc)
• Cinespace file(*.csp)
• Houdini file(*.lut)
• Iridas_cube file(*.cube)
• Iridas_itx file(*.itx)
• Iridas_look file(*.look)
• Spi1d file(*.spi1d)
• Truelight(*.spi1d)
A NorPix 1D LUT file can be generated manually for basic correction and grading by
creating a CSV text file, say in Excel®. In the text file, syntax is: Each line contains 4
entries, Level value to be remapped, followed with corresponding Blue, Green and Red
values.
• There is no need to specify all the LUT values and entries. Only the needed value
must be specified. All missing values will be interpreted as “Leave as is”
• Level can be specified as range using [ - ] characters
• # comment a line
• Out bound values are ignored.
Example
#Index, Blue, Green, Red Remapping value
0, 255, 0, 0: gray level 0 will be remapping as pure blue,
1, 10, 10, ,: gray level 1 will be remapping as Blue =10, Green =10, Red default (1),
[200,255], 255, 255, 255: gray levels 200 to 255 are remapped to pure white.
NorPix Inc.
157
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3D Lookup table setup
3D lookup table mode: Enable
the usage of a 3D LUT for color grading. Only a 3rd party
LUT file can be imported.
3D lookup table File: Current
supported file formats:
• Flame and lustre(*.3ld) file
• ColorCorrection(*.cc)
• ColorCorrectionCollection(*ccc)
• Cinespace file(*.csp)
• Houdini file(*.lut)
• Iridas_cube file(*.cube)
• Iridas_itx file(*.itx)
• Iridas_look file(*.look)
• Pandora_mga(*.mga)
Enable the American Society of Cinematographers Color Decision
List (ASC CDL) basic primary color grading adjustment. This can be used to apply basic
gain, offset and gamma connections. See “Non-linear Remapping via ASC CDL Formula”
on page 137.
ASC CDL adjustment:
9.4.3
Color Matrix correction
The color filter arrays used on all image sensors do not exactly match the response of the
human eye. As such, a final level of tuning known as color correction or color saturation
correction is required. The most commonly used form of color correction is a 3 X 4 matrix
operation.
Without correction, coefficients are:
B=
[100%]
[0%]
[0%]
[0.00%]
Bo
G=
[0%]
[100%]
[0%]
[0.00%]
Go
R=
[0%]
[0%]
[100%]
[0.00%]
Ro
Commonly, the sum of coefficients for a channel equals 100%. You should refer to the
sensor color transfer function to determine the right coefficients to use.
See the following example:
158
B=
[142%]
[-32%]
[-10%]
[0.00%]
Bo
G=
[-15%]
[140%]
[-25%]
[0.00%]
Go
R=
[-14%]
[-22%]
[136%]
[0.00%]
Ro
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.4.4
Miscellaneous LUT Processing
Pseudo Color: This can be used for remapping monochrome images to pseudo color.
Currently, six predefined look up table functions are available. Contact Norpix if you feel
more LUTs should be added.
NOTE:
Pseudo-color cannot be used with true color RGB or YUV images.
Available predefined LUTs are:
• Rainbow
• Inverted rainbow
• Hot
• Cold
• Saturated 3 level
• Saturated 5 level.
Saturated level LUTs are used to help figure out the camera exposure and gain settings.
Those LUTs display in false color saturated pixels (red) and under exposed pixels (green):
Saturated 3 level (256 colors):
• Grey level from 0 to 3 are display as green
• Grey level from 252 to 255 are display as red
Saturated 5 level (256 colors):
• Grey level from 0 to 5 are display as green
• Grey level from 250 to 255 are display as red
Monochrome image processing: Depending on the need for data integrity, one may need to
maintain across the 1D LUT processing the monochrome image format (default) or accept
the image to be converted first as a color RGB image.
By default, all monochrome images are converted first to an RGB 24-bit color images
before a LUT can be applied, since the LUT include components for RGB channels.
However, when working with a 10 or 12 or 16-bit monochrome images, the conversion
will downgrade the pixel resolution down to 8 bit. This is something that sometimes is not
suitable.
By selecting the Monochrome image processing option, you can make sure the true bit
depth is maintained, with only a single 10, 12 or 16-bit channel being processed
NorPix Inc.
159
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Window leveling: Linear
window leveling can be performed for pixel depth greater that 8
bits. By default, StreamPix always displays the 8 most significant bits of captured images.
Window leveling can highlight specific bit ranges on the images.
As an example, a 10-bit image can be leveled in 3 ways:
• 8 most significant bits (bit 2 to 10, default StreamPix 7 setting)
• 8 middle significant bits (bit 1 to 9)
• 8 least significant bits (bit 0 to 7).
160
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.5
DAQ settings
NOTE:
You must have a specific license to enable the DAQ module.
This page is used to change the various settings related to DAQ Graphs.
Figure 9-4: DAQ settings
9.5.1
General
Auto-export DAQ data to: Allows
you to automatically export the DAQ data when
exporting a video file. The destination choices are: None, *.xls, or *.csv.
9.5.2
DAQ Graph
Value precision: This
is the number of decimal places used when displaying DAQ values.
Time range increment/decrement steps (ms): This
is the value used when incrementing or
decrementing the time range of a graph.
Draw the '0' line: If the 0 value is in the range of the Y axis of the graph, the graph will trace
a full horizontal line on it.
NorPix Inc.
161
StreamPix 7 User Guide
DAQ Graph colors
the color used to highlight the time range occupied
taken by the current sequence image.
Image's time range highlight color:
Axis & Text color: The
Inner line color: The
color used to draw the graphs axis and text.
color used to draw the step lines inside the graph.
Current Position color: The
color used to draw current position lines in DAQ graphs.
Information shown in LIVE graph header
Most recent timestamp: Show
the time stamp of the last data set received from the DAQ
device.
Total Data Sets:
Show the total number of data sets captured.
Most recent value: Show
the most recent value read by the DAQ device.
Information shown in the FILE graph header
Current timestamp:
Show the time stamp at the current position in the DAQ Graph.
Total DataSets: Show
Current DataSet:
Current value:
162
the total numbers of data sets in the DAQ file.
Show the current data set index.
Show the value at the current position in the DAQ Graph.
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.6
Displayed Data settings
This page allows you to customize the information displayed in the colored band above
the image in a Workspace. You can select which information to show when in single
display or in multi-display, in live or in playback.
Figure 9-5: Displayed data settings
You can also choose the font type and size used. Only fixed-width fonts are available as it
keep the text easy to read even when being updated. Using a larger font size will make text
easier to read at the expense of having a smaller area left to display the image itself.
NorPix Inc.
163
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.7
Interface settings
Figure 9-6: Interface settings
9.7.1
General
NOTE:
StreamPix may need to be restarted for some changes to take effect. If it does,
you will receive a prompt with the option to restart immediately or later.
Language File: Allows
you to change the default language used in the display. The
language file is an XML file located at:
C:\Users\[username]\AppData\Roaming\Norpix\StreamPix7\Languages.
NOTE:
Language files are XML text editable files. Should you find the translations
are incorrect, do not hesitate to forward your changes to
[email protected]
Sequence Slider Position: Allows
you to change the default placement of the Sequence
Slider bar, either at the top (just below the ribbon bar) or at the bottom of the window
(default).
Time stamps display format: The time format used in the interface. It can either show the
relative time (relative to the first frame of the sequence) or the absolute time (actual date +
time).
164
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
Show microseconds: Display
the timestamp's microseconds in the interface, although it
should only be used with a precise hardware time source. Default timestamping uses the
OS time, which has a precision of ~ 1 millisecond. You can select a different time source
than the default system clock provided you have a supported device. Use Select Time
Source from the Workspace tab to select a different time source.
display the fps in real time. The fps is always displayed, but this
option shows it with 2 decimal places, instead of being rounded to the nearest integer.
Show live fps decimals:
Make the absolute time stamps appear in Greenwich standard.
(No time zone adjustment)
Show time in UTC format:
Apply Full Screen Mode across multiple monitors:
9.7.2
Does what it says.
Zoom
Minimum zoom factor (%): The
minimum zoom factor allowed when zooming out.
Maximum zoom factor (%): The
maximum zoom factor allowed when zooming in.
Zoom in/out steps (%): The
zooming steps. For example, 10 means that each zoom in/out
action, will change the zoom by 10%.
9.7.3
QuickZoom
QuickZoom allows you to quickly browse image content. Two different zoom levels can
be preset to zoom in or out of the image. Set the Full View value to the zoom factor at
which the whole image is visible in the display area.
QuickZoom Level 1: Set
the zoom factor to a specific value when holding “Ctrl” while
clicking in a display. The zoom will be centered on the pixel under the mouse.
QuickZoom Level 2: Set the zoom factor to a specific value when holding “Ctrl-Shift”
while clicking in a display. The zoom will be centered on the pixel under the mouse.
QuickZoom Full View: Set
the zoom factor to a specific value when using the “Ctrl-*” key
combination. The zoom will be centered on the pixel under the mouse.
ROI QuickZoom minimum size: Set the minimum size allowed for the Zoom ROI. The ROI
QuickZoom allows you to make a zone of the image or use the full display area. If it is
smaller than the minimum size, the ROI size will be increased accordingly.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
If the ROI is smaller than 4x4 pixels, the ROI action will be ignored.
165
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.7.4
Docked Dialog
NOTE:
(Not available in the Single Camera version)
Automatically show/hide the docking panel: When selected: When
enabled, shows the
docking panel when the mouse moves to the right-most part of the Streampix window
(when maximixed) and hides it when the mouse move elsewhere.
When clicking on a docked dialog, select the matching workspace: Toggles
the selection of
the matching Workspace when a docked dialog is selected.
Docked Dialog shown: Determines which Workspaces are shown in the docking panel for
each mode, Single or Multi-Display. The choices are Current Workspace, or All
Workspaces.
9.7.5
Customizing the Application menu
Settings > Interface > Customize the Application menu ... opens a dialog from where you can
select which items to include in the Application menu. Uncheck items to hide them. By
default, the menu uses small icons. On a HD screen (> 1024x768) you might want to
select Show large icons in the application menu for better visibility.
NOTE:
9.7.6
StreamPix 7 will have to be restarted for changes to take effect.
Customizing the Ribbon interface
opens a dialog from where you can change the
layout and content of the ribbon toolbars and design your own custom toolbars.
Settings > Interface > Customize Ribbons...
166
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
NOTE:
StreamPix 7 will have to be started for changes to take effect.
Figure 9-7: Customize Ribbon settings
The Current Ribbon Layout is on the left, and all the Available commands are on the right.
Dark blue represents categories (“tabs”), light blue the panels (“groups”) and white the
individual controls. All items are displayed in dark green when selected.
To add an item to an existing tab or group
1.
Double-click (or click Add to Current Ribbon) on an item in the Available commands
list to insert it in the Current Ribbon Layout list.
2.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the items in the list.
3.
Delete item
TIP:
removes the item.
As an item is selected in either list, a brief description is displayed in the
information area below.
To create a new item
NorPix Inc.
1.
Use the Insert Category, Panel, Label and Separator buttons to define your own custom
tabs, groups, and buttons.
2.
Enter a name for the new item in the Label edit field.
167
StreamPix 7 User Guide
3.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the items in the list.
4.
Select OK to save your changes. They will take effect the next time that StreamPix 7
is launched.
TIP:
You can save/load your ribbon configuration in case you need to switch between
different layouts.
TIP: Restore Default restores
the default ribbons.
See also “HOWTO Modify the GUI” on page 90.
168
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.8
Metadata settings
Figure 9-8: Metadata settings
Save metadata along with sequence file: If
enabled, when streaming to a Sequence file,
Streampix will also save the metadata bundled with the saved frames. The metadata is
saved in the same folder as the Sequence in a file with the same name as the Sequence
with an added “.metadata” extension. Ex: “Capture123.seq.metadata”
To view the metadata, use the Metadata Spy module and/or the Metadata Overlay module.
See “Metadata Spy” on page 244 and “Metadata Overlay” on page 243.
Metadata constant size: If
0, the metadata will be stored with a dynamic size for optimal
file usage. However, if you require recording in loops, or pre/post (i.e. rewriting over old
images & metadata), then you need to set a constant value for the size. This value can be
computed using the Metadata Spy Module which will monitor the live feed to estimate the
minimum size needed. You can also use Tools > Metadata Manager.
Metadata info size: If you use a 3rd party module that uses a custom metadata type,
StreamPix 7 needs to save some information about this custom type to the metadata file.
Use the Metadata Manager to compute the required metadata info size.
9.9
MOV settings
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
The MOV format is only available on StreamPix 32-bit. Apple has stated that
they will stop supporting the MOV format for all Windows platforms starting
from Q1 2016. Therefore, we do not recommended using MOV within
StreamPix on the long term. MOV support in StreamPix also eventually will
be discontinued.
169
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Figure 9-9: MOV settings
This page is used to set the default options used when exporting to a MOV file. If
Automatic File Naming is enabled, those settings will be used. If the selected codec offers
additional settings, clicking on Codec Settings displays a dialog with custom settings for
that codec.
TIP:
For most codecs, a higher Video Compression Quality will result in a larger file.
To get an uncompressed Quicktime file, choose “Apple None” as the Video
Codec.
NOTE:
Some codecs will put watermark on the images (or simply won't work) if you
don't have the required license.
You can Create an SMPTE timecode track if you have an external LTC time source. This
timecode track will be selectable in the Quicktime Player by clicking on the current time
(ex: “00:00:00”) and selecting “Timecode: Non-Drop-Frame” from the drop-down menu.
170
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.10 Playback settings
Figure 9-10: Playback settings
9.10.1
General
First Frame / Last Frame behavior:
Configure the way the |< and >| playback buttons
behave.
Normally, they will move to the first and last frame of the Sequence file. However, you
can have them move to the oldest or most recent frame (according to their time stamps).
The second option is useful if you do loop recording or pre/post triggering.
Auto-Rewind: If enabled, StreamPix will continue playback from the start when the end of
the sequence is reached (instead of stopping).
Switch to Full Screen mode during playback: If
enabled, StreamPix will make the display
area extend to the full screen while playing back a Sequence or .avi.
Maximum playback interval: During
playback, the display follows the time stamps. So if
two successive images are 10 seconds apart, StreamPix will wait 10 seconds between
showing each image. This can be a problem if the recording is not continuous, for
example, if you start a recording, stop it, then restart it later. To work around this problem,
StreamPix uses a maximum playback interval value. For example, if you set this value to
1000 ms, the playback will proceed with, at most, a one second interval between each
successive frame. Default value is 5000 ms.
#Frames moved on PageUp/PageDown on slider: When the Sequence Slider is selected, the
PageUp/PageDown buttons can be used to move X frames forward or backward.
Length of the time jumps in MS: Sets
the time interval that the Sequence > Time Jump
buttons jump the display in milliseconds. The default is 1000 ms.
NorPix Inc.
171
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.10.2
Synchronization
NOTE:
The following features are not available in the Single Camera version.
Enable Sychronization across Workspaces: Allows
you to customize the behavior of the
slider's cursor when moved while StreamPix is in Select All Workspaces mode. It is only
relevant if every Sequence in each Workspace was captured at the same time. A Master
Workspace must also be defined for the synchronization to be maintained.
Auto-select master workspace: When enabled, allows StreamPix to automatically choose a
workspace to be the master when all Workspaces are selected. If no Workspace has been
designated, then the left-most Workspace becomes the default Master. The master can
always be changed manually by double-clicking on the desired Workspace tab.
Synchronize on master frame > index. Used if all used cameras have the same frame rate
and started recording at the same time, as in hardware-triggered recording. For instance,
moving one sequence to frame # 45 will bring every other sequence to frame #45.
Synchronize on master frame > timestamp. The linked sequences will show the frames that
were captured at the same time as the current frame. If a frame with the exact same time
stamp can not be found, the sequence will show the frame captured before the requested
time.
Always use local stream’s reference time to calculate relative time: If
No, then the master
stream reference time will be used to calculate the relative times.
172
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.11 Playback Rate settings
Figure 9-11: Playback settings
Show Manual Playback Slider: allows you to playback sequences and AVI files at variable
speeds (slower & faster, forward & backward). See “Manual Playback Control” on page
32.
9.11.1
Sequence playback rates
Sequence playback rates control
the speed steps used by the Manual Playback Slider.
To add a new value
1.
Deselect the Use automatic values checkbox.
2.
Select Add to add a new fps value to the list.
3.
Enter a new value in the Enter an fps value dialog, and select OK.
• A negative FPS value indicates a backward playback and a positive value is a
forward playback.
• Remove selected erases the currently selected value.
• Reset default values returns the list to default values.
• Mirror Values duplicate the values in the opposite direction. For example, if your
list consists of 0, 10, -20, 30, Mirror will add -10, 20 and -30.
The zero (0.00 FPS) value is mandatory and is used as the Paused value and will be
automatically added when the OK button is selected.
NorPix Inc.
173
StreamPix 7 User Guide
If Use automatic values is selected, StreamPix will dynamically build a custom list of FPS
values based on the “Suggested frame rate” specified in the current Sequence header.
9.11.2
AVI playback rates
AVI playback is handled differently as the values are percentages of the AVI normal
speed. Compared to the regular playback speed, 50% will playback at half-speed and
200% will playback twice as fast.
• Selecting Add allow you to add a new % value to the list.
• Remove selected erases the currently selected value
• Reset default values returns the list to default values.
The zero (0% speed) and normal (100% speed) values are mandatory. New values will be
automatically added (as needed) when the OK button is selected.
AVI files don't allow backward playback so only positive values are allowed.
Prepost
9.12 Pre/Post Trigger settings
Figure 9-12: Pre/Post Trigger settings
is a special recording mode used only with sequence files (on disk or in
RAM), as the other formats (AVI, bmp, tiff, etc) do not support loop recording.
Pre/Post Trigger
174
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
The Pre/Post Trigger ignores the loop settings and always loops. Pre/Post Trigger also
ignores any sequence limit.
First define a duration for the “Pre” and the “Post” length.
In Use time controlled mode, when record is initiated, StreamPix will sum the two
durations and factor in the current capture fps of the grabber, to compute the maximum
number of frames in the sequence. When the maximum number of frames is reached, the
recording will continue from the beginning, overwriting the oldest images.
In Use frame controlled mode, you specify how many frames must be kept before the event
and how many after. When the Pre/Post event is triggered, either from an IO action (see “I/
O Manager docked dialog” on page 35) or from the Trigger Pre/Post Event command,
StreamPix will continue recording for the “after” duration and stop automatically once
that preset time has elapsed. The resulting sequence will include what happened before
and after the event.
When the Pre/Post event occurs, the next frame to be captured is marked as the reference
frame. This means that when browsing the sequence and displaying the time stamps as
relative instead of absolute, each frame's time will be relative to that reference frame
instead of the first frame of the sequence. Since the frame ''Event'' will be marked as time
0, frames captured before it will present a negative time and those captured after will be
identified by a positive time.
Settings
Automatic Rearm: The
current target file (the Sequence file) will automatically be saved
and closed before StreamPix restarts recording. Using this with the Settings > Recording
Auto-Create file option will automatically create a new sequence file every time the Pre/
Post Trigger event occurs.
Rename Pre/Post file: The
Sequence file will be renamed with the absolute time stamp of
the reference frame. The file will be in the same location, but renamed to something like
“Fri May 09 14-03-47.22.seq” which show the date and time of the reference frame.
Extended Post: Ensures
that if another pre-post event is triggered while recording a post
duration, the post duration is extended, using the last pre-post event as the new zero. All
Pre/Post events are still marked for easy retrieval.
Automatically sort the sequence: At
the end of recording, automatically sort the images
according to their time stamps.
If Don’t overwrite the ‘before’ section if more than one event are triggered is selected,
multiple triggered events that overlap will generate a single Sequence file containing both
events.
Use Individual Configurations: The Pre/Post triggers must be defined per Workspace in the
associated I/O Manager docked dialog. See “Pre/Post Trigger settings” on page 174.
NorPix Inc.
175
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.13 Recording settings
Figure 9-13: Recording settings
9.13.1
General
Auto-Create File:
Define StreamPix behavior when a recording or snap is initiated.
• Never Won't create anything when the record button is pressed.
• If no current file will automatically create a file if there are none. If a sequence file
is already open (from “New/Open Sequence on Disk” action or from a previous
recording), the recording will be done in that file.
• Always will close the current Workspace file (if any) and create a new target file
for the recording. The created files are named using the auto-naming scheme
defined in Settings > Auto Naming. The naming scheme is applied for all auto
created files.
Auto-created file type (on record): Set what type of file is created when a recording triggers
the auto creation of a target file.
Auto-created file type (on snap):
Set what type of file is created when a snap triggers the
auto creation of a target file.
Use 'Recording start' as reference time: The default is No, StreamPix uses the first captured
frame timestamp as the reference time. Selecting Yes means that when a recording starts,
the current time that the Record operation starts is used as the Sequence reference time.
This can be useful to get accurate relative times where you need the reference time to be
176
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
exactly the time at which the recording started, for example when the recording is
manually started, but the image capture is controlled by a hardware trigger.
Start Recording Delay: Allows you to specify a wait period between the time the Record
button is pressed and the time at which the recording will actually start. Start Recording
Delay reads the current time when the record button is pushed, and then adds the delay
value to calculate a “future start time”. This new start time is then compared with each
incoming image time stamp to figure out if the frame must be kept or discarded.
Stop Recording Delay: Allows
you to specify a wait period between the time the Record
button is pressed (to stop the recording) and the time at which the recording will actually
be stopped. Stop Recording Delay reads the current time when the record button is pushed
to stop recording, and then adds the delay value to calculate a “future stop time”. This new
stop time is then compared with each incoming image time stamp to figure out if the frame
must be kept or discarded.
NOTE:
Start and Stop Recording Delay allow a better start and stop recording
synchronization between multiple cameras.
Wait for late frames before stopping the recording: If
enabled, the recording continues on a
camera until late frames are captured, to match the timestamp.
Force same number of frames in all workspaces: If
enabled when recording from multiple
cameras at the same frame rate, recording continues until the same number of frames are
captured from all cameras so that the number of frames synchronize. This setting will
override any stop recording delay.
Synch Start/Stop Recording on LTC: special mode to synchronize start/stop recording on
current time code received from an LTC reader board. If enabled, the current time code is
rounded up to the second 0-frame time code (up to 2 seconds delay) and used to determine
the exact time code value in the future when start/stop recording will occur. The same
value is provided for all workspaces to ensure time and number of frames synchronize.
Use a common time frame for sync recordings: If enabled, the current time code is rounded
up to the second 0-frame time code (up to 2 seconds delay) and used to determine the
exact time code value in the future when start/stop recording will occur. The same value is
provided for all workspaces to ensure time and number of frames synchronize.
9.13.2
When a recording ends...
Switch to playback mode: The Workspace
display(s) will automatically switch to the
playback mode. The Playback position is set to the last frame recorded.
Auto-sort the Sequence: Automatically
NorPix Inc.
sort the images according to their timestamps.
177
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Choose a format (SEQ, AVI, BMP, JPG, etc) to export to
according to the naming scheme defined in Settings > Auto Naming.
Auto-export sequence to...:
Use multi-threaded auto-export/auto sort: When recording from multiple Workspaces,
StreamPix will post-process all Sequences simultaneously.
Caution
When Use multi-threaded auto-export/auto sort with some codecs for
frame compression (AVI, MP4...), make sure the selected codec
supports concurrent instances. Failure to do so may result to some
software and/or system instability. In which case, disable this option.
Prompt for a file name (sequence & avi files): Lets you set whether or not to be prompted for
a file name.
Auto-close file: Automatically
NOTE:
9.13.3
close the current file when the recording stops.
When Auto-close file is enabled, if the recording was to a RAM sequence, and
neither Auto-export Sequence to... nor Save Using autonaming on close has
been set, the file is discarded. Otherwise, RAM sequences are saved
according to the auto-naming set for exported files.
Buffer usage monitoring
Maximum buffer usage allowed (%): StreamPix can trigger an action if the buffer usage gets
too high. Too high buffer usage can result in dropped frames.
If maximum buffer usage is reached: StreamPix can either do nothing or stop the recording
on the current Workspace (or on all Workspaces).
9.13.4
Limits
Limit sequence on disk/RAM to X frames: Specify
the default number of frames to be
captured in a sequence on disk or in RAM.
Loop recording when limit is reached: Define StreamPix behavior when the frame limit is
reached. If the Loop option is enabled, the Sequence will continue recording from the
start. Otherwise, the recording will stop when the limit is reached. These settings can be
overridden at the Workspace level, in the Sequence docked dialogs.
178
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.14 Recording Rate settings
Figure 9-14: Recording Rate settings
9.14.1
While Recording...
While recording...
offers the following options:
• Save all frames is the default behavior. Every acquired frame is saved to the target
file (Sequence, AVI, etc.).
• Save one frame every X frames lets you reduce the recording rate. Enter an upper
range, in fps, for your camera. The Workspace > Recording Rate slider range field
lets you specify the actual capture rate.
• Use a recording script offers an even finer control of the recording process. With
it, clicking on the record button will start running a predefined recording script.
Select Edit Script to open the Recording Manager Editor, described below.
TIP:
You can also access the Recording Manager Editor through the Workspace >
Recording Manager button for the current or all selected Workspaces.
9.15 Recording Manager Editor
The Recording Manager Editor allows you to build your own recording scripts. When
opened from a Workspace tab, the script applies only to the current workspace. If opened
from StreamPix Settings, the script will be used by every Workspace (except the ones that
use their own).
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
This dialog can be brought up from either Settings > Recording Rate > Edit
179
StreamPix 7 User Guide
script or Workspace > Recording Manager.
Figure 9-15: Recording Manager Editor
The current script (if any) is shown. Save to file prompts you to save the current script to
an XML-format file.
Reset
clears the current recording script.
Load from file
allows you to reload script from a previously saved script file.
Each recording script is made of one or more steps. Each step can be made of any number
of commands and/or substeps. The script is always run sequentially starting when a
recording begins.
Understanding how to make a complex script can be a steep learning curve, but once you
grasp the mechanics, the flexibility of the Recording Manager engine can cover most
recording needs.
Click on a step in the tree on the left hand side to show/edit this step. To delete a sub-step,
delete the associated 'Call Sub-Step' command in its parent step. Don't forget that you can
always ask [email protected] if you ever need help building a script.
9.15.1
Commands
Commands are instructions given to StreamPix. Whenever StreamPix acquires a new
frame, the Recording Manager is queried to know what to do with it.
Grab Frame: This command instructs StreamPix to save the frame to the current target file
(sequence, etc). When encountering this command, the script execution will stop until a
query is made by StreamPix.
180
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
Skip Frame: This
command instructs StreamPix to discard the frame. It will not be saved.
When encountering this command, the script execution will stop until a query is made by
StreamPix.
Loop Recording: This
command will loop the current sequence. i.e. The next saved frame
will overwrite the first frame of the sequence and recording will continue from there.
New Sequence: Close the current sequence
StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming.
New AVI: Close the current sequence
StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming.
and create a new one based on the settings in
and create a new AVI file based on the settings in
New Images: Close the current sequence and create
settings in StreamPix Settings > Auto Naming.
Wait For Query: This
a new image sequence based on the
will stall the execution of the script until a new query is made by
StreamPix.
Call Sub-Step: Will create
a new sub-step which will be ran. Once the sub-step completes,
execution of the script will resume.
Execute: Will
9.15.2
run a shell command line instruction of your choice.
After the Last Command
Once the last command of a step as been processed, you can define what will happen using
this section.
Restart immediately: Will
immediately continue running the step from it's first command
Restart every X frames: The
step will loop every X frames acquired.
Restart at specified interval: The
9.15.3
step will loop at the specified time interval.
Stop Condition(s)
A step will continue running indefinitely until one of its stop conditions occurs. Every step
will also stop when the recording stops (For example, you click on the Record button a
second time to stop the recording). Most of the time, every sub-step should have at least
one stop condition, otherwise the control will never be passed back to its parent step.
When a step reaches one of its stop conditions, the step terminates and control is passed
back to its parent step. If the Main Step reaches one of its stop conditions, the recording
automatically stops.
Every stop condition also has a property named Can Interrupt. If it is enabled, the stop
condition(s) will be evaluated after each command. If it is disabled, the stop condition(s)
are only evaluated when the step reaches its end.
NorPix Inc.
181
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Do X Times: The
step will stop after it has been run X times.
Until X Frames: The step will stop once X frames have been captured by the step (and child
steps).
For Time X: The
step will stop after a certain time.
Until Time X: The
Until IO: The
step will stop when the system time reaches a predefined time.
step will stop when a specific IO event occurs (ex: Rising Edge).
Until Timed IO: The
step will stop after the input level has been high or low for the
specified amount of time.
9.15.4
Recording Manager - Script Examples
To grab at half the frame rate (Complexity: low)
* Main Step *
Commands: Grab Frame, Skip Frame.
After the Last Command: Loop Immediately.
Stop Conditions: None
Capture one minute every hour (Complexity: medium)
* Main Step *
Commands: Call SubStep "GrabFor1Min".
After the Last Command: Loop Every 1:00:00 (1 hour).
Stop Conditions: None.
* GrabFor1Min Step *
Commands: Grab Frame.
After the Last Command: Loop Immediately
Stop Conditions: For Time X = 1:00 (1 minute)
Pre/Post recording - Create a new sequence, capture in a 1 minute loop until Rising
Edge, then capture for 10 seconds, then start anew. Stop after 10 sequences have
been captured this way (Complexity: High)
* Main Step *
Commands: New Sequence, Call SubStep "Pre", Call SubStep
"Post".
After the Last Command: Loop immediately.
182
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
Stop Conditions: Do 10 Times.
* Pre Step *
Commands: Call SubStep "GrabFor1MinLoop", Loop.
After the Last Command: Loop immediately.
Stop Conditions: Until Rising Edge on IO device (can
interrupt).
* GrabFor1MinLoop Step *
Commands: Grab Frame.
After the Last Command: Loop immediately.
Stop Conditions: Do For 1 minute.
* Post Step *
Commands: Grab Frame.
After the Last Command: Loop immediately.
Stop Conditions: Do For 10 seconds.
9.16 Remote Control settings
This page is used to connect Workspace(s) to the StreamPix Remote software.
Figure 9-16: Remote Control settings
NorPix Inc.
183
StreamPix 7 User Guide
StreamPix Remote is an external application that allows the user to remotely view, control
and monitor multiple workspaces running on one or more computers on the local network.
It is distributed separately from StreamPix.
To configure StreamPix 7 to connect to StreamPix Remote:
1.
Select Home > StreamPix Settings > Remote Control.
2.
Select the Enable remote control check box to enable network communication.
3.
Optionally, select Make StreamPix Bonjour discoverable on the network to allow
StreamPix Remote to discover StreamPix 7 computers on the network.
4.
Optionally, select Allow workspaces to automatically connect to remote server when
loaded.
5.
Enable Compress images before transfer and set the compression quality. This is the
recommended setting. Compression increases the local CPU load somewhat, but the
transmitted image to StreamPix Remote is of small size, saving network bandwidth.
When the network bandwidth usage is high, this option can reduce the network traffic
considerably.
6.
To get connected select a local IP address and supply the same IP address and port
number you specified when you configured StreamPix Remote to accept new
connections. The connection will be possible only if both IP addresses are reachable.
7.
If more control over a remote computer is needed, select Run StreamPix Agent at
system startup to enable StreamPix Agent. This tool will allow StreamPix Remote to:
- Shutdown or restart computer
- Log off user
- Launch StreamPix 7
- Forcibly quit StreamPix 7 (in case of crash or frozen GUI).
NOTE:
8.
StreamPix Agent is a separate application that runs in the background. Once
enabled and running, it launches at user login time. A small icon displays in
the system tray.
Select OK to save the changes and close the StreamPix Settings dialog.
When remote control is enabled. a new dialog will show up on the StreamPix 7 docking
panel interface for each workspace.
Figure 9-17: Remote Control docked dialog
NOTE:
184
Make sure you configure the firewall to allow StreamPix 7 to access the
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
network.
Select the Connect or Disconnect buttons to manually connect or disconnect the current
workspace to StreamPix Remote. Selecting the Broadcast check box will send the
command to all other Workspaces so you won't have to click Connect or Disconnect for
each Workspace. See also the StreamPix Remote Manual.
A connection may fail if:
• StreamPix Remote is not running or accepting new connections.
• The address and port number are not the same as those StreamPix Remote is
listening to.
• A firewall blocks the port that StreamPix Remote is listening to.
9.17 GPU Management
Depending on GPU brand and capability, GPU Management Settings give a better
overview of the GPU capabilities for video compression. Supported GPU are Nvidia,
AMD, and Intel. This interface allows you to enable or disable GPU acceleration.
Changing these settings requires a StreamPix restart.
List capabilities for:
• H264 (AVC)
• H265 (HEVC)
• JPEG compression.
Figure 9-18: GPU management settings for Intel, Nvidia, and AMD GPUs
NorPix Inc.
185
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.17.1
Special Registry Keys
On some rare occasions when using real time JPEG compression, for images larger than 3
Mpx size, the multithreaded algorithm will returned a corrupted image. To avoid that,
force a single threaded operation.
To ENABLE or DISABLE multithreading processing while software JPEG compressing:
Path:
Hkey_Current_User\Software\Norpix
Key type:
DWORD
Key name: JTMode
Default value: 0:
multi-thread mode, 1: single thread mode.
MSB or LSB Alignment into TIFF container
Most 3rd party software properly handles 16-bit tiff images provided the bits are MSB
aligned. However, some 3rd party software requires the bits to be LSB aligned.
MSB or LSB align 10-12-14 bit into TIFF container:
Path:
Hkey_Current_User\Software\Norpix
Key type:
DWORD
Key name: MSB
Default value:
186
0: aligned on the most significant bit, 1: aligned on the less significant bit.
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.18 Sequence Settings
Sequence Settings allow you to set the default behaviors for Sequences saved to the hard
drive or to Ram, and to set the compression parameters for new and exported Sequences.
Figure 9-19: Sequence settings
9.18.1
General
NOTE: StreamPix Settings > Sequence settings
apply globally. To set Sequence
parameters for individual or linked Workspaces, see “Workspace Settings” on
page 104.
Override Playback Rate: Override the calculated frame rate of recorded sequence by a fixed
value.
NOTE:
The Override Playback Rate option does not alter the camera’s capture rate.
The file header is overwritten with the playback frame rate. The recording rate
is still the incoming frame rate from the camera. To set the recording rate, see
“Recording Rate settings” on page 179.
Forced frame rate value: the
NorPix Inc.
fps value used if Override Playback Rate is enabled.
187
StreamPix 7 User Guide
If you do loop recording or use the pre-post trigger, you
might want to enable this. This will make sure that the frames in the sequence will be
exported in their chronological order. This is especially important when exporting to AVI
or MOV.
Sort frames before exporting:
Use nearest frame for goto and synch: When disabled (default), StreamPix 7 uses the last
frame to have been captured at the requested time. Enabling it will seek the closest frame
(in time).
Bypass system caching: For uncompressed sequences, when bypassing is enabled
(default), StreamPix 7 sends the buffers directly to the HDD, bypassing the system cache.
For most disks, this mode offers the best performance, especially when using external
storage devices, like USB 3.0 disks. However, some disks perform better with system
caching.
Only take a single reference time: When enabled, StreamPix 7 uses the reference time when
the first recording begins. When disabled, each sequence begins with a new reference
time. The default is disabled.
Export subsampling (1/X): When enabled, exports onf frame per N frames. The default is 1,
or every frame.
Write StreamPix version in the sequence description: When enabled, the StreamPix version
number is included in the sequence meta-data.
When opening a sequence, show the oldest frame: When enabled, StreamPix 7 displays the
oldest frame first. When disabled, the sequence opens with the last recorded frame.
Open exported sequences in a temp workspace: If you want to automatically open
sequences exported in a new temporary workspace for immediate viewing. This applies to
every Export (current image, current selection & full Sequence) to a Sequence file (.seq).
9.18.2
Markers
Show the Marker list: Show
the list of Markers. The default is No.
Show Edit Marker dialog when adding a marker: Show the Edit Marker dialog when adding
a marker. The default is No.
When recording, put the mark on ...: Places
the marker on either the Latest frame captured,
or on the Next frame captured.
Delete Markers associated with overwritten frames: Automatically
delete markers when a
frame is overwritten. The default is No.
Update the Marker file every time a marker is added: Automatically
update the Marker file
when adding a marker. The default is No.
188
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
NOTE:
9.18.3
By default, markers are kept in RAM until the recording ends. Then an XML
marker file is saved. When large number of markers are set, it is
recommended to enable this option, to avoid clogging the memory.
RAM Sequence
When closing a RAM sequence:
to set what happen when a RAM sequence is closing. The
choices are:
• Discard the sequence
• Ask if the sequence is to be saved
• Automatically save the sequence using the auto-naming scheme for exports. See
“Auto Naming Settings” on page 150.
Pre-allocated RAM frames: Pre-allocate
the memory for uncompressed RAM sequences.
Try this if the normal capture to RAM drops frames (burst recording).
Stop recording if available RAM is < (MB): When
recording to a RAM sequence, StreamPix
7 can become unresponsive if the system runs out of RAM. To avoid this, every second or
so, StreamPix will check the amount of RAM available and if it reaches the critical value
specified here, the recording will automatically be stopped.
9.18.4
Compression for new and exported Sequences
By default, Sequence files don't use compression, images are captured and recorded in raw
format, resulting in lossless quality and superior recording performance. You may choose
to use compression if you have the computing power and if disk space is a concern.
NOTE:
Index information for compressed sequence files is saved as a separate .idx
file. For all recording to a Sequence file with compression on, a new index
stream file is created (with the .idx extension) in the same folder and with the
same name as the Sequence file. This index stream file speeds up the reading
and playback process. It can be deleted, but it will be rebuilt the next time the
Sequence file is accessed. On large file, the rebuild process will take time.
There are two sections: one Compression for new Sequences (i.e. Sequence files used for
direct recording) and Compression for exported Sequences. Both sections offer the same
parameters. This allows you, for example, to record in uncompressed format, then later,
export the Sequence to a compressed format for archiving or distribution purposes.
NorPix Inc.
189
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Compression Types
NOTE:
Compression settings can be set globally or per individual Workspace. From
the Settings > Sequence tab, the settings are global. When done from the
Workspace ribbon, they are per Workspace.
Compression algorithms can be divided into “Lossless” and “Lossy”. With Lossless
compression, all of the original data are preserved, but with lower compression rates,
typically about 2:1. Lossy compression results in greater compression ratios, typically
about 10:1 or greater, resulting in much smaller file sizes, but with a loss of data, and a
potential loss of image quality. The challenge with lossy compression is to find a balance
between maximum compression while maintaining acceptable image quality.
TIP:
Lossy compression doesn’t work well with raw Bayer images, as the color tends
to get damaged. The workaround is to first convert the images to RGB, then
compress.
Compression algorithms can further be divided between Temporal and Spacial. In
Temporal compression, the algorithm is calculated and applied to every frame.
Spacial compression uses the principle of a key frame and then encodes the difference
between each frame and the key frame. Frames are grouped together. The first, or key,
frame, is temporal encoded, and then every other frame in the group is encoded based on
its difference with the key frame. For example, in a group of 30 frames (GOP=30, default),
frame 0 is temporal and 2 to 29 are spacial compressed. You need to reconstruct all the
frames to get access to frame 29. This is much more CPU intensive but allows better
compression.
The type of compression to use is dependent on both your hardware and on your expected
results. The parameters that are available depend on which compression type that you
choose. StreamPix 7 provides the following compression types:
Compression Type
Comments
No compression (raw) Best data preservation, lowest processing overhead.
Lossless JPEG
Works on all images, Temporal, CPU-intensive, low compression (2:1), compression
level dependent on image texture.
Table 9-1: Supported compression options
190
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
Compression Type
Comments
Works on all images, Temporal, CPU-intensive, compression level dependent on
image texture, compression adjusted as a quality percentage, or using the slider. Can
use GPU acceleration. The following compression factors are provided for
information only. To get an accurate estimate, you should do some benchmarking.
Typical compression factors:
Lossy JPEG
• Very light compression (95%)
• Light compression (80%)
• Medium compression (65%)
• Heavy compression (40%)
NOTE: The default is 75%, which is usually considered as visually lossless, with a
compression of about 20:1
Lossless RLE
Works on all images, Temporal, CPU-intensive, compression level maximum 3:1. If
image texture is very complex, compressed image size may actually be larger than
uncompressed. Works well for images with a lot of identical constant pixel intensity.
Lossless Huffman
Works on all images, Temporal, CPU-intensive, compression level maximum 3:1.
Lossless LZ
Works on all images, Temporal, CPU-intensive, compression level maximum 3:1.
Works on all images. Normally based on available hardware, but runs also in software
only. Spacial, very heavy compression, 3 settings:
• GoP (Group of Pictures) typically 30 frames
• Bit rate
• Enable/disable Intel QuickSync chipset capabilities (hardware-dependent).
Possible options are:
• None: all compression is run by the CPU. No image size limit.
H.264
• Intel Quick Sync: If present, an Intel Quick Sync enabled GPU is used for
compression. Image size limited to 1920x1080 pixels. Larger image will switch to
CPU mode
• NVIDIA GPU name: If an NVIDIA® series 7 or higher GPU is detected, the NVIDIA®
GPU will be used to H.264 compress the video in real time. Maximum of 2
workspaces can use the GPU for compression simultaneously. Image size limited to
1920x1080 pixels. Image size limit is 4K resolution. Larger image will switch to CPU
mode.
• AMD GPU name: If an AMD series 9 GPU or higher device is detected, the AMD
GPU will be used to accelerate the compression. Image size limit is 4K resolution.
NOTE: See also “H.264 Decompressor” on page 274.
H.264 Loop
See “H.264 loop recording capability” on page 193.
Table 9-1: Supported compression options
NorPix Inc.
191
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Compression Type
GPU Lossy JPEG
Encoding
JPEG Decoding
Comments
• Off: will run on the CPU.
• NVIDIA® device name: if an NVIDIA® series 5 or higher GPU is detected, the
NVIDIA® GPU will be used to JPEG compress the video in real time.
• Intel IPP: (default) will use Intel Pixel Processing library. Fast, but there may be
some rare cases where the decompression will return an image with a few corrupted
pixels.
• JPEG Turbo: software decoding. Somewhat slower than IPP, but safe.
• QuickSync: If present, an Intel Quick Sync enabled GPU is used. Will use Intel
Quick Sync GPU for decompressing each JPEG frame. Fastest, but there may be
some rare cases where the decompression will return an image with a few corrupted
pixels.
Used exclusively on Bayer images. Specify the Cayer Compressor (lossy, 10:1,
lossless, 3:1) and the Cayer Bayer pattern.
Cayer Compressor
Codec optimized to compress raw Bayer non-interpolated image without degrading
the Bayer pattern. Can be set as lossy or lossless. Compression rate goes from 3:1 to
8:1 depending on setting.
The Cayer codec provided with StreamPix is a demo version, single threaded
(compression speed is limited). Compressed image are watermarked. Contact Norpix
to purchased a complete codec license (About $150.00).
HEVC
HEVC (h.265) is supported on nVidia GPU generation 9 and 4 generation, and higher
Intel CPU/GPUs. HEVC does not support loop (overwrite in place) recording.
Table 9-1: Supported compression options
NOTE:
GPU-accelerated JPEG compression is license-based and uses the GPU for
processing. Current GPU support is for AMD, Intel, and NVIDIA®. When
compressing a raw Bayer image using the accelerated GPU based algorithm, a
Bayer interpolation and white balancing are performed first by the GPU.
Make sure to set the proper Bayer pattern.
NOTE:
The Cayer Bayer pattern specified in StreamPix Settings > Sequence >
Compression must match the Bayer pattern set in Bayer/Colors > Bayer
Pattern.
Parameters for manual Bayer and Color Processing method
When working with raw Bayer images, both Cayer compression and GPU-based JPEG
compression require some extra parameters be defined: JPEG and Cayer must be aware of
192
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
the Bayer pattern. Furthermore, for the JPEG compression, since images must be first
Bayer interpolated before being compressed, the color balancing settings must be defined.
The Bayer and Color Processing method can be either set to Auto or Manual.
Auto:
the current settings defined in the Bayer/Colors ribbon are used (Default):
• Enable/Disable Bayer interpolation (JPEG Only)
• Enable/Disable the Color Balancing (JPEG only)
• Defines the Bayer pattern to use (JPEG and Cayer).
Manual: the
method:
settings are taken from the Parameters for manual Bayer and Color Processing
• Enable/Disable Bayer interpolation on the GPU (JPEG Only)
• Enable/Disable the Color Balancing (JPEG Only)
• Select the Bayer pattern to use (JPEG and Cayer).
9.18.5
H.264 loop recording capability
In Settings > Sequence, the H.264 Loop option allows loop recording with compressed
H.264 sequences.
You have to define the following parameters:
1.
Set Use Fixed Image Size to Yes.
2.
Specify fixed image size in bytes to allow looping on the boundaries (for H.264, this is
the maximum total size of the GOP, for other compression schemes, this is individual
frame max size)
3.
NorPix Inc.
Define GOP size by the number of frames.
193
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Looping is only provided at the boundary of a group size (i.e. if GOP size is 30, loop is
possible every multiple of 30 frames)
Figure 9-20: H.264 Loop recording parameters
NOTE:
194
Before enabling H.264 loop recording, we recommend that you determine the
proper GOP size parameter, especially if the received video stream is already
H.264 compressed. See the “Compression Estimator” on page 231.
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.19 Session settings
This page lets you set the default behavior on start-up.
Figure 9-21: Session settings
9.19.1
When Windows starts...
Start StreamPix:
Lets you specify whether to start StreamPix 7 automatically when the
system starts.
9.19.2
When StreamPix starts...
Check for updates: Automatically
check if a new release of StreamPix 7 is available. The
check is done once per month.
Load external plugin modules: If
you don't use any modules, skipping loading them will
make StreamPix 7 launch faster.
If you don't use the I/O manager, skipping loading the IO drivers
will make StreamPix 7 launch faster.
Load I/O device drivers:
Reload grabber(s): Automatically
reload the camera / frame grabbers used in the last
session.
Reload sequence(s): Automatically
Reload saved script: Reload
NorPix Inc.
reload sequences that were open in the last session.
the saved script. Don't enable this option unless needed.
195
StreamPix 7 User Guide
If a crash occurs, the reload dialog will allows you to select
which grabber/sequence to reload (or none at all). If disabled, everything will be reloaded
as if nothing happened.
Show 'Reload Options' dialog:
Initial window state: Initial
window state when StreamPix 7 is launched (Normal,
Minimized, Maximixed, Full Screen (F12 to toggle)).
Run NpxDebug in background: Run
the NorPix debug utility in the background, typically
minimized in the system tray.
9.19.3
Factory Defaults
In general, there is no need to un-install the software to get everything reset. The Reset All
options let you restore default values:
• Reset all workspaces will erase all the Workspaces while leaving the StreamPix
settings intact.
• Reset all StreamPix settings to their default values... after confirmation, will do
exactly what it says.
9.20 Synchronization settings
Synchronization Settings let you set the priority used to synchronize Audio, Video, and/or
DAQ streams. Streams are listed with the highest priority at the top of the list.
Figure 9-22: Synchronization settings
196
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
9.21 Timeshifting settings
This page is used to configure the timeshifted playback function. You can specify the
timeshift mode to be either based on a time delay or on a frame delay.
Figure 9-23: Timeshifting settings
With timeshift enabled, StreamPix stores information about the antecedents to each frame
captured. Every time a frame is captured, the Sequence display is updated with the frame
that was captured X time or X frames before it. Then, you can use Sequence > Toggle
Timeshifted Playback to start/stop the playback.
Caution: Timeshifted
playback requires twice as much bandwidth as a standard
recording (because StreamPix has to fetch the old frames from the Sequence
file). If StreamPix drops frames, the computer might not have sufficient
bandwidth to perform the simultaneous read/write operations.
TIP:
One way to reduce bandwidth usage is to do a loop recording in a RAM
sequence. See “Recording settings” on page 176.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
Regular playback actions do not work while a timeshifted playback is in
progress.
197
StreamPix 7 User Guide
9.22 Workspace(s) settings.
Figure 9-24: Workspace settings
9.22.1
Default Working Folder
This page is where you set the default Working Folder to use for newly created
workspaces. The default is “my Documents\Sequence\”, but it can be set to any valid path.
It is also possible to automatically append the Workspace name to the working folder path,
making it easy to store files related to each Workspace in its own folder.
By default, file dialogs (Save As / Open) start in the Working Folder. To override this and
start in the last used folder instead, deselect Save File dialogs use the working folder as the
default location.
TIP:
9.22.2
To assign a custom working folder to an individual workspace, select Workspace
> Working Folder.
Default read-ahead buffers
The Default Read-ahead Buffers is the buffer count that will be used by each grabber. For
example, if the camera runs at 30 fps, using 150 buffers means that you have a 5 seconds
buffer in case the system experiences a lag at some point. Having enough buffers means
that the system will be less likely to drop frames when CPU usage peaks; however, too
many buffers only eats up an excessive amount of memory.
Recommended value is to allocate about 1 second of incoming frames. So at 30 fps, 30
buffers is typically enough. Lower values can be set for RAM recording.
198
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
NOTE:
Reload the camera after changing the buffer count.
9.23 More... settings
9.23.1
General
Automatically open folder after exports
If enabled, this will automatically open the folder in Window Explorer where the files
were exported.
Automatically close current file when needed
If disabled, you are prompted every time the current sequence, avi, etc is closed.
Prompt before overwriting an existing file
If enabled, when a file name generated from an autonaming scheme would overwrite an
existing file, StreamPix will show a prompt to confirm that the user wants to overwrite. Of
course, it is recommended to avoid using this setting if files are automatically created
when the record button is clicked as it would delay the recording start time.
Periodically resynchronize the timebase
If enabled, the software will periodically resynchronize the timebase with the system
clock.
9.23.2
Notifications
Frame drop notifications: Disable the notification shown in the notification bar when frame
drop is detected. You can still see if there were frames dropped by looking in the grabber
docked dialog.
9.23.3
Images
NOTE:
Settings changed in the Save As dialog will override these settings.
JPEG Quality: Quality
for the JPEG files. Higher quality results bigger files and higher
CPU usage.
NorPix Inc.
199
StreamPix 7 User Guide
TIFF Format: Normal
or multi-paged (i.e. all images are saved in a single file).
TIFF Date Time Tag content: chose
the format of the DateTime tag in the tiff file.
• Standard Time [YYYY:MM:DD HH:MM:SS]: the tiff specification format.
• Full Time [YYMMDD HHMMSSmmmuuu]: includes milliseconds and microseconds.
• Raw Time [time_t.mmmuuu]: include the standard UNIX 32-bit time_t value and
the milliseconds/microseconds.
• LTC Time [HH:MM:SS-FF]: The source frames must have been captured with the
support of an LTC timing device.
DNG Bayer Pattern: Enter
the image Bayer pattern to be stored in the image file header.
DNG Camera Profile: Enter
the camera profile file name if available. When no profile is
provided, default values are used for light settings and an identity matrix correction is
applied. Use for instance Adobe's DNG Profile Editor (http://www.adobe.com) to create a
profile file.
The default source light settings (21) can be changed by editing the following registry key:
Key Path: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Norpix
Key name: DefaultDNGSourceLight
Key Type: DWORD
Key Value: 21 (default)
Other possible recommended values are:
0 = Unknown
1 = Daylight
2 = Fluorescent
3 = Tungsten (incandescent light)
4 = Flash
9 = Fine weather
10 = Cloudy weather
11 = Shade
12 = Daylight fluorescent (D 5700 - 7100K)
13 = Day white fluorescent (N 4600 - 5400K)
14 = Cool white fluorescent (W 3900 - 4500K)
15 = White fluorescent (WW 3200 - 3700K)
17 = Standard light A
18 = Standard light B
19 = Standard light C
200
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
20 = D55
21 = D65 (Default-Neutral Sun Light)
22 = D75
23 = D50
24 = ISO studio tungsten
File Name Padding: Useful
to facilitate browsing the image files, as sorting them
alphabetically will show them in capture order. Without padding, “image12.bmp” would
be shown before “image2.bmp”. Type the minimum number of digits to include in the file
name.
allows you to do a Bayer conversion only on
snapped images (Snap button) and leave the other images in raw (B&W) format.
Do Bayer conversion on snapped images:
Separator character: The
character to use to separate elements in a file naming scheme.
The default is a hyphen “-”.
9.23.4
Quick Export
The parameters described here affect the behavior of the Home > Quick Export button. See
“Advanced Workspace settings” on page 105.
Source: What
to export, i.e. the current image, selection, Full Sequence, or Automatic
Range.
Destination format: The
output format. Select from the list.
Automatic Range parameters
Mode: Frame
count or timestamp.
Number of frames before / after:
Leading and trailing frames to include.
Time length before / after (ms): Leading
9.23.5
and trailing length to include by timestamp value.
I/O Settings
The Settings > More > I/O options toggle the display of the Input Control and Output Control
panels in the docked IO Manager dialog.
See also “HOWTO Trigger a Software Event from an external input line (I/O Manager)”
on page 85.
NorPix Inc.
201
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Enable Input Control
When Enable Input Control is enabled, the IO Manager > Input Control docked dialog is
shown in each Workspace allowing you to monitor various input lines to trigger a
recording, add a marker, etc.
To create a new action, double-click on the [Add new event...] line. To edit or delete an
existing action, double-click on the line describing that action. In both cases, the Input
Action dialog opens.
Figure 9-25: Input Action dialog
The Input Action dialog fields are:
• Source: The general device name. All I/O devices detected by StreamPix are
shown in this list. A source can either be related to the grabber (i.e: frame grabber
with input lines), an external IO device, or a Virtual IO.
• Device: Where more than a single Source device exists, the device number.
Typically, the device number is 0 (the first one). If a Virtual IO was selected as
the source, the Device is automatically selected as Virtual IO.
• Line/Key: All available lines for the selected source are shown. Select the input
line to monitor.
• Polling delay: This is the interval at which the input line is polled. If the value is
too low, non-stop polling will be implemented, needlessly consuming system
resources. However, a very high value might miss an event. For instance, if the
input signal goes from level-low to level-high and back to level-low between two
polling actions, StreamPix 7 would not notice that an edge occurred.
NOTE:
202
Some devices use an interrupt, in which case the polling time is ignored. The
device interrupts the software when a line level change is detected. Interrupt
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
mode allows a faster response time since no polling is needed.
• Event: This is the event to monitor. The standard Level low, Level high, Rising
edge & Falling edge are available. Typically, the software monitors the voltage
on the input line. Input lines have 2 levels, low or high, i.e.: 0 or 1, physically
usually 0V versus 5V. A rising edge is a transition from 0 to 1, or 0V to 5V. When
a rising edge is required, the software waits for a transition from 0 to 5V, hence it
must read at least once a value of 0V then a value of 5V. A Level low detection
means that when reading the input line level, if the level is low the condition will
be immediately asserted as true. It will not wait until a level change.
• Action: This is the action to take once the event occurs. The available actions are:
- Start Recording to start recording
- Stop Recording to stop recording
- Toggle Recording starts recording if it is not currently recording and stops if it
is.
- Line Testing is a dummy action and does nothing unless it is used in combination with the Log Action described below to test the input lines.
- Trigger Pre/Post Event triggers an event when in Pre/Post Trigger mode.
- Set event marker sets a marker on the current frame.
- Take Reference Time. See “Edit Reference Time” on page 143.
- Clear Reference Time.
NOTE:
More actions will be added based on further developments and customer
requests.
• Target: Can either be Self to apply the action to the current Workspace only or All
Workspaces to broadcast the action to all Workspaces. All Workspaces allows you
to synchronize multiple Workspaces without having to configure their I/O
Manager panels separately.
• Event Name: Event name gives you the option to name a particular event rather
than use the default name made as the name of the device followed by the related
input line. For example, if the line is connected to a sensor that monitors a door,
the event name could be “Front door open”. The event name is used when the Set
Event Marker action is selected. It is not used otherwise.
• Log Action: If this is checked, each time the event is detected, StreamPix sends a
debug output to the system. The output can be displayed using Tools > Debug
Log. Use it with the “Line Testing” action to check that the lines are working
properly.
NorPix Inc.
203
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Select the Delete button to remove an existing action from the list. Select Cancel to abort
action editing. Select OK to accept changes made to an existing action or create a new
action.
Enable Output Control
When Enable Output Control is enabled, the IO Manager > Output Control docked dialog is
shown in each Workspace allowing you to send out signals in reaction to various events.
Double click on an event to modify it. The Output Action dialog opens.
Figure 9-26: Output Control Manager dialog
The Output Action dialog fields are:
• Source: The general device name. All I/O devices detected by StreamPix are
shown in this list. A source can either be related to the grabber (i.e: frame grabber
with input lines) or an external IO device.
• Device: Where more than a single Source device exists, the device number.
Typically, the device number is 0 (the first one).
• Line/Key: All available lines for the selected output are shown. Select the output
line to use.
• Source Event: Select the event which will trigger the output action.
• Output Action: Level High: when the output condition is reached, the specified
output line is set to a level high. Level Low: when the output condition is
reached, the specified output line will be set to a level low.
• Reset Mode: Select the output trigger reset mode. The choices are:
- Never: The output line level will be set to the pre-defined level and will hold
that state.
- Normal: The output line level will be set to the pre-defined level for a short
time and will return to the default initialization level.
- Auto-Reset: the line level will toggle to the default initialization level after a
user programmable delay. A pop up dialog to enter the delay value will open
when selecting this option.
204
NorPix Inc.
Managing Settings
- Toggle: When the condition is true, the output line will toggle its level (high to
low, or low to high).
• Event Name: Event name lets you name a particular event rather than use the
default name, which is the name of the device followed by the related output line.
• Log Action: If this is checked, each time the event is detected, StreamPix sends a
debug output to the system. The output can be displayed using Tools > Debug
Log. Use it with the “Line Testing” action to check that the lines are working
properly.
Select the Delete button to remove a selected existing action. Select Cancel to abort action
editing. Select OK to accept changes made to an existing action or to create a new action.
Event Markers
I/O markers are stored in an XML file with, for each event, in the following fields:
• Name: The name of the I/O event as named when the I/O was configured.
• Description: The event that occurred (rising edge, falling edge, etc) and the
device & line on which it occurred.
• FrameIndex: The index of the last frame to have been recorded when the event
occurred.
• Timestamp: The timestamp in seconds (in time_t format) of the last frame.
• TimestampMS: The millisecond part of the timestamps.
• TimeString: The timestamp, formatted in a readable string.
• Valid: 1 for valid, 0 for invalid. When loop recording, if a marked frame gets
overwritten, the associated event will still be kept but will be marked as invalid
because the related frame no longer exists.
NorPix Inc.
205
StreamPix 7 User Guide
206
NorPix Inc.
10
Tools
This chapter describes the following tools available in StreamPix 7:
•
10.1 Tools Menu
•
10.2 Command Line Arguments
•
10.3 SendRM Support
•
10.4 Time Stamp Corrector Utility
•
10.5 Time Source Admin utility
•
10.6 Editing StreamPix Scripts.
StreamPix 7 User Guide
10.1 Tools Menu
Recording Scheduler, see “Recording Manager Editor” on page 179.
10.1.1
Load/Save Configurations
All StreamPix settings are saved in the Windows Registry. When you save a configuration,
a Registry file (.reg) is created that holds all current content of the StreamPix registry
branch. The Save Configurations option can be used to save a specific setup to be reused
later, or to alternate between different setups.
Reloading a configuration requires a StreamPix restart. You will need Administrator
privileges, as Windows will ask for permission to write the file content to the Registry.
StreamPix can be started and forced to always load the same configuration file. See
“Command Line Arguments” on page 211.
10.1.2
Metadata Manager
The Metadata Manager toolbutton launches the NorPix Metadata Manager utility that
comes bundled with StreamPix 7. This tool is used to configure the metadata allocation in
Sequence files. You will need to restart StreamPix for the new settings to be applied.
208
NorPix Inc.
Tools
10.1.3
Disk Benchmarking
The Disk Benchmarking toolbutton launches the NorPix Disk Bench utility that comes
bundled with StreamPix 7. Use this tool to evaluate your system capacity for streaming
frames to the Sequence file format.
Figure 10-1: Disk Benchmark utility
To Evaluate System Capacity
1.
Select the Disk Benchmarking toolbutton. The utility dialog opens. See Figure 10-1.
2.
Select the drive(s) to test, and optionally the RAM.
3.
Specify either Test selected destinations simultaneously or sequentially.
4.
Set the File I/O configuration and Transfer sizes to test. If in doubt, accept the defaults.
5.
Set the Image Size and # of images to stream. If in doubt, accept the defaults.
6.
Select the Reports to generate.
7.
Select Run Test.
8.
The results are displayed in the utility dialog Log tab.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
Results provided with this utility should be considered as the best possible
case.
209
StreamPix 7 User Guide
10.1.4
Windows Task Manager
This launches the standard Windows Task Manager. The Performance tab can be used to
monitor CPU usage in order to analyze any frame drop that might occur.
10.1.5
Debug Log
The Debug Log allows you to see the internal status messages. This can be useful for
solving various types of crashes. For instance, if StreamPix 7 is unable to load the desired
grabber, reviewing the log as StreamPix 7 attempts to load the grabber might give an
indication about the cause of the problem.
10.1.6
Performance
Tools > Performance
shows an estimate of the:
• CPU Usage: as a percentage used by StreamPix 7 of overall capability.
• Memory Usage: Memory used by StreamPix 7 as a percentage of memory
available for this process.
• Network Usage: as a percentage of capability used by StreamPix 7 when
communicating with StreamPix Remote.
210
NorPix Inc.
Tools
10.2 Command Line Arguments
StreamPix 7 supports a few command line arguments.
StreamPix6.exe -r
Starts a recording as soon as StreamPix finishes launching. If all Workspaces were
selected last time StreamPix 7 was closed, every Workspace will start recording.
Configure StreamPix Settings > Recording and Auto Naming settings to setup the
destination files.
StreamPix6.exe -config "C:\Users\User\Documents\StreamPix6\Configurations\config.reg"
Will overwrite the current configuration with the configuration in the specified file. You
can save your current configuration from Tools > Save Configuration.
StreamPix6.exe "C:\temp\sequence.seq"
Will load the specified sequence file in a temporary workspace.
10.2.1
AudioExport.exe utility
AudioExport.exe is a command line utility to export an .AUD file to either .MP3 or .AAC
compressed audio file. It supports any bitrate, and up to 2 channels (stereo). When
exporting to MP3, the maximum input bit rate is CD quality, 44.1kHz.
**************************
AAC and MP3 audio Export
Copyright 2014 (C) NorPix inc.
**************************
Syntax
Audio2Mpa -X -Y -Z
-i Input wave file. Ex : -i "c:\Program Files\test\audio.wav
-o Output audio file name. Ex : -o c:\test\audio_out
-aac Output aac audio.
-mp3 Output mp3 audio(default).
-b Bitrate. default 128000
-d Printout audio file header and content infomation (informative only,
input file only).
NorPix Inc.
211
StreamPix 7 User Guide
-co Specify the number of audio track in the destination file.
If it is Specified, -ch# ## must also be defined.
-ch# ##: Specify the audio track mapping: # input track position, ## output
track position.
212
NorPix Inc.
Tools
10.3 SendRM Support
SendRM.exe (Send Registered Message) is a command line application that allows you to
send registered messages to any application.
The command line syntax is: SendRM “Window Name” “Message”
The first parameter of the SendRM is the Windows title of the application which will
receive the message. SendRM must use the windows title of the StreamPix 7 instance that
is currently running, either “StreamPix 7 Single-Camera”, or “StreamPix 7 Multi-camera”.
StreamPix 7 is able to process external messages that will start recordings, stop
recordings, etc. More messages will be added with time and as users request.
You can call SendRM directly from the command line, the "Run" prompt, the Windows
Scheduler, etc.
NOTE:
StreamPix 7 must be running at the time the messages are sent.
Here is the syntax for StreamPix 7 Multi-camera messages currently supported.
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "WM_CLOSE"
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_START_RECORDING"
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_STOP_RECORDING"
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_SNAP_FRAME"
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_SAVE_AND_CLOSE"
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "WM_COPYDATA" "..."
The following commands can be used to change camera settings:
Here is some C++/Win32 code in case you want send messages directly from your
application.
HWND targetWindow = FindWindow(NULL, _T("StreamPix 7"));
if(targetWindow)
{//Do a snap in workspace 3
UINT registeredMessage =
RegisterWindowMessage(_T("STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_SNAP_FRAME"));
SendMessage(targetWindow, registeredMessage, 3, NULL);
}
NorPix Inc.
213
StreamPix 7 User Guide
STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_START_RECORDING, STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_STOP_RECORDING and
STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_SNAP_FRAME also has an optional argument identifying the
target workspace index. For example, this command will start the recording
in the third workspace:
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "STREAMPIX_MESSAGE_START_RECORDING" 3
The WM_COPYDATA is used for more complex messages. Its string consists of several
values, separated by the # character.
Here are the supported commands and their syntax. NorPix can add more commands on
request.
10.3.1
Recording Format
Syntax:
#recording_format#(ID)#
The format parameter specifies the target format. Use this table to find the desired format
value.
Format
ID for StreamPix 32-bit
ID for StreamPix64-bit
Sequence on disk
0
0
Sequence in RAM
1
1
AVI
2
2
MOV
3
(Not available)
BMP
4
3
JPG
5
4
TIFF
6
5
PNG
7
6
FITS
8
7
JPEG 2K
9
8
DPX
10
9
Table 10-1: Recording Formats IDs
Example:
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "WM_COPYDATA" #recording_format#3#
214
NorPix Inc.
Tools
10.3.2
Grabber Adjustments
Grabber Adjustments change a specific value for a grabber adjustment. You can see the
list of every adjustment supported by the grabber by clicking on the [Adjustments] button
in the grabber Docked Dialog.
The first syntax example sends the command to every Workspace. The second form sends
the command to a specific Workspace.
Syntax:
#grabber_adjustment#(AdjustmentName)#(value)#
or
#grabber_adjustment#(AdjustmentName)#(value)#(Workspace Name)#
Example:
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7" "WM_COPYDATA" #grabber_adjustment#Frame rate#10.0#
Will set the frame rate of the virtual grabbers in every workspace to 10 fps. (works
because the virtual grabber has an adjustment named "Frame rate").
10.3.3
Grabber Settings
Grabber settings use a similar syntax to Grabber Adjustments.
Syntax:
#grabber_setting#Format#BGR#
Or
#grabber_setting#Format#BGR#Workspace1#
10.3.4
Export Full Sequence
Syntax:
#export_full#(ID)#
#export_full#(ID)#Workspace1#
#export_full_to#(ID)#Workspace1#FilePath#
The first does an "export full sequence" on every Workspace.
The second does an "export full sequence" on a specific Workspace only.
The third one does an "export full sequence" on a specific Workspace using the provided
file path as the target destination.
NorPix Inc.
215
StreamPix 7 User Guide
The (ID) parameter specifies the target format. Use the following table to find the desired
format value.
0 = Project (StreamPix Studio Only) NOTE: Obsoleted in StreamPix 7.
1 = Seq
2 = Avi
3 = Mov (StreamPix 32-bit only)
4 = Bmp
5 = Jpeg
6 = Png
7 = Tiff
8 = Dpx
9 = Fits
10 = JP2K
11 = Dng
12 = JpegXR
Example:
SendRM.exe "StreamPix 7 Multi-camera" "WM_COPYDATA" #export_full#2#
216
NorPix Inc.
Tools
10.4 Time Stamp Corrector Utility
This utility can be used to fix possible corrupted or incorrect time stamp on a sequence
file. It updates some information in the file header as well as fixing each frame time stamp
information.
For example, this utility could be used to fix backward time stamping created when using
a GPS time source and travelling west to east in between time zones while recording
images. At some point, when recording with local time zone settings, time will change
backwards.
This command line utility sets the sequence file header frame rate to a value of your
choice, reads the time stamp for the first frame and calculates from there the time stamp
for each following frame based on the set frame rate. It will replace broken or corrupted
time stamps with the calculated one based on the specified frame rate.
Syntax
> tscorrector
-i -r
-i Input sequence file full path name. Ex : -I "c:\test\sequence.seq"
-r Frame rate for Input sequence. Ex for 29.97 fps: -r 2997
For example:
tscorrector
NorPix Inc.
-i E:\test.seq -r 4000
NOTE:
If the acquisition frame rate is not constant, this utility will not fix time stamps
properly.
NOTE:
This utility does not currently support compressed sequences.
217
StreamPix 7 User Guide
10.5 Time Source Admin utility
The Time Source Admin utility (found at C:\Program Files\Common
Files\NorPix\TimeSourceAdmin.exe) allows selecting the source for:
• LTC time source when using audio input
• GPS configuration when using a GPS device as a time source,
Figure 10-2: Time Source Admin utility dialog
218
NorPix Inc.
Tools
10.6 Editing StreamPix Scripts
Caution: Editing StreamPix 7 internal scripts will change StreamPix 7 behavior and is
reserved for very specific cases.
FOR EXPERIENCED USERS ONLY
Tools > Script Engine > Reload Saved Scripts: Loads
the most recently saved scripts from
the registry (if any).
Tools > Script Engine > Save Current Scripts: Saves the current scripts, including any
modification to the scripts made from Edit StreamPix Scripts. The saved script can then be
reloaded from Reload Saved Scripts or using the Tools > StreamPix Settings > Session >
Reload Scripts option.
Tools > Script Engine > Edit Scripts:
Lets you edit the internal StreamPix 7 scripts.
StreamPix 7 scripts control the internal StreamPix 7 workflow and the interaction between
StreamPix 7 and any loaded plugin modules. This is the main dialog used to browse and
edit events by Workspace. Each workspace has at least one module, the StreamPixCore
module, and may include additional modules if any plugins have been loaded in it.
Once a Workspace and sub-module are selected, the list box in the middle of the dialog
will show all events for the module.
Clicking on an event displays detailed information in the Event Description box and also
lists all parameters available to the submodule.
You can save your current scripts with Tools > Save Current Scripts. Next time you launch
StreamPix 7, reload them using Tools > Reload Saved Scripts.
When an event is selected, the bottom box shows what actions are taken when it is called,
each line of a script calling a specific command. Using the buttons to customize the script
for an event:
• Insert New Command: Will make the Select a command dialog pop-up. The
selected command is automatically appended at the end of the script.
• Remove Command: This will remove the currently selected command.
• Reset to Default: Should an event differ from its original behavior, clicking on
this button will reset it to the default script.
• Move Up / Move Down: Use this to change the order in which commands are called
when the event occurs.
• Indent Command / Unindent Command: If one of the commands is a conditional
statement, the line(s) that are indented below it will be called if the parameter
becomes true. When the parameter is false, the script will simply jump to the next
NorPix Inc.
219
StreamPix 7 User Guide
unindented line. Thus, indenting a script command line will make it conditional
to its related event.
Double-clicking on a script line shows the current script command and its parameters.
This dialog allows you to select a command to add to the script of the event selected in the
Customize StreamPix dialog. Normally, the command should only be chosen from the
commands available to a module of the current workspace. It is possible to select a
command from another Workspace, although it will fail if the other Workspace is not
loaded.
Selecting a command from the list will show the command description along with the
parameters required by the command. Once a command is selected, select Insert New
Command.
dialog allows you to allocate parameters for the command. A
description of the parameter in the dialog title and a list of the variables compatible with it
is displayed. Selecting a variable will also display a description of its contents.
Select a command
The Local Variables tab displays the list of compatible variables local to the event, which
are only accessible while the event is being executed. Clicking on the Global Variables
will display variables that are always available, regardless of what event is being called.
Finally, the User-creates Variables panel is used to create your own variable, for example:
a constant for a function that requires a numerical value. Such as ScriptControl's “Sleep”
command.
This dialog works in the same way as the Local Variables tab, displaying the compatible
variables available on a global scale and not only for a specific event. The Workspace and
Module drop-down lists allow to access the global variables of any loaded workspace.
This dialog is similar to the last two. You can select an existing variable or create a new
one, edit its value or delete it. Not all types of variable can be user-created. For example,
the VarImage can't be user-created. However, VarBool and VarUINT can. If the buttons
are disabled, then the requested type can't be created.
220
NorPix Inc.
A
Plugin Modules
This appendix lists the available StreamPix 7 modules. StreamPix 7 modules are
divided into two groups:
•
Free Modules, which contain plugins available to any StreamPix 7 user
•
Premium modules, which require a specific license from NorPix Inc.
All modules are a part of StreamPix 7. If a module is unavailable to you, it is
because your system lacks the specific license. Contact NorPix Technical Support
for authorization.
This Appendix contains the following sections:
•
A.1. Loading & Unloading Plugin Modules
•
A.2. Free Modules
•
A.3. Premium Modules
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.1 Loading & Unloading Plugin Modules
This docked dialog is used to load and unload external modules named or plugins.
Figure 1-1: External Modules dialog box
Captured or playback images can be processed by modules. Various processing is applied,
depending on the module.
If multiple modules are loaded simultaneously, it is important to understand that images
will go through each module sequentially. The module order may have some importance,
for example, you may want to apply an image rotation before adding a text overlay.
A module can be loaded multiple times. For instance to apply 2 text areas, load the module
twice.
To load a plugin:
1.
Select a plugin from the Available list on the left and click on Load.
The module is added to the Active list on the right.
To unload a plugin:
1.
222
To close an external module, select its entry in the Active list and click Unload.
TIP:
Double-clicking also works to load/unload.
TIP:
The two buttons at the bottom allow you to load/unload a module to/from all
Workspaces in a single click.
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.2 Free Modules
A.2.1
AEC Control
The AEC Control Module (AEC LTC time code generator or reader) provides the ability
to configure and control an AEC (Adrienne Electronics Corporation) time code generator
board. The module can also be used to read and display the current time code from a board
that doesn't have time code generation capability.
The time code reader is enabled automatically each time the module is loaded. The current
time code is displayed in the Reader field along with Drop Frame (DF) state, as shown
below.
Figure 1-2: AEC Control dialog box
To enable the time code generator, select the Enable LTC Generator check box. Generated
time code is displayed in the Time field along with Drop Frame (DF) state. The time code
generator can be configured to:
• Generate a NTSC (with or without frame drop), PAL or FILM time code
• Start from a specified time (using computer clock)
• Reset time.
To run the time code generator, select the START button. To turn it off, select the STOP
button, as shown below. To leave the time code running but temporary disable the output
select Disable Output.
Figure 1-3: AEC Control dialog box usage
The Model status box on the bottom of the module window displays information about the
AEC hardware and driver version.
NorPix Inc.
223
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.2.2
Auto Gain Exposure Iris
The Auto Gain Exposure Iris module monitors image grey level intensity and compares it
to your defined target value. It then tries to adjust camera gain and/or exposure and/or iris
(if available) to maintain the image grey average level within the target value.
Figure 1-4: Auto Gain Exposure Iris dialog
Gain and Exposure changes increase or decrease by automatically calculated step values
(Default Step).
Sometime, on cameras with a very wide range of gain or exposure, the auto calculated step
is too large and prevents the algorithm from convergence. In which case, you can
overwrite the step value by entering a different (typically smaller) step value.
The module gives priority to gain, then exposure, and finally the iris. Minimum and
maximum gain and exposure ranges can be set, to keep things within values.
This module requires incoming frames to be able to operate. On cameras with a low frame
rate, the response time for the module may be slow, since it needs new frames to perform
its calculations.
A.2.3
Basler Camera Link
This module allows accessing and controlling Basler Camera Link based camera
parameters. The camera must be GenIcam compatible. Parameters such as exposure time,
gain, trigger mode can be adjusted. In order for the module to be loaded, the latest Basler
Pylon driver and viewer must be installed.
The module can control a single camera, or if multiple Basler cameras are connected, the
same command can be set simultaneously to all connected cameras.
224
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.2.4
BIRGER Control
The BIRGER Control Module allows lens control via a BIRGER unit.
Adjustments Tab
Figure 1-5: Birger Adjustments tab
This page allows changing the focus and the aperture. Also, you can save/load focus and
aperture presets. When the zoom changes, the aperture and aperture range values are
updated. Also, when the focus changes, the focal distance is updated.
Auto Update Lens Status
You can enable or disable auto updates on the lens status. Monitoring the lens status
requires sending and receiving status information to the lens control unit, which adds
traffic between the computer and the camera. Under certain conditions, this added traffic
can lead to dropped frames. In which case, it is highly recommended to disable the
continuous status update. When status is needed, select Read Lens Status to retrieve
current lens parameters.
NorPix Inc.
225
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Settings Tab
Figure 1-6: Birger Settings tab
This tab is used to set up the communication with the BIRGER unit. If the unit is
connected directly to the camera, the Grabber Interface should be used. For this, the serial
communication should be already set up in the camera settings. If the unit is connected to
a COM port, then the Serial COM option should be selected. If the module established a
successful connection, it will display some information about the lens and the BIRGER
unit.
A.2.5
Bitmap Overlay
The Bitmap Overlay Module provides the ability to “burn” a bitmap file (*.bmp) into each
captured image. It supports all bitmap file formats (monochrome, 16 color, 256 color, 24bit color). The bitmap file can be applied to all StreamPix 7 supported image formats. The
Bitmap Overlay Module can be used, for instance, when some constant information needs
to be applied on images, such as a logo or reticule.
General Tab
Figure 1-7: Bitmap Overlay tab
This includes general settings for the module.
• Bitmap: Specify the bitmap File to be used.
• Burn to Image on Capture: Bitmap is burned in place of image pixels for each
image at capture time.
• Burn to Image on Export: Bitmap is burned in place of image pixels for each
image while exporting.
226
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
Generally, it is not necessary to check both options. For instance, if Burn to Image On
Capture is selected, the resulting image will include the bitmap. Upon export, there is no
need to re-process the images again.
Color & Position Tab
Figure 1-8: Bitmap Color and Position tab
This tab can be used to define the transparency color as well as the position where the
bitmap will be burned to the image.
• Transparency: All .bmp files must include either a white or black background
color. That background color is used as a transparency color to display normal
image pixels. All the colors, except the transparency color in the bitmap, will be
displayed in the captured image.
• Change Display Color for Binary bitmap: Set display color for binary bitmap.
• Position: Select a position to overlay the bitmap on the captured image.
A.2.6
Crosshair
The crosshair module allows you to burn a crosshair on your images.
Figure 1-9: Crosshair module
Draw Crosshair...
This section determines when the crosshair burning happens.
• At grab level the crosshair will be written on the images as soon as they are
received from the camera.
• On displayed frames will show the crosshair on image received from the camera
but after any saving process occurs. It will also show a crosshair on images read
from a sequence file.
NorPix Inc.
227
StreamPix 7 User Guide
• On exported frames applies the crosshair to any images exported from a
sequence, regardless of the destination format (seq, avi, bmp, jpg, etc.)
Crosshair
Crosshair shows
the current X and Y pixel coordinates of the crosshair in the image.
To move the crosshair, enter in new values, or use the mouse to place the crosshair on the
current image by left-clicking anywhere on it (dragging is also supported).
NOTE:
Moving the crosshair with the mouse cannot be done while in multi-display
mode.
Selecting Lock Position will prevent accidentally changing the crosshair position. While
locked, mouse control of the crosshair is disabled and the X and Y boxes are read-only.
The Size is the number of pixels shown on each side of the center pixel. For example,
selecting 5 will result in a crosshair made of two 11-pixel lines. Thickness allows you to
change the crosshair thickness, as specified in pixels.
Crosshair Color
Center
lets you to change the color of the crosshair. Default color is grey.
moves the crosshair position to the exact center of the current image.
To burn the Crosshair pixel coordinates:
NOTE:
The coordinates are shown as an (X,Y) string.
1.
Select the coordinates Position on the image. Choose from: None, Topleft, Top, Topright, Bottom-left, Bottom, Bottom-right.
2.
Select the overlay colors: Text for the text color, Background for the text background
color. If the text background color is the same as the text color, no background color
will be used resulting in a transparent background.
3.
Select the “Font” and “Font Size” to use to draw the string. For best results, use fixed
width fonts such as Terminal or Courier.
Broadcast
If Broadcast crosshair position changes to other workspaces is checked, changing the
crosshair position in this workspace will also change the crosshair position in every other
workspace which also has the crosshair module loaded.
228
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
Selecting Broadcast settings changes to the other workspaces will broadcast any changes
made to the module settings (with the exception of the crosshair position) to every other
workspace which also has the crosshair module loaded.
A.2.7
Command Line
The Command Line module allows you to trigger external commands when a given event
happens in StreamPix. The module displays a list of every event available to which the
module can react.
Figure 1-10: Command Line module
Select an event from the list and then type a line to be executed in the Command field. If
the Asynchronous checkbox is checked, the command execution will be done in parallel.
If the box is unchecked, the Workspace will wait for the command execution to complete
before going on.
WARNING: When not in Asynchronous mode, StreamPix may drop frames while recording if
the response and execution times are significant.
Select Apply to save and enable the currently selected event. Select Clear to disable the
currently selected event.
The Command Line module is mostly intended to trigger .exe, bat or similar files.
However, any type of file is supported. Command line parameters are also supported.
Don't forget to use the complete file path (not just a file name) and use "" to enclose the
path if there are any spaces in it.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
Make sure your Command runs correctly if pasted in a DOS command
prompt (cmd).
229
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.2.8
Comment overlay
The Comment Overlay Module allows users to overlay or burn directly to the image data
multiple lines of text. The module settings are performed via 2 separate tabs described
below.
General Tab.
Figure 1-11: Comment Overlay module
This includes general settings for the module.
• Overlay: text is overlaid within the image viewer area.
• Burn to Image on Capture: text is burned in place of image pixels for each image
at capture time.
• Burn to Image on Export: text is burned in place of image pixels for each image
while exporting.
• Comment: Type multi-line text to be overlaid or burned.
Font & Position Tab
This tab can be used to adjust font and position for comments in an image.
Figure 1-12: Comment Position
The font and position rendering may be different for overlay mode versus burn mode:
• Overlay mode: font and position are applied only on the final image render bitmap
for display. Hence, zoom factor has no effect.
• Burn to image: font and position are applied directly to the image pixels. Hence,
zoom factor applied for display purpose may change the way the image and text
are rendered.
The Font & Position tab contains the following fields:
230
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
• Font: Select what font to use.
• Size: Select what font size to use.
• Overlay Position (OffsetX and offsetY): Set where to overlay Text.
• Change Font Color: Set overlay text color.
• Change background Color: Set overlay text background cover.
A.2.9
Compression Estimator
This module can be used to tweak image compression parameters in StreamPix Settings |
Sequence.
Figure 1-13: Compression Estimator module
When analyzing frames, the module uses StreamPix current compression settings
(StreamPix Settings | Sequence | Compression for new sequence). It then reports the
following:
• The size of resulted compressed image
• The number of frames per second that can be compressed
• An estimated compression factor (ratio between the compressed size versus the
full uncompressed image size).
• For JPEG compression, it reports the average size in bytes of each compressed
frame.
• For H.264 compression, it reports the average size in bytes for each Group Of
Frames (GOP). Typically a GOP contains 30 frames.
This tool is useful to determine the needed buffer size when doing loop recording into a
Sequence file. During loop recording, the ring image buffers will be over-written during
the loop process. Choosing a buffer size too short will not allow the software to store all
the frames as compressed frames may be too large to be stored in place.
Select Start to begin analyzing incoming frames.
Select Update StreamPix Settings once the analysis is done to see the recommended values
to be used for updating StreamPix current compression settings (StreamPix Settings >
Sequence > Compression for new sequence).
NorPix Inc.
231
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.2.10
Exposure Time Reader
The Exposure Time Reader module can be used to read the current exposure time value
directly from the camera registers and display it in the image as a text overlay message.
Figure 1-14: Exposure Time Reader
In order to use the module, the related camera must include an exposure register which is
accessible from StreamPix 7 Home > Hardware Properties dialog.
Exposure time values can be displayed on Live and/or Playback streams and can become a
permanent part of the images or stored in a .CSV file. Text overlay settings (font, position,
background color) are also configurable.
NOTE:
A.2.11
Upon receiving an image from the camera, the module reads the current
camera exposure value and overwrites the first 4 pixels of the image with the
binary coded value of the exposure.
File Automatic Deletion
The File Automatic Deletion module can automatically delete old files, making it a great
tool for unattended systems, where disk space must be monitored and maintained properly.
The module monitors a predefined computer file folder. Two criteria are used to monitor
disk space and delete outdated files:
• A maximum number of files can be defined (oldest file is deleted).
• A Time out (in hours) can be defined so that all older files will be removed.
Figure 1-15: File Automatic Deletion module
The File Automatic Deletion dialog box contains the following fields:
232
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
• Folder to Manage: The folder that will be monitored.
• Deletion Rule: The operating mode for removing old files:
• Time Out: Delete files older than “XXX” Hours.
• Number of file: Delete oldest file to keep only latest “XXX” Files.
• File Type: File type to monitor. It is possible to specify a file type extension to be
monitored.
- Sequence: Sequence file only
- Movies: .avi or .mov
- All Files: any files.
A.2.12
Focus Assist
The Focus Assist module provides a quick means to adjust focus. A red curve appears on
the image upon loading the module.
The line represents the average sharpness per pixel column. A flat line means the image is
out of focus. A line marked with spikes means the image is in focus. Adjust the camera
focus to have the steepest spikes:
Figure 1-16: Focus Assist image
An ROI can increase efficiency. The ROI can be set either manually, through the ROI
Define field, or using the Interactively click and drag to define ROI button.
Figure 1-17: Focus Assist dialog
NorPix Inc.
233
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.2.13
Histogram
This module computes the image histogram in real time. It supports monochrome, raw
Bayer and color image format.
• For monochrome and raw Bayer images, only the red channel is relevant.
• For color images, the red, green and blue channels are calculated.
The X-axis represents the intensity of each channel while the Y-axis shows the percentage
of pixels in the image that have this intensity.
The Histogram module works on images, live stream, or a sequence.
Figure 1-18: Histogram module
Histogram > Settings
lets you:
• Display only specific channels (ex: only green).
• Show the histogram as a series of lines or a bar graph.
• Ignore extreme intensities.
• Plot the histogram using a logarithmic vertical scale.
• Plot only within a specific intensity range for better rendering.
The histogram is a powerful tool to adjust the brightness, contrast, offset, gain or exposure
of the image to help obtain the best image quality for post-processing.
TIP:
234
To conserve CPU resources for time-critical operations, unload the Histogram
plugin when recording.
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.2.14
GRT Header Data
This module displays in real time the header data captured via Great River Technology
Matrix frame grabber.
Header data are transmitted along with the images.
This module supports various display templates, depending on the header format
transmitted with the images.
To select the template, browse the header format file template (.hfd extension) needed.
Press the Show Header Data button, which opens a dialog that displays the header data
according the template format.
Figure 1-19: GRT Header Data module
A.2.15
IDT Mx Camera Control Tool
This module allows you to control and adjust some of the most important IDT M3 camera
features by sending specific commands to the camera using the MVX SDK, the camera
API. Therefore, before loading the module, the communication with the camera must be
set up properly and tested in the MVX Control application. For this module, the frame
grabber that connects to the IDT M3 camera must disable the serial communication.
Otherwise, the module will not be able to connect to the communication port.
Figure 1-20: IDT Mx Camera Control module
The Image page of the interface lets you adjust the ROI (on X only), Sync In, Gain,
Exposure Time, Frame Rate. Setting the ROI defines a new range for available frame
rates. Changing the Frame Rate sets a new range for available shutter times.
NorPix Inc.
235
StreamPix 7 User Guide
The Settings page allows you to open the camera you want to use. The available cameras
are displayed in the list only after choosing the proper Baud Rate. Then, select the camera
and press Open camera.
NOTE:
A.2.16
When the camera is configured in 10 taps, use the STP4Admin application
(found in the same folder as StreamPix.exe) to set the IDT M3 Control Tool
module: 10 taps mode setting to Yes.
Image Alpha Blending
The Image Alpha Blending module is used to blend the image from the current workspace
with either:
A. The image from a secondary workspace,
or,
B. A reference frame from the current workspace.
When the first option is used, the secondary workspace has to be loaded before the Image
Alpha Blending module. The secondary workspace can then be selected from the drop
down list.
Figure 1-21: Image Alpha Blending module
When the second option is used, a reference frame is taken from the current workspace by
default when the module is loaded, if there is a live image. The reference frame can be
changed at any time by selecting the Take Reference button.
The level of blending transparency can be adjusted between 0 and 100 percent.
The current blended image can be saved as a JPEG using the Save to JPEG button. There is
also an info field that indicates the status of the file saving.
NOTE:
236
For now only monochrome and BGR packed image formats are supported.
Contact Norpix technical support if other image formats are needed.
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.2.17
Image Resize And Crop
The Image Resize And Crop module provides the ability to resize or crop the images from a
camera to any desired size. This module is not supported in StreamPix 7 single camera
version.
The module needs to be loaded into a separate workspace, since it produces a different
image stream. It can be used while recording or during live display.
TIP:
To crop or resize a Sequence, use the Batch Processor utility.
Figure 1-22: Resize and Crop module
• Source: Enter the Workspace name from the corresponding video stream you
want to resize.
• Interpolation: Select the interpolation scheme to use when resizing. Schemes are
sorted by inverted speed and quality. Nearest Neighbor is the fastest algorithm,
lowest quality.
• Full Image: Check if you want to resize the complete source image.
• Keep aspect ratio: Check if you want the maintain the original image aspect ratio.
• Source ROI: The Full Image box must be unchecked to define a Source ROI. This
can be used to crop an original image.
• Destination Size: Allows to set the destination image size.
• The Apply button instantly apply the ROI changes to the destination resized
images.
• The Start button enable the resizing process.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
When resizing a raw Bayer image, the Bayer interpolation will be applied
before the resizing to make sure the bayer pattern is not damaged during the
resizing process. Also the image will be converter to color BGR 24 bit. Bayer
settings are applied according the current workspace settings. Click the Start/
Stop button to get the parameter reloaded.
237
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.2.18
Image Rolling Averaging
The Image Rolling Averaging module can be applied on live captured frames from a
camera or grabber device. It supports all image formats with the exception of pixel pack,
BGR555 and 565.
The module can be used 2 ways:
• Rolling average mode: When loaded in the same Workspace as the grabber
device, the calculations are performed and applied “in place” to the images
received from the grabber device. A rolling average is performed over the
specific number of frames received last. The input and output frame rate are
identical.
• When the module is loaded into a separate Workspace than the grabber device,
the operating mode can either be a rolling average or a standard frame averaging.
In standard frame averaging mode, the output frame rate is the input rate divided
by the number of frames to be averaged.
Figure 1-23: Image Rolling Average module
• Workspace: The Workspace of the video source or grabber device from where the
image will be processed.
• Number of frames to average: The depth size for the averaging calculation.
• Mode: The available mode are automatically determined by the module,
depending on its loading context.
• Clear Buffers: Empty the average buffer. Any accumulated frames are lost.
During rolling average, output frames are unchanged until the module average buffer is
filled.
A.2.19
Image Rotation
This module can be used to rotate the image shown in the display area in real time. Pixels
in the destination image that do not have any corresponding pixels in the source image are
zeroed. Rotated pixels that do not fit in the destination image are clipped.
The module has the following parameters:
• X and Y Position of the center of rotation point (COR). The COR can be defined
outside of the image boundary. By default, COR is the image center point.
• Rotation angle, from 0 to 360 degrees, with decimal increments.
238
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
• Destination image size: The rotated image can keep the same image size as the
source, or you can specify the X and Y size. Useful for 90 degree rotation. By
default, image size is identical.
• Interpolation algorithm: Nearest pixel (faster), bilinear or bicubic (slower, more
CPU intensive).
• Because edges are typically degraded during image rotation, one can enable edge
smoothing.
• By default, the module uses the camera/grabber as the image source, but can be
configured to perform a rotation using a source image, a playback sequence, or a
displayed image.
Most image formats are supported with the exception of all compressed image formats and
pixel packed image formats as well as a few color image formats such as RGB555 and
RGB565.
A.2.20
JVC Image Splitter
The JVC Image Splitter module has been ported from StreamPix 3.n. The JVC camera has
2 modes of operation when outputting video:
• 640x480 @ 30 fps
• 320x240 @ 120 fps.
The [email protected] is a custom output: 4 images 320x240 packed together into a 2x2
quadrant delivering a 640x480 images @ 30 fps. The module splits the four quadrant
images from the 640x480 into four 320x240 images, making it 120 fps. This module
works only for color RGB24-bit format.
A.2.21
Kinect
The Kinect for Windows sensor includes cameras that deliver depth information, color
data, and skeleton tracking data.
The Kinect module is designed for Kinect for Windows devices (Kinect for XBOX360
devices are not supported) and renders depth, video and skeleton data, presenting the
result as image overlay. It can be configured to trigger various actions in StreamPix, based
on data received from the Depth stream..
Figure 1-24: Kinect module
NorPix Inc.
239
StreamPix 7 User Guide
When you load the module, you can see the following:
• Red-green-blue (RGB) color image from the Kinect sensor, if the color stream is
selected in current Workspace.
• Background in gray scale and different people in different colors, if the depth
stream is selected in current Workspace. Darker colors indicate objects that are
farther from the camera.
• Tracked skeletons of up to two people who have been detected within the frame.
If moving figures are too close to the camera, unreliable or odd images might appear in the
skeleton and depth views. The optimal range is 2.6 to 13.12 feet (0.8 to 4 meters). The
module detects people only if the entire body fits within the captured frame.
NOTE:
Enabling any image processing on a Depth stream image will alter depth
information as each pixel within the image contains depth data.
The following events can be detected on the color stream:
• On Skeleton Detected - when Kinect starts tracking at least one skeleton
• On Skeleton Lost - when Kinect stops tracking all skeletons
The following events can be detected on the depth stream:
• On Skeleton Detected - when Kinect starts tracking at least one skeleton
• On Skeleton Lost - when Kinect stops tracking all skeletons
• On Distance Closer Than - when depth is less than a certain value
• On Distance Farther Than - when depth is greater than a certain value
• On Distance Within - when depth is within a certain range
The following actions can be triggered:
• None (testing mode) - outputs a message in debug log
• Start Recording - starts recording if possible
• Stop Recording - stops recording if possible
• Pre/Post - triggers a Pre/Post event (to be used with the Pre/Post module)
• Mark Frame - marks current frame
• Set Reference Time - sets current time as “reference time”
Additionally the module provides the ability to display some useful data as an image
overlay:
• Tracking Skeleton - shows current tracking state
240
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
• Color Timestamp - shows current Color frame timestamp
• Depth Timestamp - shows current Depth frame timestamp
• Skeleton Timestamp - shows current Skeleton frame timestamp
• Closest/Farthest Depth - show the minimum and maximum depth values within a
frame for all tracked skeletons.
For a complete documentation for the Kinect for Windows device, visit
http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/kinectforwindows/
A.2.22
Image Statistics
The Image Statistics module shows the Minimum, Mean, and Maximum per image
channel in real time. The Settings tab lets you display the statistics, including Standard
Deviation, as an image overlay. The ROI lets you retrieve statistics for an ROI by either
entering the coordinates or by clicking and dragging in the image. The Font & Position tab
lets you define the appearance of the overlay.
Figure 1-25: Image Statistics module
The module can be applied to a Live display, a Sequence, or to an image. When applied to
a Live display and then recorded, the overlay information is saved in the Sequence.
Once the module is loaded, the docked dialog stays open until unloaded. If the minimum
and maximum for one channel reads as 0 or 255, this could mean that one or more pixels
of the image are underexposed or saturated.
The module usefulness is reduced when working with a high-contrast image and, as the
color levels are remapped for each image, it should be unloaded to lower CPU usage.
A.2.23
Lens Control
The Lens Control module allows controlling some lens parameters as Iris, Focus and
Zoom. The sent command will execute the function for the value of the Duration
adjustment. Only one command can be sent at a time.
NorPix Inc.
241
StreamPix 7 User Guide
NOTE:
A.2.24
The module is supported only for some AVT Prosilica GigE, GigE Vision
compatible, and Dalsa Genie TS, Pleora eBUS driver interface, and Matrix
Vision cameras.
Live Levels
The Live Levels histogram monitors every frame captured by the grabber, computes the
grey level averages and plots them in real time. The radio boxes enable selection of the
histogram display, either in the docked dialog, in a new display in the Workspace, or both.
Figure 1-26: Live Levels module
TIP:
A.2.25
Use a multi-display configuration with the Show in a Display to allow viewing
of the image and histogram at the same time.
LTC Overlay
The LTC Overlay module shows the LTC value stored in the first 32 bits of each image
(requires an supported LTC source device). The module has no docked dialog when
loaded. However, it has a few settings that can be changed through the STP4Admin
application (found in the same folder as StreamPix.exe).
The settings are: “LTC Overlay Module show frame number” and “LTC Overlay Module
font size”.
A.2.26
Lynx IPX Camera Control
This module allows you to control and adjust the Shutter Time (also known as exposure
time), Gain and Frame Rate of some Lynx ImperX cameras by sending specific commands
242
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
via serial communication. An ImperX camera must be loaded and the serial
communication must be enabled before loading the module into the current Workspace.
Figure 1-27: Lynx IPX Camera Control
Optionally, the exposure time reader can be used to read the current exposure time value
directly from the camera and display it as an image overlay. Exposure time values can be
shown on Live and/or Playback streams with the possibility to permanently write the
values on the images or store them in a .CSV file.
Text overlay settings (font, position, background color) are also configurable.
A.2.27
Matrix Switch
The Matrix Switch module allows you to program a Smart-AVI 4x4 DVI Router device to
work on two different modes:
• Capture mode:
- Set video INPUT1 to OUTPUT1 and OUTPUT3
- Set video INPUT2 to OUTPUT2 and OUTPUT4
• Playback mode:
- Set video INPUT3 to OUTPUT3
- Set video INPUT4 to OUTPUT4.
NOTE:
A.2.28
another DVI matrix configuration can be added at the user's request.
Metadata Overlay
The Metadata Overlay module can be used to display the metadata of an image as a string
overlaid on the image. The first tab allows you to set which metadata types to display, if
NorPix Inc.
243
StreamPix 7 User Guide
present. Some metadata types might not show if they can't be represented as a string (i.e.
some metadata are stored in binary formats).
Figure 1-28: Metadata Overlay module
The Overlay tab is used to tell the module at which point(s) the metadata strings should be
burned on the image.
The second tab allows you to configure the text appearance. The text position, font, size
and color can be set from here. If the text and background color are the same, the text
background will be transparent.
A.2.29
Metadata Spy
The Metadata Spy module can be used to setup metadata acquisition in StreamPix 7.
Monitor > Monitor Live metadata monitors the metadata of the live feed, useful to set the
metadata size when using the constant metadata size mode. The largest metadata size seen
will be shown as the Recommended Metadata Size. Once the largest size is determined, you
can select -> to copy this value to the edit box, then select Set new size to write the value to
the registry.
The Current Metadata Size is the maximum amount that can be stored after each image in a
sequence file. It needs to be large enough to accommodate the largest metadata size that
could come with an image. If you set the size to '0', the metadata will be stored with a
dynamic size.
Caution: Keep
in mind that you can't record in a loop when using dynamic storage.
The Inspect tab displays the metadata information for the currently shown image (either
from the Live or from the current Sequence).
In both tabs, the lists display the metadata name, the space (in bytes) required to store it,
and its content (if formatable to a string). Each metadata value, regardless of its length
comes with an 8-byte header. (This is why storing a single byte of metadata takes 9 bytes.)
244
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.2.30
Mikrotron Control Tool
This module allows you to control and adjust some of the most important Mikrotron
camera features by sending specific commands to the camera via serial communication.
The frame grabber that connects to the Mikrotron camera must be loaded and the serial
communication must be enabled before loading the module into the current workspace.
Figure 1-29: Mikrotron Control Tool module
The Image page of the interface lets you adjust the ROI, Digital Gain, Black Level,
Shutter Time, Frame Rate. Setting the ROI defines a new range for available frame rates.
Changing the Frame Rate sets a new range for available shutter times.
On the Settings page, the available features are: Shutter Mode (Free Run, PWC, Timer),
Shutter Polarity (Positive or Negative Edge), Mirror Mode (OFF, X Only, Y Only, X and
Y) and FPN correction (enabled or disabled).
NOTE:
A.2.31
When the camera is configured in 10 taps, use the STP4Admin application
(found in the same folder as StreamPix.exe) to set the Mikrotron Control Tool
module: 10 taps mode setting to Yes.
Optronis Camera Control Tool
This module allows to control and adjust some of the most important Optronis camera
features by sending specific commands to the camera via serial communication. The
frame grabber that connects to the Optronis camera must be loaded and the serial
communication must be enabled before loading the module into the current workspace.
NorPix Inc.
245
StreamPix 7 User Guide
The Image tab of the interface lets you adjust the ROI, Sensitivity (Gain), Black Level,
Shutter Time, Frame Rate. Setting the ROI defines a new range for available frame rates.
Changing the Frame Rate sets a new range for available shutter times.
Figure 1-30: Optonis Camera Control Tool module
On the Settings tab, the available features are: External Sync (OFF, ON), Sync Source
(Cable, Grabber), Sync Polarity (Low, High), Sync Mode (Edge, Level), Mirror Mode
(OFF, X Only, Y Only, X and Y) and FPN correction (enabled or disabled).
A.2.32
Photon Focus Camera Control Tool
This module lets you adjust the Photon Focus camera features via serial communication,
using the PFRemote API. Before loading the module, the communication with the camera
must be set up properly and tested in the PFRemote application. For this module, the
frame grabber that connects to the Photon Focus camera must disable the serial
communication. Otherwise, the module will not be able to connect to the communication
port.
Figure 1-31: Photon Focus Camera Control Tool module
After a valid communication port has been selected in the Settings tab, the module
connects to the camera and Image, Exposure and Adjustments tabs become available,
246
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
depending on the features supported by the camera model. If a feature is not visible or not
accessible, it means that it's not supported. The adjustable features might include ROI,
Shutter Time, Frame Time, Trigger Mode, Correction, Simultaneous Readout.
A.2.33
Point-To-Point Caliper
The Point-To-Point Caliper module lets you make point to point measurements on the
current image. To find the distance between two points, left-click on the first point and
drag the cursor to the second point. The module will draw a line between them, and the
measured length will be shown. The line will remain visible until a new measurement is
made, you click without dragging, or click the Clear button.
TIP:
For measurements to mean anything, you must of course calibrate the module
first, as explained below.
Measure tab
In the Measure tab, the options under Draw Overlays determine the circumstances in
which overlays are drawn:
• Select At grab level for overlays to be drawn on images as they are received from
the camera.
• Select On displayed frames for overlays to be shown regardless of image source
(camera or sequence file) and regardless of whether overlays will be saved.
Select On exported frames to apply overlays to images exported from a sequence,
in all file formats (seq, avi, bmp, jpg, etc.).
• Select Lock Overlay to make the module ignore mouse actions.
Figure 1-32: Point-to-Point Caliper module
In the Units box, enter the unit of measurement desired (pixels, mm, m, cm, km, %, etc.).
In the Decimals box, enter the number of digits to show after the decimal point.
Select the Clear button to erase the current measurement line.
NorPix Inc.
247
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Calibrate tab
When you switch to the Calibrate tab the module enters calibration mode, which is used to
set reference values. When you subsequently draw a measurement line, those values will
be used to compute the line's real length. Switching to any other tab puts the module out of
calibration mode.
To calibrate, start by selecting one of the three calibration methods available:
• Inter-pixel is the simplest method. It assumes that you know the exact distance
between adjacent pixels on the image. To calibrate, enter that distance under
Calibrated Length. The current calibrated length will appear as an overlay at the
bottom of the image.
• Between 2 points is the standard method. This method requires you to left-click
and drag the calibration line's handles to make a line of known length on the
image. Enter that length under Calibrated Length. Note that if you subsequently
redraw or remove the calibration line you will have to adjust the Calibrated
Length value accordingly. For the best accuracy, use a longer calibration line.
• Between 2 points (Horizontal & Vertical) is an advanced method. It is only used for
cameras that do not have square pixels, i.e. where the CCD inter-cell distance is
not the same horizontally and vertically. The calibration procedure is the same as
for the previous method, except that you have to do it twice, once with a
horizontal line and once with a vertical line. Both must be done for
measurements to be accurate.
When calibration is completed, switch to the Measure tab and do a couple of test
measurement lines to see if everything is correctly calibrated. If not, return to Calibrate and
readjust the calibration.
Overlay Settings tab
This tab controls how the various overlays are drawn.
Style lets you select between two ways of displaying a measurement line: as a Simple line,
with a T at each end or with Handles. T-end lines are the default.
248
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
InfoText lets
you determine where and how to display the text indicating the length of the
measurement line. You can position it to any corner of the image and select the font and
font size. For best results, use a fixed-width font such as Terminal or Courier..
Figure 1-33: Point-to-Point Caliper Overlay Settings
In the Colors box, select Text to change the color of text overlays (default is white on
black). Select Line to change the color of the measurement line (default is pink). Under
Text Background, if you select the same color as that used for text the background will be
transparent to the image.
In the Scale box, enter the Length of the scale using the unit of measurement you selected
in the Measure tab. From the pull-down list, select the corner of the image in which to
position the scale, along with its orientation (H = horizontal, V = vertical). To hide the
scale, select “None”.
NOTE:
When working with a line with “Handles”, the line is moved by dragging its
handles (the small circles at each extremity). At any time, double-clicking on
any part of the image will move the handles near the mouse pointer. The
precise start and end points of the line are in the exact middle of each handle.
Configurations tab
This tab allows you to switch between various configurations (i.e. calibrations).
Figure 1-34: Point-to-Point Caliper Configuration tab
To create a new configuration, first define a calibration in the Calibrate tab. Then, click on
Save current settings to a new configuration. The module will prompt you for a name
NorPix Inc.
249
StreamPix 7 User Guide
which will then be shown in the list of available configurations. Repeat for as many
configurations as needed.
Once you have created different configurations, you can switch from one to another onthe-fly by double-clicking on the required configuration from the list. You can also
overwrite an existing configuration with Save current settings to the selected
configuration. Delete unneeded configuration with Delete selected configuration. For both
of these, the “selected configuration” refers to the configuration highlighted in the list and
not the one currently loaded.
A.2.34
PTG Overlay
(This module is specific to Point Grey cameras)
Point Grey cameras include some specific time stamp information that can be added with
each captured image. The PTG Time Overlay module allows you to decode that
information and have it properly overlaid when the captured image is displayed.
It includes the support for the following 2 extra meta information fields provided by the
Point Grey camera API:
•
PC system clock
•
Embedded image timestamp.
To enable the feature on the camera, open hardware properties, select Settings tab, and set
“Time Stamp” to ON (default is OFF).
When the feature is on, the embedded image timestamp will overwrite the first 4 pixels of
an 8-bit image (32 bit). The same mechanism is used for the PC system clock: next 4
pixels (32 bit) includes the epoch time in second, and next 4 pixels (32 bit) include the
epoch microseconds.
.
Figure 1-35: PTG Time Overlay Module
The PTG Time Overlay Module allows you to “burn” or “overlay” the time stamp
associated with each image directly on the image itself. You can specify the font type,
size, position and location on the image. The overlay information can include Cycle time
(embedded image timestamp) and/or Epoch time. This can be useful when capturing/
exporting to AVI or image files, because those formats don't have time stamp support.
250
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.2.35
Raptor Photonics Control Tool
This module works with both OWL 640 and OWL 320 Near IR and IR cameras from
Raptor Photonics.
By default the module displays the interface for the OWL 640 camera. To switch between
the 2 supported camera models, in the module dialog, select to the Info tab, then select the
desired camera, and then press the Initialize button.
To communicate with the camera, a Camera Link frame grabber has to be loaded in the
current Workspace and the serial communication needs to be set up under Hardware
properties->Settings.
These are the settings for the OWL cameras:
• Data Length -8 bit
• Stop Bits -2
• Parity -None
• End Character -None
• Text Mode -Hexadecimal
• Communication Type can be set either via clserxxx.dll (select CLSER Port and
also set CLSER Baud Rate to 115200) or via COM Port.
• To set the Communication Type via COM Port, the COM Port has to be selected
first. Also, for COM Port, the UART Baud Rate setting has to be set to 115200.
Various camera specific parameters can be adjusted via the module tabs:.
Figure 1-36: Raptor Photronics module Image tab
NorPix Inc.
251
StreamPix 7 User Guide
.
Figure 1-37: Raptor Photronics module Settings tab
.
Figure 1-38: Raptor Photronics module Info tab
A.2.36
Sequence Disk Space
The Sequence Disk Space module calculates the available space for recording on a disk or
in RAM. The module uses the disk selected by the working folder option.
Figure 1-39: Sequence Disk Space module
252
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.2.37
Sequence Levels
The Sequence Levels histogram monitors every frame in a Sequence, computes the grey
level averages and plots them in real time. The radio boxes enable selection of the
histogram display, either in the docked dialog, in a new display in the Workspace, or both.
Figure 1-40: Sequence Levels module
A.2.38
TIP:
Use a multi-display configuration with the Show in a Display to allow viewing
of the image and histogram at the same time.
TIP:
Browsing through the Sequence with the Sequence Slider provides a quick survey of general levels, while pressing Play will read each frame in the Sequence.
T.S. Sync Monitor
The Time Source Sync Monitor Module can be used in conjunction with StreamPix
accurate time source devices. The module monitors the time source receiver devices and
reports in real time synchronization status information. Supported hardware devices are:
• Meinberg (GPS and IRIG)
• Spectracom (GPS and IRIG)
• Myricom 10GigE network adapter with Emergent technologies cameras.
Description of the various status modes:
1) The current time source does not implement sync status.
2) An error occurs while querying sync status from the time receiver.
3) The time source receiver is in sync with the reference time source (IRIG B or GPS
world time).
4) The time source receiver is not in sync with the reference time source (IRIG B or GPS
world time).
NorPix Inc.
253
StreamPix 7 User Guide
5) The time source receiver is no longer in sync with the reference time source (IRIG B
disconnected or GPS satellite tracking lost), but the board internal clock is still accurate
enough to deliver good time information.
A.2.39
Time Stamp Monitor
This is a watch dog utility that can be used to monitor in real time the incoming frames
time stamp. It computes the difference between 2 consecutive incoming frames and
compares the value with an expected reference value + or - a tolerance.
As an example, at 10 fps, a new frame is expected every 100ms. if the difference is 150ms,
the module will flag the frame assuring tolerance is below 50ms (or 50%).
Flagging is achieved by either marking the frame, outputting debug information or both.
This module is useful for detecting and troubleshooting possible dropped frame issues.
LTC-based Time Source
If an LTC based time source is in use, the module will also display an LTC check box.
Figure 1-41: Time Stamp Monitor module
When selecting the LTC option, this module will monitor the frame Linear Time Code
(LTC) increment.
Select the time code timing via the LTC Time Type, either NTSC or PAL (drop frame mode
is not supported).
Select the camera triggering rate: Depending on your hardware configuration, frames may
be captured at the same time code increment rate, at twice the rate, or 4 times the rate.
The module will monitor time code increment. If the time code increment continuum is
broken, the module will output and/or mark suspicious frames.
A.2.40
UDP Trigger
This module can be used to send notifications to StreamPix, using Ethernet UDP
messages. These messages can be decoded by the module and trigger various StreamPix
actions.
254
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
This module can only be loaded once. Hence, when used in a context of multiple
Workspaces, the module is loaded only once, but can forward messages to specific
Workspaces.
The current number of decoded messages is limited. Upon demand, we can add more
messages and implement further functionality. Contact [email protected]
The message is formatted as a string with the following tokens:
Action#Number#[EventName(Workspace)]:User defined message
Action: Keyword. The
module always checks messages by searching for this keyword.
#Number#: This is a number that can take any value. It will be retrieved by the module into
a 32-bit integer, and is currently reserved for future usage.
EventName: The
StreamPix event you want the module to trigger.
Possible values are (without the quotes):
“Pre/Post”
“Start Record“
“Stop Record“
“Start Playback“
“Stop Playback“
“Mark Frame“
“create new sequence and start recording”
“Create Text Overlay”
“Create New Image Sequence and Start recording”
“Create New AVI and Start recording”
“Create New MP4 and Start recording”
“Create New TS and Start recording”
[Seq file name token is defined by User defined message]
“Test”
Arguments are explained on the sample code project. Have a look at the main.cs file, close
to the end of the file.
Workspace: The target workspace name. If workspace name is empty, target is current
workspace or, if Selected All Workspace is active, target will be all workspaces.
User defined message: Any string the user wants to send. It can be retrieved by specific the
module for some specific usage.
NorPix Inc.
255
StreamPix 7 User Guide
IP address: The
Port: The
IP address that the module will be listening from.
port number the module will be listening from.
Trigger Event: Enable/disable
the module. When enabled, the module will forward
received events to StreamPix and workspaces.
Log UDP message: All received messages will be log to a file, located in %AppData
%\Norpix\UDPTrigger
Start/Stop monitoring: Turn
on/off monitoring of the UDP messages.
In conjunction with the UDP Trigger Module, a .NET C# sample application is provided.
It can be used to generate and send messages to the module. The sample files and code are
installed with StreamPix in the folder:
C:\Program Files\Norpix\Streampix6\UDPTrigSender.
A.2.41
Video Out
The Video Out module allows you to view multiple StreamPix real time camera feeds or
stored video sequences simultaneously. The module can send video to any monitor output
from a VGA adapter, meaning that the only limit to the number of concurrent video
displays is the number of monitors available.
NOTE:
For a single camera video out, see “Second View” on page 286.
This module supports multiple VGA adapters, making it possible to use one VGA output
per workspace for image display in addition to the standard display found in the main
StreamPix user interface.
Each of the devices and monitor(s) driven by the module are labeled Video Out, in order
to help differentiate them from the main display area where StreamPix is running.
The module can also be loaded using a single monitor configuration. The Video Out
window will appear on top of the main StreamPix display area. Double click the image
area to return to the main StreamPix window.
The Video Out module makes use of accelerated Microsoft DirectX 3D routines. Because
of the usage of DirectX routines, the module has a low impact on the main CPU. Instead, it
draws extensively from the GPU processing and display capabilities of the computer it is
installed on.
NOTE:
256
Beginning with StreamPix 7, it is no longer necessary to install the latest
DirectX Runtime libraries (which are available from http://
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx).
By default, the module will push a new frame to be displayed every 25 ms, or 40 times a
second. A faster frame rate can be set if needed. Frame display can also be synced with the
monitor refresh rate to avoid possible frame tearing effect.
TVOut module refresh time value is set by:
Key: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Norpix\Streampix6\Setups\%Workspace%
\TVOut\RefeshDurationTime
default value:25ms
The Video Out module includes several configuration tabs.
General Tab: Basic Settings
Figure 1-42: Color Processing tab
• Display Adapter: Select which Video Out monitor to drive. The monitor number
corresponds to the identified display detected by the graphic adapter driver.
• Image Source: Select which video source to display, which can be either a live
camera or a video sequence.
• Stretch Full Window: Stretch the displayed image so that it fits the entire Video
Out monitor area. When source image resolution is larger than monitor
resolution, the aspect ratio is maintained on output monitor.
• Center Display: Center the displayed image on the monitor (image is displayed in
the top left corner when left unchecked).
• Multiple Workspaces: Enable/Disable Multiple Workspaces mode. If Multiple
Workspaces mode is enabled, a Workspace tab is added. Enabling Multiple
Workspace allows for the display of more than one workspace’s content on the
secondary monitor.
• Display: Check this option to activate the secondary display.
• Change Background Color: Opens a color picker so that you can assign a specific
background color to the secondary display.
NorPix Inc.
257
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Bayer Conversion Tab
Use the GPU to Compute the Bayer Rendering
Figure 1-43: Color Processing tab
• Bayer Conversion: Enable/Disable conversion. Only useful if displaying a raw
Bayer image.
• Bayer Pattern: Select the Bayer pattern matching your sensor.
• Algorithm: Select the Bayer conversion algorithm (Fast or Accurate).
Color Processing Tab
Use the GPU to White Balance or ASC CDL Color Correct Images
Figure 1-44: Color Processing tab
• White Balance: Enable/Disable auto white balance.
• Algorithm: Select the auto white balance algorithm:
Mean Equalization
Gray Word
Standard Deviation
Mean and Standard Deviation
When an algorithm is selected, the Video Out module recalculates white balance with the
next incoming frame.
• Recalculate: Force the software to recalculate white balance using the next frame.
• The Video Out module supports ASC CDL grading color correction with revised
contrast.
258
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
The Channel pull down menu allows you to select which color channel to control. Select
All Channels to apply the same formula for all 3 channels, or select each individual color
plan you want to work with.
The Reset button allows you to reset the default values: Gamma (1), Brightness (0), Gain
(1) and Contrast (0).
Workspaces Tab: Working with Multiple Workspaces
This tab is available only when the Multiple Workspaces check box is selected on the
General tab. The Video Out display area can then be shared amongst selected Workspaces.
• Two display modes are available:
- Hybrid: Where one Workspace is displayed full screen and others are displayed as thumbnails.
- Equally Split: Where the Video Out area is equally split among the various
Workspaces. In split mode, the layout is defined using Video Layout X and Y
parameters.
Figure 1-45: Video Out Workspaces tab
• Video Layout X or Y: Set row and column count.
• Display Mode: Select between the available display modes:
- Hybrid with thumbnails on the right.
- Hybrid with thumbnails on the bottom.
- Equally Split between Workspaces.
• Main Hybrid: Select the main Workspace source to display.
• Apply Bayer & Color Process to All Workspaces: Set to apply Bayer settings or
color processing settings to all Workspaces or the main video.
NorPix Inc.
259
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.3 Premium Modules
A.3.1
Arduino Pulse Generator
Each Norpix DSA (Digital Signal Amplifier) box includes an Arduino microcontroller
which is typically used to generate synchronization trigger pulses at a predefined
frequency to synchronize exposure over multiple cameras.
The cameras have to be configured in external trigger mode, using either StreamPix via
Hardware Properties or their own software, to receive the exposure trigger from the
Arduino device.
Where you have multiple Arduino devices connected, you can select from the Device tab.
Figure 1-46: Arduino Pulse Generator dialog
General
Enter the desired pulse frequency and use the Turn ON button to toggle the pulse generator
on and off. Since the pulse train triggers the camera exposure, the pulse frequency will
determine the exact camera frame rate. The frequency precision can be set up to 2
decimals.
You can also specify a Start Delay (generator will start X ms after clicking the Turn ON
button) and a Stop Delay (generator will stop X ms after clicking the “Turn OFF” button).
260
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
A.3.2
Audio Trigger
This plugin monitors an audio input line and notifies StreamPix when the audio level is
higher than a certain value (threshold).
Figure 1-47: Audio Trigger dialog
To set an audio trigger:
1.
Select the capture audio device and sound format.
2.
Set a threshold value and start monitoring the audio line.
3.
Watch the audio level indicators and adjust the threshold value.
4.
Select an action to be executed by StreamPix when noise is detected. Available
actions are:
• None (Testing Mode)
• Start Recording
• Stop Recording
• Pre/Post
• Mark Frame
• Set Reference Time.
5.
A.3.3
When done, click on the Arm button to arm the trigger. If the Auto Rearm option is
checked the trigger will rearm itself automatically.
DAQ Capture
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
This module is provided for backwards compatibility with StreamPix 5. It is
not recommended to use this module with StreamPix 7. With the appropriate
license, StreamPix 7 already contains everything necessary for DAQ capture.
261
StreamPix 7 User Guide
The DAQ Capture Module allows you to capture analog and digital data from various A/D
converters and TTL input devices. This kind of data is generally described as one
dimension data type (1D) in opposition to images that are two dimension data (2D).
Each 1D data reading is defined as a dataset. Each dataset includes one reading from a
single or multiple A/D converter and/or single or multiple digital input.
1D dataset are recorded and stored into separate files (with a .daq file extension) from the
image Sequence file. The module supports reading from multiple A/D converters and
digital inputs at once, provided this is from the same adapter. A single dataset is performed
per received image.
Only one module can be loaded per workspace. Each module requires full and exclusive
access to the A/D adapter. When using multiple cameras, if A/D reading needs to be
separated per camera, multiple adapters are required.
Each dataset can be displayed on the image by either overlaying or burning to image.
Figure 1-48: DAQ Capture tab
Module features include:
• Per Workspace implementation - one DAQ device per Workspace.
• Auto DAQ file naming and generation while recording (.daq file is created with
the same name as the video sequence file).
• Synchronization with start / stop recording event.
• Synchronous playback with video.
• Automatic integration with file handling commands:
• File | Sequence Close will close both video and .daq files.
• File | Sequence Open will open the sequence file and the corresponding .daq file
if it exists (provided the module is loaded into the Workspace).
262
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
General Tab
This includes general settings for the module.
Figure 1-49: DAQ General tab
• Capture: Enables dataset capture. By default, when loaded, the module does not
perform capture until fully configured. During capture, the configuration cannot
be changed. Maximum capture rate is one dataset per image; however, you can
reduce the capture rate.
• Overlay: Enables overlay of the DAQ dataset on the screen.
• Burn to Image on Capture: DAQ dataset is burned in place of image pixels for
each image. Useful when exporting images to other file formats where the .daq
file cannot be reloaded for simultaneous playback.
• Analog DAQ data are printed as decimal numbers. Click the precision dialog to
specify the number of digits to be printed.
• Export Data to CSV File: The .daq file contains binary information. You can
export current .daq files to an Excel compatible comma separated text file (.CSV
file).
Device Tab
The device tab allows you to select a DAQ device to be used, and configure its hardware
properties, and overwrite the destination folder for the dataset .daq file.
Figure 1-50: DAQ Device tab
• Destination File: By default, the .daq file is stored in the same folder as the video
seq file. However, if disk bandwidth is not sufficient to handle it, an alternate
storage path can be specified.
• Manufacture: Select a device provider which is supported by StreamPix.
NorPix Inc.
263
StreamPix 7 User Guide
• Device: Select what device will be used.
• Analog Range: select what analog range will be used. It's only available for
analog line (this is hardware dependent, and may not exist for all supported
modules).
Analog Tab
This tab allows you to configure each A/D reading and conversion. Only first degree
linear conversion is possible: Y = A X + B:
Figure 1-51: DAQ Analog tab
Where:
• Y = printout value
• A = conversion slope
• X= A/D reading
• B= possible offset
• Line: Analog line name from device, read only.
• Name: Printed display name.
• ParamA: Type to set conversion function parameter A.
• ParamB: Type to set conversion function parameter B.
• Unit: Unit name to be printed.
Font&Position Tab
This tab can be used to adjust the font and position when overlaying or burning to the
image.
Figure 1-52: DAQ Font & Position tab
264
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
• Font: Select what font to use.
• Size: Select what font size to use.
• Overlay layout: Set how to overlay DAQ data horizontal or vertical mode. In
horizontal mode, all analog readings are displayed on a single horizontal line. In
vertical mode, all analog readings are displayed one per line. Digital data is
displayed on a separate column.
• Overlay Position (OffsetX and offsetY): Set where to overlay DAQ data.
• Change Font Color: Set overlay text color.
• Change background Color: Set overlay text background color.
A.3.4
Frame Grabber Pulse Generator
This module is used to set up the internal timing generator, available on certain frame
grabbers, to trigger camera exposure at a specified frequency. The cameras have to be
configured, using their own software, to receive the exposure trigger from the frame
grabber and not from another external source.
Figure 1-53: Pulse Generator dialog
Enter the desired pulse frequency and use the Turn ON button to toggle the pulse generator
on and off. The frequency precision can be set up to 2 decimals.
You can also specify a Start Delay (generator will start X ms after clicking the Turn ON
button) and a Stop Delay (generator will stop X ms after clicking the “Turn OFF” button).
NOTE:
A.3.5
Please check with Norpix for the up-to-date list of frame grabbers that support
this feature.
GPS / DMI Positioning
This module can be used to decode external GPS device messages and tag captured and
recorded images with the GPS information as metadata.
When the DMI (Distance Measuring Interval) mode is activated, travel distance
information from a Pulse Distance Interval (PDI) device can be taken into account to
control when cameras need to capture a frame. Image capture is then driven by a travel
distance rather than a periodic capture rate. Multiple cameras can be controlled together
via a single GPS+DMI module.
NorPix Inc.
265
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Besides the current GPS readings, current milepost information can also be gathered
during the image capture and embedded with each image metadata.
Depending on your authorization codes, either the GPS, DMI, or both sections of the
module will be available in the user interface. Once loaded, the module needs to be set up.
Configuring for usage with a GPS device
GPS related information is setup via the GPS Device tab. Selection of collected GPS
information is made via the GPS tab. Overlay information, font and position in the image
are setup via the Font & Position tab.
Configuring the Module
1.
Select the GPS Device tab to configure information related to the GPS device.
Figure 1-54: GPS Device tab
2.
Select connection port USB or COM(rs232) as well as COM port parameters. Check
with your GPS device for adjusting the parameters.
3.
Select the GPS Device Type. Choices are: None, NMEA, NMEA Shared, Garmin Serial
or USB, SIRF, or TSIP.
NOTE:
If no GPS device is currently available, selecting None prevents the module
from searching for a device.
makes sure the GPS received NMEA strings can be shared
between the GPS module as well as the GPS Time Source.
NOTE: NMEA Shared
NOTE:
266
The current NMEA Strings decoded by the module for Glonass, Beidou, or
GPS satellite constellation are the following: RMC, GGA, ZDA, SHR (pitch
and roll). More strings can be added on request. The module does not
currently perform any speed nor bearing calculations. Therefore, if the RMC
string is not complete, i.e.: missing the speed and bearing information, that
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
information will not be available.
NOTE:
When there is redundancy on the sentences, there is a hierarchy order. During
initialization, the module will wait until 20 sentences have been received to
decide which sentence to use.
For time stamping:
1ZDA, if not available
2RMC, then
3GGA.
For Pitch and roll: SHR
For Positioning:
1RMC, then
2GGA.
4.
To send the GPS data to UDP, select Send GPS Data to UDP, enter the IP address and
port number.
5.
To create a comma separated text file (.csv) that stores the selected GPS information
along with the index of each image during recording, select Save GPS data to file.
The file is created in the same folder as the recorded sequence, AVI, MOV or image
files and uses the recorded file name with a _gps.txt extension. If the destination
media for recording is RAM rather than disk, the file is created in the C:\temp folder
and is called RAM sequence_gps.txt. If a File Name Padding value is specified in the
StreamPix settings > More...> Images page, then that padding will be applied to the
image index in the GPS text file.
6.
Once the GPS communication related parameters are properly configured, switch to
the GPS tab, where the latest received GPS information will be displayed.
Figure 1-55: GPS tab
7.
NorPix Inc.
The GPS tab lets you choose which information will be decoded and stored from the
NMEA string sent by the GPS device. Latitude, longitude, altitude, speed, bearing
and time can be decoded. Depending on the GPS device, not all information may be
transmitted. Check with your GPS provider in case some information cannot be
displayed.
267
StreamPix 7 User Guide
NOTE:
8.
Overlay data panel is refreshed with new GPS information in real time.
Hence, a 10 Hz GPS will refresh about 10 times per second. As a
consequence, all frames received between 2 messages will be stamped with
the same information. When using high frame rate cameras, a couple of
consecutive frames can have the same GPS information.
Use the Font & Position tab to specify the font type, size, position and location in the
image. The data can be “burned” on each image or overlaid (no damage to the image
data).
NOTE:
The font size may look different when using the Overlay mode versus the
burn to image mode. In overlay mode, zoom factor applied on the image
display has no effect on the display font.
NOTE:
StreamPix 7 adds burn to image capability for Photon Focus double rate
image format.
User Data tab
The User Data tab includes 3 lines where extra text can be entered. The information is
stored in the *.csv log file with the GPS related coordinates.
DMI (Distance Measurement) functionalities
The DMI option includes additional hardware components:
• An electronic counter device (usually plugged into the image recording
computer) or via a USB link
• A Synchronization box that allows connecting various input and output signals
• An external Pulse Distance Interval signal usually provided by wheel motion
encoder (not provided).
DMI Synchronization Box:
The DMI (Distance Measure Interval) module requires the usage of some internal
electronic counter devices directly plugged into the computer. Supported devices are the
Measurement and Computing 4301LS, the National Instruments NI6601 or NI6320
devices and USB Arduino Uno microcontroller which includes some counters and IO
control.
268
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
The synchronization box needs to be connected to the host computer via the provided
cable. The box also includes some output, typically a Hirose 4 pin output connector to
power the cameras and forward the synchronization exposure pulses to each camera.
DMI sync box includes 2 BNC connectors:
• DMI Input: That connector must receive the PDI (Pulse Distance Interval) signal
from the wheel encoder. The PDI signal must be a TTL (0-5V) square wave
signal. Pulse rates depend on the motion speed of the vehicle.
• Camera Sync Output: That auxiliary output can be used as a repeater signal to
provide a similar pulse that is used to trigger the cameras.
NorPix Inc.
269
StreamPix 7 User Guide
DMI sync Box includes LEDs that can be used as tools for testing the behavior of the
device:
• Green PC Link LED: When on, that indicates the sync box receives appropriate
power from the computer.
• Red DMI LED: The LED will be flashing at the rate of the PDI. No motion will
generate no pulse.
NOTE:
For the pulse to be visible, you may need to adjust the duration of the pulse
via the configuration of your DMI device. The LED is directly connected to
the input line. If the PDI pulse duration is very short (a few milliseconds for
instance) you may not see the pulses: PDI pulse duration may be too short for
the naked eye. However, the counting devices are still able to properly handle
pulses with durations as short as 100 nanoseconds.
• RED Camera LED: The LED will be flashing each time a capture signal is sent to
each camera. When the LED is off, no image is captured.
Setup for the DMI control and camera synchronisation is set via the DMI Device tab.
Current DMI information is reported via the DMI tab, and to a log file if you select that
option on the DMI tab.
DMI device tab
Figure 1-56: DMI Device tab
Input device: Select the device used to count PDI pulse and manage camera
synchronization. Depending on your hardware configuration, various devices may be
listed:
• MCC4301 (USB, supported but obsolete)
• NI6601 or 6320 (PCI/PCIe)
• Ardiuno Uno (USB).
Edge: This
defines the edge sensitivity of the counting device: Typically, the device will
increment the pulse count every rising edge. It can also be set to falling edge.
270
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
COM port and Baud rate: These
two parameters are only for the Ardiuno Uno device.
Usually Ardiuno devices are installed over a virtual COM / USB port to communicate
with the host computer.
Trigger camera from DMI pulse: Synchronize camera exposure with the PDI pulses. Select
the number of required pulses between each captured image. This is depending on your
installation, number of pulse per revolution your encoder delivers and other parameters
like the wheel diameter.
Trigger camera by time: Alternatively.
image capture can be driven by a time base. in
which case, images will be captured every such time (in milliseconds), independently
from the travel distance. No PDI signal is needed for this setup. This mode can be used to
trouble shoot the camera control circuitry interdependent from the PDI circuitry. By
setting a time mode, frames from the camera should be delivered based on that period.
Update mile post on Frame trigger: By
default, mile post is updated when an image is
received from the camera driver. Enabling this mode makes the frame tagging with mile
post and GPS information more accurate since the tag information is stored at the camera
exposure time rather than when the frame is received by the computer (delay is typically
exposure time + camera read out time). This feature is only supported with AVT Gige
camera for now.
Delay 2nd pulse: Define the pulse delay for the 2nd pulse should you need to trigger
exposure for a different rig or cameras, for instance, between a front and a back truck
camera rig.
DMI tab: This
tab presents current DMI information.
Initial Miles: This
allows you to define the initial mileage position when the campaign
starts. At the beginning of a data logging campaign, an initial mile post value can be
entered. MilePost will increment / decrement according to the received DMI pulses
starting from that initial value.
Miles per Pulse: parameter defines the PDI incremental distance between each pulse. Refer
to your wheel encoder or DMI device documentation to enter the right value. An incorrect
value will affect the MilePost calculation.
Increase: Miles Post value
will increment when this is checked (default). Uncheck to get
the mileage decreasing.
DMI pulses are directly linked to the travel distance of the vehicle. Image capture is
synchronized with DMI pulses. Adjusting the Trigger camera every N Pulses value allows
to define the camera capture rate according to travel distance. Make sure to enter a proper
NorPix Inc.
271
StreamPix 7 User Guide
value, compatible with the campaign image sample rate, maximum vehicle speed and
maximum camera capture rate.
Figure 1-57: DMI tab
Log to file: Append
Reset: At
the current mile post to the GPS .csv file for each captured image.
any time, the MilePost value can be reset to the initial mile.
Although the Module can store GPS and mile post data to a .csv file during a recording,
that data can also be stored in a metadata file. See “Metadata settings” on page 169.
A.3.6
GPS Time Card
This module is useful for displaying GPS data received from certain time source boards
that have also GPS positioning capabilities.
The module allows you to choose which information will be decoded (latitude, longitude,
altitude). Depending on the board, not all information may be transmitted.
Figure 1-58: GPS Time Card dialog
Since GPS boards usually deliver a new message every second, this information is
refreshed every second. As a consequence, all frames received between 2 messages will be
stamped with the same information.
The GPS data can be “burnt” on each image or be overlaid (no damage to the image data).
You can specify the font type, size and position on the image.
272
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
The Save GPS data to file can be used during recording. It will create a comma separated
text file that stores the selected GPS information along with the index of each image. The
file is created in the same folder as the recorded sequence, AVI, MOV or image files and is
using the recorded file name with a “_gps.txt” extension. If the destination media for
recording is RAM rather than disk, the file is created in the working folder and is called
“RAM sequence_gps.txt”.
NOTE:
A.3.7
Check with Norpix for the up-to-date list of time source boards that support
this feature.
GRT Playout
The GRT Playout module provides the ability to drive the play-out capability for
supported Great River Technology frame grabbers.
Figure 1-59: H.264 Compressor module
Using this module, you can playback a recorded sequence to both StreamPix Image
Display Area as well as sending the frame back to the frame grabber play out buffers.
NOTE:
This module requires a GRT Play-out license.
The GRT frame grabber has to be loaded in StreamPix to be able to use the GRT Play-out
module.
Also, a sequence file has to be loaded in the same Workspace as the module.
To enable the play-out, start the sequence playback and press the Enable Play-out button.
The board will be automatically configured to transmit images currently played-out.
The module is compatible with all the playback functions of StreamPix: Pause, frame-byframe, go to a certain frame. Drag the playback slider, and it will always transmit the
current playback image.
To set the board back to receiving mode, press Disable Playout or unload the module.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
This module replaces the GRT Play-out Reader utility.
273
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.3.8
H.264 Decompressor
Figure 1-60: H.264 Compressor module
When capturing an H.264 compressed stream from a camera or a Web video source, the
H.264 decoding can make heavy demands on the CPU. When multiple H.264 streams are
processed simultaneously, the CPU load can be overwhelming, resulting is inconsistent
behavior.
Since decoding is mostly used for image display, this module allows you to reduce the
CPU load with a few options for frame decoding and display. The module can be loaded
and the decompression rate set per Workspace. The options are:
• Do nothing: No frames are decoded. StreamPix will display a black frame. Can be
used when recording is needed without display.
• Decompress key frames only: The key frame for each H.264 group of frame is
decompressed. Typically, this will allow the display of 1 frame every 30 frames,
with a moderate CPU load, and the ability to serve multiple Workspaces.
• Decompress all frames: All received frames are decompressed (CPU intensive)
and are made available for display.
This module processes received frames at the grabber level as well as during export. It
reduces the CPU load since frames received from the frame grabber do not need to be all
decoded earlier in the pipeline.
A.3.9
Image Merge
NOTE:
This module requires a specific license. Contact [email protected]
This module is typically loaded into its own workspace, with no grabber device for better
flexibility. This module can combine multiple video sources to create a larger image. It
can be applied while live or recording images. Merge stream is recorded according the
recording settings.
There is no alignment check, nor frame time stamp synchronization. The module only
waits to receive all frames from each source and then combines images into a single new
image. Sources should be the same image format, but can have a different image size.
NOTE:
274
Current implementation does not support all image formats. Image formats
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
that includes pixel pack are not supported. For other image formats, contact
Norpix tech support for an updated module.
Figure 1-61: Image Merge module
• Source image layout: set output image layout. Maximum is an array of 4x4.
• Keep input Format: by default output image format will be BGR. You can check
this option to force output image format to be the same as the source format.
• Camera list: Select the different Workspace names containing the source video
streams. The quadrants are populated based on the index order, from top left to
bottom right.
• Merge On: Enable / Disable the merge processing. The module can also be used to
merge pre-recorded sequences.
• Output Format:The result is then exported to various output formats, such as
SEQ, AVI, series of images...
The frame rate for the merged sequence is defined by the frame rate of the last item in the
list. When merging frames from cameras running different frame rates, it is recommended
to list the fastest frame rate last.
A.3.10
LiDAR Logger
This module connects to a Sick Bulkscan LMS 511 device. It allows you to configure
some of its parameters and to retrieve the data sent by the device.
First, you need to establish the connection with the device by filling in the corresponding
IP address and port in the IP Connection tab. These settings should be previously
configured with the Sick SOPAS Engineering Tool available on the manufacturer's
NorPix Inc.
275
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Website. The connection can be initialized manually, by pressing the Connect button or
automatically, if the Reconnect at Startup option is selected.
Figure 1-62: LiDAR Logger module
Then, in the Measurements page, several parameters can be adjusted: Angular Sweep, Scan
Rate and Angular Resolution. Each time one of these parameters is changed, the new
configuration is sent automatically to the device. Sometimes, reconfiguring the device
might take a few seconds.
The data captured from the device can be saved separately in a log file and/or as metadata,
embedded in each recorded image.
When saving to a log file, the module creates a text file in the same folder as the recorded
sequence, AVI, MOV or image files and is using the recorded file name with a “_lidar.txt”
extension. If the destination media for recording is RAM rather than disk, the file is
created in the working folder and is called “RAM sequence_lidar.txt”.
The Mounting Angles tab allows you to fill in the angles at which the device is mounted.
These parameters are also saved along with the data received from the device.
The data structure of the LiDAR output is detailed below.
Sample entry:
1|2012/07/05 16:53:50 314|30,20, 35|DATA_PKT_DISTANCE1_MEAS,
3500,23826,1|2500,0.000000,4294917296,761|405,3058,...
Image index in the sequence
(group delimiter)
276
1
|
Date
2012/07/05
Time
16:53:50
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
Milliseconds
314
(group delimiter)
|
X orientation
30 deg
Y orientation
20 deg
Z orientation
35 deg
(group delimiter)
|
Measurement type
DATA_PKT_DISTANCE1_MEAS (Distance
measurement)
Scan Rate
35 Hz
Scan Count
23826 (unique scan line index for this device, will always
increase by 1 with each scan line)
Scale Factor
1
(group delimiter)
A.3.11
|
Angular Step Width
2500 = 0.25 deg (in 1/10,000 deg units)
Scale Offset
0
Start Angle
4294917296 = -5 degrees = (2^32 - 50000) = max long
value - 50000 (in 1/10,000 deg units)
Number of Data Points
761 (190 deg sweep / 0.25 deg step + 1)
(group delimiter)
|
Data
< 761 Data Values ...> in millimeters from unit
Line Scan Viewer
This module has been designed to display and export to various format images from a line
scan source. Contrary to area scan sources, line scan sources deliver a single line of pixels.
Viewing a single line image where the line is replaced at a high rate is too challenging and
of little interest. The Line scan display module allows a waterfall like display, where new
lines to be displayed are appended to the previously displayed ones. Older lines eventually
get removed.
Line scan cameras are used to capture web-type data and can be seen as one dimension
devices, delivering one dimension images. The typical output of these cameras
implements displaying multiple lines at the same time so that the viewer can picture what
is happening under the camera. Also, line scrolling is required as the older scanned lines
need to be discarded to make room for the newer ones.
Some line scan camera devices or frame grabbers can combine a set of lines together to
build a kind of area scan line image. The line scan viewer module can also accommodate
those devices, and still present a waterfall like image display.
NorPix Inc.
277
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Page size and image size:
For line scan cameras, we define a page as the number of lines delivered by the camera
within a single image. So a page is basically equivalent to an image. Except that the
viewer will combine multiple pages to generate an image for display. Usually, the page
size is 1 line. However, the line rate can be very high, sometimes delivering 20 000 lines
per second, or 20 000 pages/images per second.
Managing 20 000 lines a second could be challenging for most software. However,
combining those lines within, for instance, a single page made of 100 lines, allows
StreamPix to deal with a more sedate 200 images per second.
The line scan viewer module can also be used to export acquired lines into various
formats:
• Combine consecutive lines into a single area scan like image (export to still
images).
• Convert to an equivalent area scan movie.
Once the module is loaded, you will notice a new tab in the workspace display area. This
tab gives access to the linescan viewing pad, while you can still access the usual live
camera pad and sequence pad.
Figure 1-63: Line Scan Workspace icon
The module includes 3 tabs to allow configuring various display and referring options.
General tab: display options
The line scan pad can display images from 2 sources: Direct from the camera or from the
recorded sequence file.
When Number of lines is set to Automatic, the number of lines in the waterfall display is
adjusted to the viewer window size. When set to Manual, one can define how many lines
will be simultaneously displayed.
278
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
Depending on the scan direction of the web in front of the camera, adjust image
orientation: Forward (most recent page is added at the end of the current set of lines) or
Backward (most recent page is added at the beginning of current set of lines).
Figure 1-64: Line Scan dialog
Depending on camera orientation, it is also possible to have the waterfall display vertically
(0 or 180 degrees), or horizontally (90 or -90 degrees).
Below is a one-page 100 line display of a rotated Pepsi® pop can in front of a
monochrome linescan sensor:
Figure 1-65: Typical Line Scan view
Figure 1-66: Waterfall view, vertically and horizontally oriented
The module also includes an option to overlay a captured time stamp for each page. When
displaying an image from the camera source, the module will overlay the timestamp of the
last page. In playback mode, three timestamps are overlaid: The oldest page, the middle of
the view page and the newest page. The overlay position depends on the image
orientation.
Several timestamp display schemes are available. Also, time can be overlaid as absolute or
relative to the first captured page. You can also overlay the page index.
NorPix Inc.
279
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Font & Position tab
This allows customization of the timestamp overlay (position, font, text size, color and
background color).
Export tab
Exporting line scan pages can be done via the regular StreamPix export command.
However, the module can be used to export the waterfall like display images.
Figure 1-67: Export tab
Consecutive lines in a page can be exported as an area scan-like image. Set the number of
lines to the desired size of the image to be either identical to the display area or to your
own choice.
Supported export formats can be one of the following: BMP, JPG, TIFF, PNG, FIT, JP2,
DPX, for still images, or AVI, MOV (32 bit only) and SEQ for movie-like rendering.
When exporting to a movie format, a custom frame rate can be set. By default, the frame
rate of the original sequence will be applied.
A.3.12
MCC Pulse Generator
The MCC Pulse Generator module allows to control the image acquisition speed of your
camera or frame grabber and synchronize the acquisition between multiple workspaces.
The cameras have to be configured to receive the exposure trigger from an external source
(i.e. the MCC device).
Figure 1-68: MCC Pulse Generator dialog
To get started, enter the pulse frequency to be generated. Since the pulse train triggers the
camera exposure, the pulse frequency will determine the exact camera frame rate.
The MCC board can be programmed to generate a single pulse train by selecting a single
channel, or multiple synchronized pulse trains if all channels (counters) are used.
280
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
Optionally, the MCC board can be programmed to start the pulse(s) with a certain delay.
Use the Pulse ON button to toggle the pulse train on and off.
A.3.13
Motion Detection
The Motion Detection module is designed to perform real time image processing (IP) on
incoming images and upon detecting significant motion or change in the image, it can
generate an event to StreamPix.
Figure 1-69: Motion Detection module
At load time, the module does not perform any detection. Push the Detect On/Off button to
turn on/off the monitoring.
The Module can perform the analysis on the whole image area, or on a defined region of
interest (ROI).
Three different image processing algorithms are available, depending on the nature of the
scene or image to be monitored:
• Mean Gray Value: The module will calculate the average gray level in the defined
ROI and upon a change from a reference value, will trigger the event.
• Absolute Difference: The module will calculate the pixel to pixel difference from
a reference image and trigger the event when the difference reaches above a
certain threshold.
• Max absolute Difference: The module will calculate the pixel to pixel difference
from a reference image, search for the maximum difference value and trigger the
event when the difference reaches above a certain threshold.
The Module can generate any of the five following StreamPix events:
• Start Recording.
• Stop Recording.
• Pre/Post Continuous: Continuously generate pre/post events until the condition
resets.
• Pre/Post Reset: While waiting until the condition resets before generating a new
pre/post event.
• Mark Frame.
NorPix Inc.
281
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Configuring Motion Detection Module:
The following parameters have to be configured:
Image Source: The module can be applied on an incoming stream of images from a camera
or for tune up purposes, it can be applied while playing back a sequence. During playback,
no events are generated since there is no point in managing recording status while playing
back.
Choose among three available algorithms, according to what you think will
best suit your needs. Depending on the algorithm selection, some extra specific parameters
need to be adjusted.
Algorithm:
• Mean Gray level: Set the conditions for when the event should be triggered:
- Above Threshold,
- Below Threshold.
- Adjust the threshold value..
Figure 1-70: Mean Gray Value
•
Absolute Difference:
- The percentage Mean Gray defines the minimum value in pixel intensity that
must be encountered before an event is triggered.
- The percentage ROI specifies a minimum number of pixels where the change
must occur.
- Since Absolute Difference performs an image subtraction between the last
received image and a reference image, you need to define the reference
image. It can be the previous captured image or an image that is defined as the
282
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
reference. Use the capture button to capture and save the reference image to
disk.
Figure 1-71: Absolute Difference
• Max absolute Difference:
- The percentage grey defines the minimum value difference in pixel intensity
that must be encountered before an event is triggered.
- The difference can be calculated between the current and last image or with a
reference image (constant) that you need to define. Use the capture button to
capture and save the reference image to disk..
Figure 1-72: Max Absolute Difference
Select StreamPix event to be triggered: There
are five possible StreamPix events that the
module can trigger:
• Start Recording
• Stop Recording
• Pre/Post Continuous
• Pre/Post Reset
• Mark Frame.
NorPix Inc.
283
StreamPix 7 User Guide
To make the module less sensitive to false detection, it is also possible to enable event
triggering only after the condition was detected continuously for a specific number of
consecutive frames.
Figure 1-73: Event trigger
Select ROI
Motion Analysis can be performed either on a full image size, or using a specified region
of interest (ROI). ROI can be defined by either manually entering the coordinate of the
region in the image, or by interactively clicking and dragging an ROI on the display area.
If multiple ROIs are needed, load the module multiple times.
Caution: Beware
of the added CPU load, since this module is performing extended
image processing.
If the total processing time takes longer than the frame time, the module will not process
the next incoming frame. It will finish processing the current frame, then wait for the next
one.
A.3.14
NI Pulse Generator
This module can be used to trigger camera connected to a National Instruments Legacy
device. The module is quite simplistic. Enter the desired pulse frequency and use the [Turn
ON] button to toggle the pulse generation on and off.
Figure 1-74: Ni Pulse Generator
You can also specify a Start Delay (generator will start X ms after clicking the Turn ON
button) and a Stop Delay (generator will stop X ms after clicking the Turn OFF button).
A.3.15
NI-DAQmx Pulse Generator
Similar to the NI Pulse Generator plugin, the NI-DAQmx Pulse Generator module is used
to program a National Instruments board to generate continuous pulses with a specified
284
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
frequency. The I/O board must be compatible with NI-DAQmx drivers and support pulse
generation.
Figure 1-75: NI-DAQmx Pulse Generator
Simply enter the pulse frequency and use the “Pulse ON” button to toggle the pulse
train(s) on or off.
If multiple channels are selected, the pulse trains will start/stop in synch.
The pulse train triggers the camera exposure and so, it controls the camera frame rate.
Assuming the board is programmed to generate multiple pulse trains having the same
frequency, all the cameras will be synchronized, since the pulse trains are synchronized.
You can also specify a Start Delay (generator will start X ms after clicking the “Pulse ON”
button).
A.3.16
NI Pulse Divider
The NI Pulse Divider module provides a way to divide a pulse train frequency. The
National
Instruments I/O board must be compatible with NI-DAQmx drivers and support pulse
generation.
Figure 1-76: NI Pulse Divider
1.
Specify the terminal where the input pulse that needs to be divided is present.
2.
Select the output channel and enter a divisor.
3.
Use the Start and Stop buttons to start or stop the pulse train respectively.
Limitation: the divisor must be greater than 4.
NorPix Inc.
285
StreamPix 7 User Guide
A.3.17
Second View
The Second View module is similar to the Video Out module, but displays a single
Workspace and automatically switches the display to the Workspace that has the current
mouse focus. You can zoom, pan and scroll using mouse gestures. See “Video Out” on
page 256.
A.3.18
SimulPix
The SimulPix module provides the ability to combine the output of two cameras into a
single image. The resulting image looks like the 2 images are superimposed. Currently,
two algorithms can be applied for combining the 2 images:
• Merge 2 images together from the 2 separate sources (Alpha blending)
• Image division: any source can be divided by the other source.
The module provides registration functionality: the 2 images can be horizontally and
vertically offset or rotated. In Alpha blending mode, each source image can be displayed
with a separate color. The module performs the calculation in real time (less than 10 ms
with an Intel Core 2 duo processor T7200), providing real-time visual feedback in single
or multiple display mode.
The SimulPix module works with cameras that acquire synchronously or not. SimulPix
will wait until it receives an image from each camera before performing the rendering. If
the 2 cameras are not capturing at the same time (synchronized or Genlock), this may
result in a short delay.
Figure 1-77: SimulPIx module
Each camera can have a different image size and ROI, but must have the same bit depth.
Image format should be monochrome, 8, 10, or 12 bit.
All parameters except source cameras can be changed during runtime and are saved
automatically. If you want to change the source cameras, you should stop the merging
process.
286
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
The SimuPix Module can operate either on a live feed from 2 cameras, or it can also
operate on a set of Sequence files. Use the Capture From parameter to select the operating
mode. To record the resulting image into a Sequence, make sure to select all Workspaces
(CTRL+A), and from the file menu, select “In Every WorkSpace, New Sequence...”
Configuring the SimulPix Module.
1.
Select the Operating Mode (Merge or Division).
2.
Select the Capture source, either Camera or Sequence.
3.
Select the Color Mode you want to be applied. Depending on the Color Mode selected,
different coloring schemes are available:
• Channel Map: Each camera image is represented with gray levels from back to
white. Individual image intensities can be adjusted using the sliders. The
Transparent option lets you assign which image will appear as a transparent layer.
The Transparent Color option lets you assign a color to the transparency.
• Primary Color: Only the basic primary color of the color wheel are available: red,
green, blue, and combination of those like magenta, cyan and yellow.
• Any Color: Any color can be used, (more CPU demanding). Select the color bar to
the right of the camera to choose from a color picker. Use the sliders to adjust the
intensities.
4.
Optionally, select the Transparency source, either Disable, No. 1 (for camera 1), or No.
2 (for camera 2) and the transparent color to be used.
NOTE: Transparency can
be applied on color or monochrome images. For color the
transparency color is the corresponding RGB triplet, on monochrome, only
the red channel of the color RGB triplet is used.
Transparency can only be applied when operating the module in Merge Mode
with Channel Map color mode.
For example, when No.1 is selected, all pixels of the image issues from the
source No.1 that have the specific transparency color intensity will be
processed as transparent.
5.
Select the two Workspace sources within the Cameras area.
Once the parameters are selected, you can turn on the processing by selecting the Live on
or Snapshot button.
NOTE:
NorPix Inc.
On a slower computer, since the calculation requires significant CPU, the
overall computer response time may become slower. If this is the case,
possible work arounds are:
-Reduce image ROI of the process
-Reduce camera frame rate
287
StreamPix 7 User Guide
-Turn off merge mode when not needed
-Disable rotation mode if not needed (see below).
Fine tuning SimulPix registration parameters
Select the Settings (green arrow) button to access the Registration and Resize parameters.
Registration parameters
• Mirror allows second source to be either vertically or horizontally mirrored.
• Rotation allows for optical geometric correction. The center of the rotation point
can be overlaid into the merge image to allow better tune up. Center point color
can be selected by double clicking the color pad.
• Alignment: second source image can be horizontally or vertically offset.
Figure 1-78: SimulPix registration parameters
Resize parameters
Figure 1-79: SimulPix resize settings
You can resize either camera image. To resize an image, select the Resize Camera
checkbox and enter the new size in pixels.
288
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
Using SimulPix module in image division mode
Figure 1-80: SimulPix Division Settings
When running with image division mode, the following calculations is performed:
SimulPix = (Image camera1 - background) / [registration correction (Image camera2 background)]
Background images can be acquired any time, by enabling and clicking the corresponding
button. Background images are saved to disk and are always used when Apply is checked.
SimulPix includes an extra setting tab that allows the selection of various pseudo-coloring
display to allow better representing the calculation result.
Result image can be pseudo colored with 2 different pseudo coloring LUT (rainbow or
invert rainbow) and two scaling scheme can be applied.
Frame dropping issues:
By default, the SimulPix module is assuming both cameras deliver images at a constant
rate and identical frame rate. It will monitor the incoming image rate to make sure none of
the cameras are dropping frames. Frame dropping from one camera would result in misssynchronization of the 2 captured series of images, and incorrect image superimposition.
When an expected incoming frame timed out, the module will suspect a dropped frame
and will make its best to drop an equivalent frame from the other camera. Monitoring is
performed based on the time stamp given to each incoming frame at the image capture
level.
When dropped frames are detected, SimulPix will log a message in the general log dialog.
Dropped frames imply the removing of a corresponding frame from the other camera on
NorPix Inc.
289
StreamPix 7 User Guide
the SimulPix stream Sequence file. The 2 sequence files from both cameras are
unchanged. Hence, the number of images in each sequence may not be identical.
Example:
• Recording of a 100 frames sequence:
• Camera 1 dropped frame #25 and 76
• Camera 2 dropped frame #50
Sequence file from camera 1 will include 98 frames. Time stamp difference between
frame 24 and 25, as well as 75 and 76 will show twice the expected duration, Sequence file
from camera 2 will include 99 frames. Time stamp difference between frame 49 and 50,
will show twice the expected duration, Sequence file from SimulPix will include 97
frames. Time stamp difference between frame 24, 25, as well as 48, 49 and 73, 74 will
show twice the expected duration.
When the 2 cameras do not run at the same frame rate, the monitoring function will
prevent the module from operating. A registry key can be set to disable the frame drop
monitoring process (default if no key exists: frame drop monitoring is on):
Key Path: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Norpix\Streampix6\Admin
Key Name: SyncChecking
Key Type: DWORD
Key Value:
1 enable, 0 disable monitoring
The Export button lets you export selected alarm data to a CSV (Comma Separated
Values) text file, from where it can be imported into a spreadsheet program, such as
Microsoft Excel®.
A.3.19
Video Scopes
When digitizing film stock, color rendering can shift over time, resulting in less realistic
output requiring further color correction downstream. The Video Scopes module can
dramatically improve workflow by providing real-time feedback on the color space during
the conversion process, reducing the need for further color correction later.
290
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
The Video Scopes module includes a Waveform Monitor, Vector scope, Histogram and
YUV/RGB parade.
Figure 1-81: Video Scopes module
The Waveform Monitor is an industry-standard video calibration instrument that
measures video luminance and chroma components. For SD and HD video displays, the
RGB values are converted to YCrCb for display.
The Vector scope shows Hue and Saturation levels. It is a great tool for indicating white
balance, as shifts in hue are readily visible when offset from the white (255) and black (0)
center of the scope. Layout rings help the visualization, with mini-targets are at 2.5 IRE
and at 2.5 degrees, and outer targets are at 20 IRE and 10 degrees. Chrominance may be
isolated by converting the RGB color space to YCrCb, and using the CrCb component to
calculate the necessary vector (angle and magnitude) from the colour data. Rendered data
can be displayed as Percent, IRE or RGB values.
The Histogram displays pixel depth from 0 to 255 is on the X axis, with the number of
occurrences per pixel on the Y axis.
RGB parade shows individual RGB color values and intensities. There are two settings:
RGB (Tri-mode) or luminance and RGB (Quad-Mode). The YUV parade shows the
luminance and chrominance values. Data display for both is in Percent, IRE or RGB.
The color space conversion for each instrument follows industry video standards of
BT.610 for SD and BT.709 for HD. Originating color space is pure 24-bit RGB with full
gamut and converted to limited gamut YUV or YCrCb depending on the instrument
setting, with appropriate 8-bit scaling and IRE level limits. Settings can be saved and reused.
NorPix Inc.
291
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Video Scope Settings
The Settings tab lets you set the display parameters for each Scope. Changes made to the
parameters exist for the current session only. Tool buttons let you save any changes to a
Scope as the default, or restore the factory defaults.
Figure 1-82: Video Scopes Settings tab
The Settings > Layout tab let you decide which Scopes and to display and how..
Figure 1-83: Video Scopes Settings > Layout tab
A.3.20
Web Streamer
The Web Streamer module can stream in real time video and audio captured with any
StreamPix supported grabber/camera to a LAN or WAN (Internet). A wired or WIFI
connection can be used. Video stream is real time H.264 compressed, and streamed to
clients. Clients receive the video stream using one of two different protocols:
292
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
• HTTP Live Stream (HLS)
• Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP).
The protocol choice is automatic and depends on the client’s media player. HLS is
requested for all Apple based product, while RTSP is supported by a wider range of media
player, such as Android devices, Window’s Media Player, VLC, etc.
Mobile Devices and smart phones can receive a live video stream anywhere they have a
connection.
This module must be loaded into every Workspace where video streaming is required.
The module will allow streaming video and audio from multiple workspaces. The Start
button launches all configured Workspace streams simultaneously, or you can select Auto
Start when StreamPix Launches. The Copy URL button copies the URL to the clipboard.
NOTE:
Audio is possible from RTSP streams only. HLS audio is not yet supported.
The module will real time H.264 compress the video, which is demanding on the CPU.
Nvidia, AMD or Intel based GPU can be used to perform real time H264 compression.
Otherwise, it is recommended to use an Intel Quick Sync capable CPU. In which case, the
video can be compressed using the GPU, freeing the CPU. Maximum image resolution
supported by the module for GPU compression is HD (1920x1080). Larger resolution will
require the CPU for compressing each frame. The compression codec can be selected
individually for each Workspace, allowing for load balancing.
In order for the module to operate, a live stream must be received from the camera.
The module can also be used to stream an already locally recorded video. Make sure
StreamPix is playing back the video before any client connects to the playback stream.
The module supports an unlimited number of clients. Limitation comes from the available
output bandwidth provided by the network adapter and infrastructure. Each stream
bandwidth can be estimated as the stream bitrate multiplied by the number of
simultaneous clients.
NorPix Inc.
293
StreamPix 7 User Guide
General tab
Figure 1-84: Web Streamer General tab
IP Address: This
allows you to select the network interface to be used for streaming the
video. The selection is made via NIC IP address.
Start: Enable
the video streaming service. Until the service is started, the module will not
listen to clients’ connection requests.
Auto Start when StreamPix Launches: Automatically
starts Web Streamer when StreamPix
starts.
Streaming Live: Select for Live streaming. This defines the live streaming URL address for
the live stream. Read Only. The client uses this URL to stream video. Typically: http://
[computer NIC IP Address]/[Workspace Name]/streaming/live.
Select for streaming in Playback mode. This defines the streaming
URL address for the playback stream. Read Only. The client uses this URL to access the
video under playback. Typically: http://[computer NIC IP Address]/[Workspace Name]/
streaming/playback.
Streaming Playback:
RTSP: By
default, the module streams using RTSP. Apple HLS protocol is optional.
Enable RTSP Server to also include RTSP streaming, should you use an RTSP compatible
media player client.
Port: RTSP
default streaming port number is 554.
Http Live Streaming: The
Http port: Default
streaming port number used for streaming the video.
port is the Web port interface, 8080.
Copy URL: Copies the URL to the clipboard. This is the URL for the broadcast stream.
You can paste it to any compatible media player. For example, in a VLC Player, select
Media > Open Network Stream and paste the URL.
To verify that the Web Streamer module is operating correctly:
294
1.
Select Copy URL for the RTSP stream.
2.
Create a new workspace, naming it for example “WebStreamerCheck”.
NorPix Inc.
Plugin Modules
3.
When prompted for grabber selection, select Web Ip Compatible Cameras.
4.
Select Hardware properties | Ip Camera Settings.
5.
Select ADD URL and paste the copied URL.
A live stream should appears in the selected display area for the Workspace.
Video tab
Figure 1-85: Web Streamer Video tab
Compression: The
compression codec can be selected individually for each Workspace.
This allows you to select whether the CPU or GPU will perform the compression.
Software uses the CPU, while selecting QuickSync will use the Intel GPU. For CPU/GPU
load optimization, it is possible to select for each Workspace either using the GPU or the
CPU.
• Software: This will use the CPU for compressing the video.
• Quick Sync: If listed, the CPU is Quick Sync capable, and compression can be
accelerated via the Intel GPU.
• nVidia [#]: If listed, an nVidia GPU is available for accelerated compression. Each
GPU can compress up to 2 streams. Multiple GPUs are supported.
• AMD [#]: If listed, an AMD GPU is available for accelerated compression. There
is no limit on the number of streams that can be processed simultaneously.
Performance will degrade when there are too many frames to be processed.
Muliple GPUs are supported.
Sampling: It
is possible to reduce the image resolution before this one is encoded, which
reduces the CPU/GPU load and the required streaming bandwidth. Sub-sample the video
1:2 is half the resolution, 1:4 is one quarter of the resolution, while 1:1 is full resolution.
Apply StreamPix color Processing: The settings set in Bayer / Color ribbon for display will
be applied. This is useful for raw Bayer images that need to be color interpolated and color
balanced before being compressed.
Streaming Every: Most media players are not able to handle video rates higher than 30
frames per second. When using high frame rate cameras, the module will by default
stream at 30 fps. This setting allows you to override the default behavior. Select either
Frames or Milliseconds.
NorPix Inc.
295
StreamPix 7 User Guide
• Every X frames: A new frame is pushed every specified number of received
frames. Use a value of 0 for pushing all the frames.
• Every X milliseconds: A new frame will be pushed to the encoder every specified
number of milliseconds. Use 0 for pushing all frames.
Bitrate: This
defines the output bit rate in bits per second. This defines a maximum output
bitrate, assuming 30 frames per second rate and a GOP size of 30. If you force the module
to push for instance 60 frames per second, the bit rate per second will be twice the set
value. For an HD image (1920x1080 @ 30 fps) a typical bit rate for good quality is 4 to 5
megabits per second, or 4000000. For other resolutions and frame rates, a good rule of
thumb is to start with a calculated equivalent value. For example, for VGA resolution, 640
x 480 @ 30 fps: Estimate the compression factor for HD and apply to the resolution:
(1920x1080x30x8)/4000000 = 125. (640x480x30x8)/125 = 590000 bps.
GOP: This defines the size for each group of frames (GOP). H.264 compressed streams are
made of a combination of key/A frame and D frame. A GOP of a size set to 30 means each
group is made of 30 frames, 1 key frame and 29 D frames. A smaller GOP size increases
bandwidth, but makes the quality and decoding easier.
Audio tab
Figure 1-86: Web Streamer Audio tab
Stereo audio is streamed compressed using Advance Audio Codec (AAC) and is only
available for RTSP streams (not supported for any HLS stream).
When using a multichannel audio source, left and right channel can be user selected.
Bitrate allows you to define audio quality.
Possible error messages
• Workspace name contains a space character (i.e. "Camera 1"). Rename the
Workspace to a name without any spaces (i.e.: "Camera1").
• RTSP port in use: Port #554 is the default streaming port for RTSP streams. Even
if no program is running on your computer, some background process might still
be using the current RTSP port (Citrix, NI web server, etc.). Enter a different port
# within the [1024:49151] range.
296
NorPix Inc.
B
Keyboard Shortcuts
This Appendix describes the default keyboard shortcuts available in StreamPix 7.
TIP:
You can define your own custom keyboard shortcuts through the Quick Access >
Customize Quick Access Toolbar option. See “Customize Keyboard Shortcuts”
on page 3-91.
Command
Keyboard shortcut
Toggle Bayer conversion on displayed frames
Ctrl-B
Bayer conversion Sample Factor 1:1
Ctrl-1
Bayer conversion Sample Factor 1:2
Ctrl-2
Bayer conversion Sample Factor 1:4
Ctrl-4
Bayer conversion Sample Factor 1:8
Ctrl-8
Close current workspace
Ctrl-F4
Toggle Display
Ctrl-D
Full-screen mode
F12
Go to Frame #
Ctrl-G
Select all workspaces
Ctrl-A
Next Workspace
Ctrl-Tab
Toggle Recording
Ctrl-R
Table A-1: Keyboard shortcuts
StreamPix 7 User Guide
Command
Keyboard shortcut
Snap a single frame
Ctrl-Space
Reset Zoom level
(numpad *)
Zoom in
(numpad +)
Zoom in (X axis only)
Ctrl - (numpad +)
Zoom in (Y axis only)
Alt - (numpad +)
Zoom out
(numpad -)
Zoom out (X axis only)
Ctrl - (numpad -)
Zoom out (Y axis only)
Alt - (numpad -)
Trigger Pre/Post event
Ctrl-P
Show/Hide docking panel
Alt-P
Show Window Task Manager
Ctrl-Alt-T
Help
F1
Table A-1: Keyboard shortcuts
298
NorPix Inc.
Index
Symbols
*.avi 17, 18, 69
*.bmp 17, 69
*.dng 18
*.dpx 18
*.fits 18
*.jp2 18
*.jpg 17, 69
*.mov 17, 19, 69
*.png 18
*.seq 17, 69
*.tif 17, 69
A
A/V Streamer Module 305
About StreamPix 7.0 15
About this Manual 20
Action Log 87, 203
AEC Control 223
Application Button 69
Application Menu 24
Application menu
Customizing 166
ASC CDL 137
ASC CDL adjustment 158
ASIO 112
Audio
Files 112
Input Level 113
Output Volume 113
Settings 112
Audio buffer usage monitor 113
Audio in/Out Module 305
Audio Input/Output 305
Audio Trigger 88, 261
Audio2mpa.exe utility 211
Authorization codes 16
Auto Gain Exposure Iris Module 224
Auto Naming 81
Auto Naming Settings 150
Auto-Fill 67
Autonaming Files 83
Auto-switch between live and playback 74
Averaging 238
AVI
file 69
playback rates 174
Settings 153
B
Background Color 68, 123
Basic Concepts 28
Basler Camera Link module 224
Bayer
Pattern 134
Bayer Conversion 132
Bayer conversion 130
Bayer Conversion Settings 132
Benchmarking 209
BIRGER Control 225
Bit Depth Management 155
Bitmap Overlay 226
Bluetooth 103
Brandywine devices 104
Buffer usage 178
Buffers 198
BWAVE 113
C
Camera
Load 66
Camera (Hardware) Trigger 87
Camera Selection 64
Camera Stream
Duplicate 107
Camera triggering 85
Cameras
Loading and Unloading 79
Multiple 78
Cayer Compressor 192
Channel Map 287
Chart Merge 117
Chronological Order 145
Clear Selection 147
Clipboard
Copy image to 145
Codec
MP4 / TS 154
Codes
Authorization 16
Color
Background 68, 123
Balance 156
Matrix correction 158
Workspace 125
Color balance 132
Color correction
ASC CDL 137
Color Processing 132, 155
Color Processing settings 155
Command Line Arguments 211
Command Line module 229
Comment overlay 230
Compression
Sequence 189
Compression Estimator Module 231
Configuration
Load/Save 208
Save 93
Saving 92
Configure
Output Files 84
Copy Image to Clipboard 145
Crop 237
Crosshair Module 227
CSV
Export to 118, 119
CUDA JPEG compression 192
Customize Keyboard Shortcuts 91
customtoken 105
D
DAQ
Graph Settings 116
Graph Settings (File) 118
Graphs 161
DAQ (Data Acquisition) 115
DAQ Export to .xls 57
DAQ graph
Selecting multiple curves 117
DAQ Module 305
Data Acquisition (DAQ) 115
Debug Log 210
Defaults
Factory 196
Restore 93
Destination Files 69
DirectX 112
Disk Benchmarking 209
Display
assign 74
Auto-Fill 67
Switch 122
Toggle 122
Display Tools 122
Displayed Data 125
Displayed Data settings 163
Docked Dialog 166
Docking Panel 33
Show/Hide 125
Documentation 14
Duplicate Camera Stream 107
E
Edge
Rising/Falling 86, 203
Enable Input Control 202
Enable Output Control 204
Event 86, 203
Export LUT 136
Export Settings 108
Export To .CSV 118, 119
Exposure 224
Exposure Time Reader 232
F
Factory Defaults 196
Falling edge 86
Feedback 14
File Automatic Deletion 232
File Formats 17
300
File Types 111
Files
Autonaming 83
Destination 69
First Frame 75
Focus Assist 233
Focus Slider 145
Formats
Supported 17
Frame
Reference 142
Frame #
Goto 142
Frame Grabber Pulse Generator 265
Frames
Sort before exporting 188
Free Modules 223
Full Screen 122
G
Gain 224
GenIcam 224
Goto
Frame # 142
Time stamp 142
Goto Buttons 146
Goto First 147
Goto Last 147
GPS / DMI Positioning 265
GPS data as image metadata 89
GPS Time Card 272
Grabber
Load 66, 107
Grabber Adjustments 215
Grabber Properties dialog 80
Grabber Selection dialog box 64
Gray world 156
GRT Header Data module 235
GRT Playout module 273
GUI 20
Modify 90
H
H.264 191
H.264 Decompressor 274
H.264 Decompressor Module 56
H.264 loop recording 193
Hardware Properties 67, 80, 107
Histogram 234, 291
History
Sequence 141
Horita TCBTX 103
Huffman 191
Hybrid Mode 124
I
I/O 201, 202
NorPix Inc.
Event Markers 205
I/O Manager 85
I/O Manager docked dialog 35, 85
IDT Mx Camera Control 235
IDT Mx Camera Control Tool 235
Image
Single 72
Image Alpha Blending 236
Image files 70
Image Information 108
Image Merge 237
Image Resize 237
Image Rotation 238
Images 199
increment 105
Input Action dialog 85, 202
Input Control 202
Enable 202
Input/Output Trigger 201
Installing 16
Interface 20
Modify 90
Interface settings 164
Inverted rainbow 159
Iris 224
J
JPEG
Lossless 190
Lossy 191
K
Kalman filter 57
Keyboard Shortcut
Remove 91
Keyboard Shorts
Customize 91
Kinect 239
L
Language File 164
Last Frame 75
Lens Control 241
Level low/high 86, 203
Levels 242
LiDAR Logger 242
Limit sequence 178
Line Scan Viewer 277
Linear Time Code 102
Live Adjustments 67, 79, 107
Live Levels 242
Live/Playback Auto switch 74
Load Camera/Grabber 66
Load Grabber 107
Log
Debug 210
Log Action 87, 203
301
Lookup Table
Recalculate 135
Loop recording 178
Looped Recording 81
Looping 44
Lossless JPEG 190
Lossless RLE 191
Lossy JPEG 191
LSB Alignment 186
LTC 102
LTC Overlay 242
LTC-based Time Source 254
LUT 155
Export 136
LUT Processing 159
Lynx IPX Camera Control 242
LZ 191
M
Main features 15
Manual
About 12
Conventions 13
Manual Playback Control 32
Manual Playback Slider 173
Marker
Add 146
Markers in a Sequence 188
Master Workspace 29, 79, 98
Matrix Switch 243
MCC Pulse Generator 280
Mean & standard deviation 156
Mean equalization 156
Meinberg Device 104
Metadata Manager 208
Metadata Overlay 243
Metadata settings 169
Metadata Spy 244
Mikrotron Control 245
Minimize the Ribbon 91
Modules
Free 223
Loading and Unloading 222
Monochrome image processing 159
More... settings 199
Motion Detection 281
MOV settings 169
Move Reference Frame 142
MP4 25
mp4 57
MP4 / TS Codec 154
MPEG2 25
MPEG4/TS setting 154
MSB or LSB Alignment into TIFF container 186
Multi-cameras version 15
Multi-Display 126
Toggle 125
NorPix Inc.
Multi-Display Layout 123
Multi-Display Layout buttons 68
multiple curves
Selecting in a DAQ graph 117
Multiple Workspace 78
Multiple Workspaces 96
Multithreading
Enable/Disable 186
N
Next Marker
Goto 146
NI Pulse Divider 285
NI Pulse Generator 284
NI-DAQmx Pulse Generator 284
Notifications 199
NpxDebug 44, 196
O
Object Overlay 281
Offset 68
Optronis Camera Control 245
Output Actions 88
Output Control
Enable 204
Output Files
Configure 84
Output files 69
Overlays 123
P
Performance 210
Photon Focus Camera Control 246
Play/Pause 75
Playback
Timeshifted 145
Playback Buttons 31
Playback Control
Manual 32
Playback Position
Current 146
Playback Rate
Override 187
Playback Rate settings 173
Playback Sequence 81
Playback settings 171
Playback Slider 173
Playback Speed
Decrease 144
Increase 144
Plugins
Loading and Unloading 222
Point-To-Point Caliper 247
Polling delay 86, 202
Pre/Post Event Trigger 145
Pre/Post Trigger docked dialog 35
Pre/Post Trigger settings 174
302
Premium Modules 260
Prepost settings 174
Previous Marker
Goto 146
Processing Levels 133
Properties
Hardware 80
Pseudo Color 159
PTG Overlay 250
Pylon driver 224
Q
Quick Access Toolbar
Hide/Show buttons 90
Modify 90
Move 91
Quicktime 70
QuickZoom 165
R
Rainbow 159
RAM
Pre-allocate 44
Sequence in 69
RAM Sequence 188, 189
Raptor Photonics Control 251
RAW 190
Record button 31
Recording
Interval 73
Looped 81
Manual 71
Options 81
Scheduling 72
Recording Duration 73
Recording Manager 100
Recording Position
Current 146
Set 145
Recording Rate 106
Recording Rate settings 179
Recording settings 176
Reference Frame 142
Goto 142
Move 142
Reference Time 142, 143
Refresh Rates 125
Region of Interest (ROI) 68
Registry Keys
Special 186
Remote Control settings 183
Remove a Keyboard Shortcut 91
Restore Defaults 93
RGB parade 291
Ribbon
Minimize 91
Ribbon interface
NorPix Inc.
Customizing 166
Rising/Falling edge 86, 203
RLE 191
ROI 68
Rolling Averaging 238
Rotation 238
Playback 171
Playback Rate 173
Pre/Post 174
Recording 176
Recording Rate 179
Remote Control 183
Sequence 187
Session 195
Timeshifting 197
Workspace 198
S
Saturated
3 level 159
5 level 159
Save Configuration 93
Scale by max 156
Script Engine 219
Script Examples 182
Scripts
Editing 219
Second View module 286
Selection Grabber/Camera 64
SendRM 213
SendRM Support 213
Sequence
Append 144
Compression 189
History 141
Individual Tools 141
Markers 188
Navigating from docked dialog 147
New 69
open 74
Playback 81
playback rates 173
RAM 69, 188
Trim 144
Viewing 75
Sequence Disk Space 252
Sequence Docked Dialog 34
Sequence Files 69
Sequence in RAM 69
Sequence Information 146
Sequence Levels 253
Sequence Settings 187
Sequence Slider 164
Sequences 32
Session settings 195
Set First 147
Set Last 147
Settings
Auto Naming 150
AVI 153
Color Processing 155
Displayed Data 163
Export 108
Interface 164
Metadata 169
More... 199
MOV 169
303
Shortcut
Remove 91
Shortcuts
Customize 91
SimulPix 286
Single Camera version 15
Single Image 72
Snap button 31, 71
Sort Images 145
Spectracom 104
Stand Alone Workspace 78
Standard deviation 156
Statistics 241
Status Icons
Workspace 29
Step
Back 75
Forward 75
Stop condition 73
Stop Condition(s) 181
Store / Retrieve GPS 89
StreamPix 32-bit 169
StreamPix 7.0 Versions 15
StreamPix Scripts
Editing 219
Studio Project 305
Studio version 305
Switch Display 122
Symetricom Devices 104
Synchronization 172
System Requirements 16
T
T.S. Sync Monitor 253
Task Manager 210
Terminology 13, 14
Thumbnails View 124
Time Overlay Module 305
Time Source 101
Time Source dialog 102
Time Stamp
Goto 142
Time Stamp Corrector Utility 217
Time Stamp Monitor 254
Time stamps display 164
Timeshifted Playback 145
Timeshifting settings 197
NorPix Inc.
Timestamp Corrector Utility 56
Toggle Display 122
Tokens 151
Tools tab 208
Transparency 287
Transparent Color 287
Trigger
Audio 88
Input/Output 201
Trigger Module button 145
Trigger Pre/Post Event 145
Triggering 85
TS 25, 154
ts 57
U
UDP Trigger 254
UTC 165
V
Vector scope 291
Video Codec
MP4 / TS 154
Video Out 256
Video Scopes module 290
W
Watchdog 108
Waveform Monitor 291
Web Streamer module 292
What’s New in StreamPix 6.3 51
304
When a recording ends... 177
When StreamPix starts 195
White World 156
Window leveling 160
Windows security prompts 72
Windows Task Manager 210
Windows Thread Scheduler 101
Working Folder 100
Default 198
Workspace
Color 79, 100
Controlling 100
Master 29, 79, 98
Select All 98
Setup 64
Stand Alone 78, 98
Workspace Color 65, 79, 125
Workspace Manager 64, 96
Workspace Status Icons 29
Workspace(s) settings 198
Workspaces 28
Multiple 28, 78, 96
Select all 78
Y
YUV parade 291
Z
Zoom 165
Zoom tools 123
NorPix Inc.
This module is deprecated, since the features are now integrated directly into
StreamPix 7.0.
StreamPix 7 User Guide
306
NorPix Inc.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement